JP2019053760A - Management method by security data management system and management system - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a management method by a security data management system which allows communication of information from a wide variety of sensors and information to various driving units which can vary states in a system, and is useful for security management, and a management system.SOLUTION: According to a management method of one embodiment, first, second and third system controllers are provided in a first section, a second section and a third section. Information is provided from the first system controller to a monitoring unit. A local network system is provided in the sections. A server is connected with the first to third system controllers via a wide area network system. By using the respective network systems, even if a special electronic unit moves or does not move from the third section to the second section, the special electronic unit is detected by the first system controller to present at least position information about the special electronic unit to the monitoring unit.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 36B

Description

  Embodiments of the present invention collect M2M (Machine to Machine) or IoT (Internet of Things) technology that collects information using various sensors installed in, for example, public facilities and homes, and can perform control based on the information. of Things) related to applied technology.

  As shown in Non-Patent Document 1 regarding the M2M or IoT application technology field, worldwide standardization work is in progress. Here, we aim to develop a general-purpose standard for comprehensively managing information obtained from all kinds of various sensors and adapting the results to various services.

D. Boswarthick et.al .: M2M Communications: A Systems Approach (2012, John Wiley & Sons Ltd.)

  As shown in Non-Patent Document 1, in the standardization activities so far, it is assumed that information is collected from “sensor embedded devices (devices)” and the information is integratedly used to provide services. In addition, due to the versatility requirements of standardization, it is necessary to comprehensively handle information obtained from a wide variety of sensors. Furthermore, in order to maintain the utility value of the established standard for a long period of time, it is necessary to be able to cope with the expandability of sensor types incorporated into devices in response to future technological advances in sensor-embedded devices. In this way, it is not only difficult to ensure consistency between the diverse (sensor) diversity and (standard) versatility, but also versatility (sensor) The inherent contradiction of standardization activities is inherent in ensuring flexibility and extensibility).

  The following four points are raised as specific technical issues at present. First of all, the accuracy of information collection to be used for service provision largely depends on the power ON / OFF for each sensor-embedded device. That is, in order to select the optimum service content, it is necessary to estimate / determine the state in a predetermined system or the user's action and state by integrating information obtained from various sensors. However, when most devices in the network system are turned off, there is a problem that the amount of information to be collected is too small and the accuracy of the estimation / determination is greatly reduced.

  Next, there is difficulty in responding to future changes in the functions of sensor-embedded devices. For example, since the function of the television was previously limited to only receiving broadcast waves and displaying video, consider a case where a communication standard that can grasp only the television display state is formulated. In contrast, Japanese high-end television now has a built-in recording function. There are also high-end televisions having a data communication function using a network line. Although it is not so popular now, the position information of the viewing user can be detected by the naked eye 3D TV (3 Dimensional Television). Further, in the future, a light sensor may be incorporated in the television (to optimally control the brightness of the display screen). As described above, in order to upgrade the standard every time the TV function is improved, there is a problem that it takes too much time to study the standard and the response is delayed. Conversely, if the number of corresponding items in the standard is increased in advance in anticipation of future expansion of the TV function, the standard itself becomes redundant, and the corresponding control in the device becomes complicated.

  As a third technical problem, current communication standards aiming at versatility and expandability are finely layered (refer to FIG. 32 for details), so duplication and redundancy occur in communication information. By hierarchizing communication standards, it is possible to deal with various technical fields by replacing specific layers, but it leads to an increase in the amount of communication information and complexity of processing. As long as communication is performed using a personal computer or smart phone equipped with a processor with high processing capacity, the increase in the amount of communication information and the complexity of processing have not been a problem. However, these are not suitable for power saving and processing simplification requirements.

  When communication information is made versatile as the last technical problem, a large processing power is required, which leads to an increase in price and power. For example, there is a communication method in which communication information is described in an XML (Extensible Markup Language) format so that the communication information has flexibility and expandability. However, in this case, an XML decoding function (parser) is required on the receiving side, and the receiving side function becomes complicated. On the other hand, there is a communication method corresponding to the diversity of devices by providing a standard table that is different for each device type as communication information. However, even in this case, a standard table that can handle up to the same type of high-end equipment becomes complicated, and the burden of communication processing in a single function equipment increases.

  An object of the present embodiment is to enable communication of information from various sensors and information to various driving units capable of changing the state in the system, and a management method and management by a security data management system useful for security management To provide a system.

  According to one embodiment, according to the management method of one embodiment, first, second, and third system controllers are provided in the first section, the second section, and the third section. The monitoring unit is provided with information from the first system controller. A network system functioning as a local is provided in each of the above sections. The server and the first to third system controllers are connected by a network system that functions as a wide area. By using the network system, even if the special electronic unit moves from the third section to the second section, even if it does not move, it is detected by the first system controller, and the special electronic unit is sent to the monitoring unit. Present at least location information about the unit.

  The special electronic unit can be defined as a unit that is a common or generalized combination module, device, or mixed form, and can be managed and controlled in units.

  The unit and system controller constitute a network system, and the system controller controls the entire network system. Further, the system controller can communicate with the outside of the network system.

FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram of a wide area network structure in the system of the present embodiment. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram of a local network structure in the system of the present embodiment. Embodiment explanatory drawing (1) of a unit. Embodiment explanatory drawing (2) of a unit. Embodiment explanatory drawing (1) of a composite module. Embodiment explanatory drawing (2) of a composite module. Embodiment explanatory drawing (3) of a composite module. Embodiment explanatory drawing (4) of a composite module. Embodiment explanatory drawing (5) of a composite module. Embodiment explanatory drawing of a composite module (6). Specific structure explanatory drawing in a sensor / communication module. 1st Embodiment which shows the specific structure in a drive / communication module. 2nd Embodiment which shows the specific structure in a drive / communication module. 3rd Embodiment which shows the specific structure in a drive / communication module. 4th Embodiment which shows the specific structure in a drive / communication module. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a specific structure in a communication module. The other Example explanatory drawing of the specific structure in a communication module. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of another embodiment relating to a local network structure. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining another embodiment related to a local network structure. Application examples for local network structures. The basic application / communication layer structure explanatory drawing of this embodiment system. The outline explanatory view of the information communicated in a communication middleware layer. Explanatory drawing of the transmission data structure in the network line in this embodiment. The data structure explanatory drawing in a physical layer header and a MAC layer header. FIG. 3 is a detailed explanatory diagram of an IEEE extended address in the present embodiment. Explanatory drawing of the data structure in an IPV6 header. Communication middleware data structure explanatory drawing in C-format. Communication middleware data structure explanatory drawing in E-format. Communication middleware data structure explanatory drawing in A-format. Application example explanatory drawing regarding a basic application / communication layer structure. Another embodiment (1) explanatory drawing regarding an application / communication layer structure. Another example (2) explanatory drawing regarding an application / communication layer structure. Device driver periphery explanatory drawing in a computer system. Explanatory drawing around the management / control area of the units in the system. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining another example of management / control relation of units in the system. Explanatory drawing of the management / control method of the unit in a system seen from software. The comparison figure of the existing file system and the unit management method in this embodiment. The example of a display example of the structure in a unit management pseudo drive. Explanatory drawing of the example of a display in a compound module corresponding folder structure. The example of a display example of the structure in a sensor / communication module correspondence folder. The example of a display example of sensor information in a sensor / communication module. Explanatory drawing of the position management routine in a section of an apparatus or various modules. Explanatory drawing of the example of the address table managed by this embodiment system. FIG. Illustration of spatial unit sections related to sensing and services. Explanatory drawing of the basic processing flow in a system controller. Information collection and estimation / judgment method explanatory diagram from devices and composite modules fixedly arranged in a section. Explanatory drawing of the estimation / judgment method in this embodiment. Explanatory drawing of the example of a time series change of communication information. Explanatory drawing of the example of the service provision method in a section unit. Information collection and estimation / judgment method explanatory diagram from devices and composite modules movable between sections. The position monitoring method explanatory drawing of an apparatus and various modules. Structure explanatory drawing of the direction detection part of the electromagnetic wave transmission origin in this embodiment. Structure explanatory drawing of the stealth board in this embodiment. An explanatory view of the direction detection principle of the radio wave transmission source in the present embodiment. Illustration of section division example in the social infrastructure field. Explanatory drawing which shows the composite module application example between different middleware layers. Explanatory drawing which shows the example which a composite module applies between different systems. Explanatory drawing which shows an example to which the compound module was applied. Explanatory drawing which shows the other example to which the compound module was applied. Explanatory drawing which shows the other example to which the compound module was applied. Explanatory drawing which shows the other example to which the compound module was applied. Explanatory drawing which shows the other example to which the compound module was applied. Explanatory drawing which shows the other example to which the compound module was applied. Explanatory drawing which shows the other example to which the compound module was applied. Explanatory drawing which shows the other example to which the compound module was applied. Explanatory drawing which shows the network connection in a home client system. Explanatory drawing of the control method of a smart household appliance corresponding to automatic control. Robot cleaner control condition setting screen display example. The exchange information content explanatory drawing between the air-conditioners based on E-format. The exchange information content explanatory drawing between televisions based on E-format. Explanatory drawing of the relationship between the status information for every related apparatus, and a user's action and state. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram of a detailed control example of each device related to the robot cleaner. Other embodiment explanatory drawing which shows the method of automatically determining the optimal operation state of the robot cleaner based on the collected information.

  Hereinafter, embodiments will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the structure of chapters and sections relating to the description contents of the present embodiment is shown in the following table of contents.

Chapter 1 Overview of Overall System in This Embodiment Section 1.1 Overview of Overall System of This Embodiment Section 1.2 Description of Unit Configuration Section 1.3 Description of Configuration in Composite Module Section 1.4 Structure in Sensor / Communication Module Section 1.5 Explanation of structure in drive / communication module Section 1.6 Explanation of structural example in communication module Section 1.7 Explanation of overall structure of wide area network system in this embodiment Section 1.8 Local in this embodiment Explanation of Network System Structure Section 1.9 Example of Utilization of Compound Module in Local Network System Chapter 2 Overview of Hierarchical Structure and Data Structure of Communication Information Section 2.1 Hierarchical Structure 2 of Network Communication Related Functions in this Embodiment Section 2 Relationship between the hierarchical structure of communication-related functions and communication information on network lines Section 2.3 Physical layer and media access Z-format data structure in section 2.4 Internet protocol version 6 layer data structure section 2.5 C-format data structure in communication middleware layer 2.6 section E-format in communication middleware layer Data structure section 2.7 A-format data structure in the communication middleware layer section 2.8 Address table used in the system of this embodiment and examples of its use Chapter 3 Management / display method for each unit Section 3.1 Basic Section 3.2 General Unit Management Method Section Unit Management Section 3.3 Specific Unit Management Examples and Display Examples Chapter 4 Section Overview in the System of the Present Embodiment 4.1 Section of the System of the Present Embodiment Section positioning Section 4.2 Management method of the location of various modules and devices in the section 4.3 Information on each section Processing method from collection to service provision Section 4.4 Method of tracking movement between sections of various modules and devices Section 4.5 Compatibility between systems with different units (composite modules and devices) Chapter 5 Application for each application field Example 5.1 Civil application example 5.1.1 Wide area network system application example 5.1.2 Compound module consumer application example 5.1.3 Section division method Example of application to the consumer sector Section 5.2 Example of application to the social infrastructure field Section 5.2.1 Example of application of the wide area network system to the social infrastructure field Section 5.2.2 Example of application of the composite module to the social infrastructure field Section 5.2.3 Application example of the section division method to the social infrastructure field Section 5.3 Application example to the healthcare field Section 5.3.1 Application of the wide area network system to the healthcare field Example 5.3.2 Application example of composite module to healthcare field Section 53.3 Application example of section division method to healthcare field Chapter 6 Smart home appliance automatic control method Section 6.1 Smart for automatic control Relationship between home appliances and smart home appliance-related devices Section 6.2 Overview of control methods for smart home appliances that support automatic control Section 6.3 Communication information with smart home appliance-related devices Section 6.4 Estimating user behavior and status / Judgment Method Section 6.5 Other Embodiments Related to Automatic Control Between Smart Home Appliances Next, the chapters / sections will be described below in accordance with the table of contents.

Chapter 1 Overview of Overall System in Present Embodiment Section 1.1 Outline of Overall System of Present Embodiment First, an overview of the overall system of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2. FIG. 1 shows the entire structure of the wide area network system in the entire system of this embodiment, and FIG. 2 shows the structure of a local network system that constitutes a part of the wide area network system. Further, the embodiment and service contents described in FIG. 1 and the newly produced effect are applied as they are to the embodiment system shown in FIG. Similarly, the embodiment, service content, and newly generated effect described with reference to FIG. 2 (or described later with reference to FIG. 8A to FIG. 8B and FIG. 9) are also applied to the entire wide area network system of FIG. The

  In FIG. 1, a closing organization or organization that handles a predetermined product or information is referred to as a wholesaler A — 1102 or B1 / 2 — 1104-1 / 2. In addition, organizations or groups that provide predetermined services are referred to as service providers A to C_1112-1 to 1-3. Here, each service provider A to C_1112-1 to 3 has one or more servers 1 to n_1116-1 to n. In the system of the present embodiment, the servers 1 to n_1116-1 to n are also referred to as cloud servers or clouds. The service providers A to C_1112-1 to 1-3 obtain products (or information) from the wholesalers B1_1104-1 and / or the wholesalers B2_1104-2 that handle similar products (or information), and the domains 1 to 3_1122. -Provide services to 1-3. Here, the domains 1 to 3_1122-1 to 3 indicate a predetermined network space, and one domain 2_1122-2 includes one or a plurality of systems α_1132 and β_1134. In the following description, another name for the systems α_1132 and β_1134 may be referred to as a network system or a client system. Therefore, the names “network system” or “client system” appearing in the following description mean the same terms as “system α_1132, β_1134”. As described above, one domain 2_1122-2 may be configured from a plurality of different systems α_1132, β_1134. Therefore, in the following description, the domain 2_1122-2 may be referred to as a composite client system. Therefore, the name “composite client” that will appear in future explanations is synonymous with “domain 2 — 1122-2”.

  However, the wholesalers A_1102 and B1 / 2_1104-1 / 2, the service providers A to C_1112-1 to 3 and the domains 1 to 3_1122-1 to 3 are respectively connected to the network. In addition, the service providers A to C_1112-1 to 1-3 are connected to each other through a network, and information sharing or resource cooperation 1114 is possible.

  The system α_1132 shown in FIG. 1 means a minimum network system unit that is internally connected to each other via a network. In many cases, one system controller α_1126 is installed in the system α_1132. The system controller α_1126 manages or manages the inside of the (network) system. However, one system β_1134, which is the smallest network system unit, may be composed of only one system controller β_1128. Further, the system α_1132 and the system β_1134 constituting the same domain 2_1122-2 may be physically separated from each other. Furthermore, it is possible to perform cooperation processing between different systems α_1132 and β_1134 in the same domain domain 2_1122-2.

  In the system of the present embodiment, predetermined service units to be provided to users in the same system α_1132 are defined as sections 1 to m_1142-1 to m. In addition, the units related to integration, management, and control of information collected in the same system α_1132 may be defined as sections 1 to m_1142-1 to m. As a matter of course, the same section 1 to m_1142-1 to m may be used as a service unit for the user and an information integration / management / control unit. Thus, by providing services and collecting information / managing information in units of sections 1 to m — 1142-1 to m, an effect of improving the efficiency of service provision and information collection / management and an improvement of convenience for the user are produced.

FIG. 2 shows the structure of a local network system formed by the system α_1132 in FIG. A processor 1230 and a memory unit 1232 are included in the system controller α_1126.
And network communication is performed in the system α_1132 via the communication module 1202-3. At the same time, the system controller α_1126 can perform network communication with the outside via the same communication module 1202-3.

  In the system of the present embodiment, the basic unit having a network communication function other than the system controller α_1126 in the network system α_1132 is defined as units 1-7_1290-1-7. In the present embodiment, predetermined various functions scattered in the network system α_1132 are managed or controlled in units of units. Thereby, integrated management / control of various functions in the same network system α_1132 is facilitated regardless of the physical form of the unit. FIG. 2 shows an example in which the communication modules 1202-4 to 10 are built in each of the units 1 to 7_1290-1 to 7 as a mode for realizing the network communication function in each of the units 1 to 7_1290-1 to 7. However, the means for realizing the network communication function is not limited thereto, and for example, a part of the predetermined module or part of the device may have the network communication function. Alternatively, the network communication function may be realized as a part of the function in the specific software.

  In the system of the present embodiment, the system controller α_1126 basically manages / operates / controls network communication in the network system α_1132. In many cases, the system controller α_1126 is physically installed in the network system α_1132 as shown in FIG. In this case, each of the units 1 to 7_1290-1 to 7 in FIG. 2 can directly and directly communicate with the system controller α_1126. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and as will be described later with reference to FIG. 9, a system controller β_1128 physically installed outside the network system α_1132 may perform management / operation / control of network communication within the network system α_1132. The present invention is not limited to this, and independent information communication between the different units 1 to 7_1290-1 to 7 can be performed under the management of the system controller α_1126 or the system controller β_1128.

Section 1.2 Description of Units The feature that the various functions scattered in the system α_1132 are managed or controlled in units by the system controller α_1126 has already been described in the previous section. That is, as shown in FIG. 2, since there are a large number of various function realizing means in the same network system α_1132, conventionally, the integrated management and control of these functions has been accompanied with great complexity. Furthermore, the physical form of the unit that realizes various functions includes a variety of devices such as a device 1250, a composite module 1295 (the description of this composite module will be described later in section 1.3), a sensor module 1260, and a drive module 1270. Therefore, the complexity of integrated management and control is further increased.

As a countermeasure against the increase in complexity, the system according to the present embodiment uses the network communication function as a reference for various function realizing means scattered in the network system α_1132 (the basic means for realizing each network communication function is the basic one). It is characterized in that it is managed / controlled as a unit. In other words, a single function or a set of various functions that can be realized in cooperation with the minimum network communication function is enclosed by a common and generalized concept called a unit. As described above, each individual unit can take various physical forms, but management, control, or information collection is performed using a common / general unit that does not depend on a specific physical form as a basic unit. As described above, by defining a unit that does not depend on an individual function or physical form as a management unit (or control / information collection unit) in the network system α_1132, the management in the network system α_1132 by the system controller α_1126 or the system controller β_1128 or This has the effect of greatly simplifying control / information collection. (Specific management / control examples using units will be described later in Chapter 3.)
As a specific physical form example of the unit, as shown in FIG. 2, the entire device (Device) 1_1250-1 may correspond to the unit 4_1290-4, or the composite modules 1_1295-1, 7_1295 existing alone. -7 as a whole may correspond to units 1_1290-1 and 7_1290-7. In addition, the combined modules 6_1295-6, 2_1295-2, and 3_1295-3 constituting a part of the device 2_1250-2 and the device 5_1250-5 correspond to the units 6_1290-6, 2_1290-2, and 3_1290-3, respectively. You may let them. In FIG. 2, unit 2_1290-2 and unit 3_1290-3 are duplicated at the communication module 1202-10. As described above, in this embodiment, partial overlap between the different units 2_1290-2 and 3_1290-3 is allowed. Furthermore, there may be an inclusion relationship between different units (a state where one unit is completely contained within the other unit).

  Although a specific example is shown in FIG. 2, a form that a unit can generally take will be described with reference to FIG. 3A. In the unit form shown in FIG. 3A (a), the entire device 1250 having a network communication function corresponds to one unit 1290. Here, when the device 1250 has complicated multifunction, the unit 1290 is also managed or controlled / collected information in the network system α_1132 as a basic unit having complex multifunction.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 3A (b), a composite module 1295 (specific details will be described later in section 1.3) existing alone in the network system α_1132 may be associated with one unit 1290. Further, as another management form (or control / information collection unit form), a predetermined combination module 1295 is added to or connected to a specific device 1250 (which may or may not have a network communication function alone). The whole performed may be regarded as one unit 1290 as shown in FIG. 3A (c).

  A unit form defined in the device 5_1250-5 shown in FIG. 2 will be described in an easy-to-understand manner with reference to FIG. 3B. As shown in FIG. 3B, in the device 5_1250-5, one sensor module 1260-9 having a sensor function and two drive modules 1_1270-5 and 2_1270-6 having different drive functions or operation functions are included. Built in. Further, a communication module 1202-10 having a network communication function with the system controller α_1126 in the network system α_1132 is also incorporated. The device 5_1250-5 includes a device controller 1240-3 that controls the operations of these modules in an integrated manner and collects and manages the state information of these modules and the sensor information obtained therefrom. Information acquired or uniquely generated by the device controller 1240-3 can be stored in the memory unit 1246.

As described above, the system controller α_1126 or the system controller β_1128 can appropriately set (define) the unit form as a reference unit for optimal management or control / information collection in the network system α_1132. For example, when the system controller α_1126 or the system controller β_1128 wants to control / collect information in detail about individual sensor functions and drive (operation) functions in the device 5_1250-5 via the network (that is, via the communication module 1202-10) Then, unit 2_1290-2 is set as shown in FIG. 3B (a). In this case, the unit 2_1290-2 includes a sensor module 1260-9, two drive modules 1_1270-5, 2_1270-6, and a communication module 1202-10. The system controller α_1126 (or system controller β_1128) can finely control individual modules in the unit 2_1290-2.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 3B (b), the unit 3_1290-3 includes only the communication module 1202-10 and the device controller 1240-3. Therefore, when the system controller α_1126 (or the system controller β_1128) performs information communication with the unit 3_1290-3, it is possible to perform advanced control that integrates the entire device 5_1250-5 or collect information in an integrated manner. The information communication with the unit 3_1290-3 does not require a detailed information communication process for each module as in the information communication with the unit 2_1290-2. Accordingly, when the unit 3_1290-3 is set (defined), the processing in the system controller α_1126 (or the system controller β_1128) is greatly simplified and the processing efficiency is improved. When the form (configuration) of the unit 1290 changes as described above, the content of communication information with the unit 1290 as viewed from the system controller α_1126 (system controller β_1128) changes.

  As described above, the unit takes the form of a predetermined function realized in cooperation with a minimum network communication function. Therefore, the unit has a minimum network communication function. As an example of the implementation form of the network communication function, when the communication module 1202-10 is configured as shown in FIG. 3B, the unit includes the communication module 1202-10. As a result, as shown in FIG. 3B (c), the communication module 1202-10 is shared between the unit 2_1290-2 and the unit 3_1290-3 with the common part.

  If the specific form of the unit 1290 can be set flexibly in the network system α_1132, such as enabling a plurality of overlapping different units to be set in the same function unit as described above, the system controller α_1126 (or system controller β_1128) can be managed ( (Or control / information collection).

Section 1.3 Configuration Explanation Unit in Composite Module As an example of the unit 1295, FIG. 3A (b) shows the configuration of the composite module 1295. In the present embodiment, the composite module is defined as a functional module that can realize a function other than the communication function and the communication function. In particular, there is a feature in that a communication function is involved in realizing the other function. Information communication with the outside related to the other function (outside the combination module 1295) is performed via this communication function. In other words, using the communication function in the composite module 1295, information obtained as a result of executing the specific function of the composite module 1295 can be collected from the outside (outside the composite module 1295). On the other hand, the communication function in the composite module 1295 may be used to control the specific function of the composite module 1295 from the outside (outside of the composite module 1295).

  Specific examples of the other functions include a sensor function, a drive (or operation) function, a control (process) function, a memory function, and a display function. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the composite module may have any function other than the communication function. In particular, a composite module having a sensor function is called a sensor / communication module 1460, and a composite module having a drive (or operation) function is called a drive / communication module 1470. Further, a composite module having a control (process) function is called a processor / communication module 1465, a composite module having a memory function is called a memory / communication module 1475, and a composite module having a display function is called a display / communication module 1478.

  Next, the difference between the composite module described here and the unit described in section 1.2 will be described. The composite module 1295 can constitute a part of the device 1290 as a predetermined module. Further, the composite module 1295 may exist alone in the network system. On the other hand, the unit 1290 means a basic unit of management / control / information collection in a network system in which various forms such as the device 1290, the composite module 1295, or a combination form thereof are common and generalized. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 3A (b), one unit 1290 is in an inclusive relationship in which one or more composite modules 1295 can be included. As a specific example, the composite module 1295 is merely a part of the device 1290 compared to the device 1290 corresponding to one form of the unit 1290. Here, in the above inclusion relationship, the means for realizing the communication function described above is commonly owned in the combined module 1295 as well as in the unit 1290. However, in section 1.2, it has been described that the system controller α_1126 is not included in the unit 1290. On the other hand, there is a significant difference from the unit 1290 in that a part of the system controller α_1126 can be set in the composite module 1295.

  The means for realizing the communication function and other functions in the composite module may be either software (program) or hardware (circuit), and realized by a combination of software and hardware (partly realized by hardware and the rest realized by software) ) In both software and hardware, it is not necessary to separate the above communication function from other functions, and both function realizing means may be mixed on software or hardware, or some overlap or inclusion relationship may exist. . Furthermore, it is not always necessary that the means for realizing both functions be directly coupled on software or hardware. In other words, the communication function realizing means and the other function realizing means may be separately arranged at positions far apart on the hardware or in the program, and the means for realizing both functions may be cooperatively processed using some link means.

  For convenience of explanation, the configuration in the composite module is shown as a block structure in FIGS. 4A to 4F. This block may be a predetermined circuit (hardware) or a program (software) having a predetermined group. Also, the blocks do not necessarily need to be separated on software or hardware, and there may be mixed / distributed interspersed / partially overlapping (shared) / inclusion relationships among the blocks as described above.

The configuration of the basic composite module 1295 is shown in FIG. 4A. As a means for realizing the communication function in the composite module 1295, the communication module 1660 is owned. FIG. 4A (a) shows a configuration in which a radio signal transmitting / receiving antenna 1480 is separately arranged and connected to the communication module 1660. FIG. On the other hand, in FIG. 4A (b), the antenna for wireless signal transmission / reception is built in the communication module to constitute a communication module 1666 with a built-in antenna. Further, the communication module with a built-in antenna 1666 has a structure functionally connected to another function module (function other than communication) 1440 that realizes a function other than the communication function (they function together). However, as shown in FIG. 4A (b), it is not always necessary that the communication module 1666 with built-in antenna and the other function module 1440 are directly connected, and if a link is formed between the functions of both in some form. good. As an example of the link formation, as shown in FIG. 4A (a), a communication module 1660 and another function module (function other than communication) 1440 that are separated from each other at a remote distance can be connected by a long-distance cable or the like. And both of them may perform remote cooperation 1444. (For example, when a composite module is configured by software, and a program configuring the communication module 1660 and a program configuring the other function module 1440 are arranged on a remote server, link data corresponding to the remote cooperation 1444 ( Both programs may be coordinated through a URL (Uniform Resource Locator))). ) Other function modules (functions other than communication) under special circumstances where wireless transmission / reception (communication function realization by communication module 1660 using antenna 1480) is impossible, such as underground or deep in the water, or a deep place in a steel building When it is desired to operate 1440, there is an effect that the composite module 1295 can function stably even under a special environment based on the remote cooperation 1444. Further, the configuration other than the configuration of FIG. 4A is not prohibited as the configuration of the composite module. For example, the communication module 1666 with a built-in antenna and the other function module (function other than communication) 1440 are remotely arranged, and both are remotely connected by a long-distance cable or the like. Cooperation 1444 may be performed.

  FIG. 4B shows a configuration example when a sensor / communication module 1460 is used as an example of the composite module 1295. The other function module (function other than communication) 1440 in FIG. 4A is a sensor module 1260 in FIG. 4B. The sensor module 1260 means a sensor function unit having a quantitative or qualitative information collection function or a signal detection function in the predetermined system α_1132. The sensor module 1260 has an attribute that can be installed or moved (portable) in the predetermined system α_1132, and can contribute to state measurement and observation in the corresponding system_1132.

  Specific examples of objects to be sensed include human body common information such as body temperature, pulse rate, heart rate, and respiratory rate, human facial expressions, individual face shapes and appearance, identifiable information such as height and width size information, and illuminance Physical information such as (brightness), acceleration, temperature, humidity, power / current / voltage, flow rate (such as water or gas), number of people in the predetermined section 1142, congestion status or human detection information, information on people and cars The movement information such as the traffic situation, the structure information such as the temperature and strain of the structure, the shape, the number of cracks, the internal cavity volume, and the like can be raised.

  FIG. 4C shows a configuration example when the drive / communication module 1470 is used as the next example of the combination module 1295. The other function module (function other than communication) 1440 in FIG. 4A is a drive module 1670 in FIG. 4C. Further, the external antenna 1480 and the communication module 1660 may be connectable (FIG. 4C (b)), or configured with the antenna built-in communication module 1666 including an antenna for transmitting and receiving radio signals (FIG. 4C (a)). Also good. In the embodiment of FIG. 4C (a), the communication module 1666 with built-in antenna and the drive module 1670 are remotely located, and the two companies can remotely cooperate 1444 via a remote cable or the like. However, the configuration is not limited thereto, and a configuration in which the communication module 1660 and the drive module 1670 that can be connected to the external antenna 1480 are remotely linked 1444 may be employed.

  The driving module 1670 defined here means a service provision related function unit for providing a specific service or a state change control function unit used for controlling a predetermined state change in the system α_1132. Here, the term “actuator” used in the term drive module is easily misunderstood so that it is limited to only a movable part or an operating part with actual movement, but it is not necessarily accompanied by movement. Therefore, specific examples of the function of the drive module include a display function such as sound and image, a function of maintaining light intensity and odor intensity, a function of changing the function, and an information transmission path for controlling them. A predetermined information transmission function (such as a remote control function), an information communication relay function, a remote operation function (of the predetermined device 1250), or the like serving as a unit may be used.

  The sensor / communication module 1460 and the drive / communication module 1470 described so far often perform information communication relatively passively in accordance with control from the system controller α_1126 (or system controller β_1128). On the other hand, the processor / communication module 1465 shown in FIG. 4D exhibits a relatively spontaneous or active function. In the present embodiment, not only the device controller 1240 in the device 1250 but also the processor 1230 in the system controller α_1126 (FIG. 2) and the processor in the system controller β_1128 as control (process) function realization means in the processor / communication module 1465. 1734 (FIGS. 17A / B) may be included. In particular, in the communication module 1202-3 in the system controller α_1126 and the system controller β_1128, information communication with a device (for example, the server α_1116-n) installed outside the system α_1132 and the system β_1134 becomes possible. Here, as the combination module 1295, an information communication function in the system α_1132 (or system β_1134) is required at a minimum. Accordingly, in FIG. 4D, the communication module 1202-3 is functionally separated into the same system compatible communication module 1752 and the outside system compatible communication module 1758, and only this same system compatible communication module 1752 constitutes the processor / communication module 1465. Take shape. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the outside-system communication module 1758 may be included in the processor / communication module 1465. Further, when the set / defined processor / communication module 1465 exists in the device 1250, the device 1250 often does not originally include the non-system compatible communication module 1758.

  When the processor / communication module 1465 performs a relatively spontaneous or active function in the network system α_1132 (or β_1134), the management information (table) related information described later with reference to FIGS. In many cases, information recorded in the recording area 1740 is used. Therefore, when the processor / communication module 1465 is required to exhibit a spontaneous / active function, the processor / communication module 1465 includes a part of the memory units 1242 and 1246 in the device 1250 and the memory in the system controller α_1126. A part of the unit 1232 (FIG. 2) or a part of the memory unit 1248 in the system controller β_1128 (FIG. 17A / B) may be included.

  For example, when the system controller α_1126 reads information recorded in the memory unit 1242 in the device 1_1250-1 in FIG. 2, generally between the processor 1230 in the system controller α_1126 and the device controller 1240-1 in the device 1_1250-1 It is necessary to exchange advanced communication information exchanged in Japan. In contrast, as shown in FIG. 4E, a memory / communication module 1475 composed only of a management information (table) related information recording area 1740 in the memory units 1242, 1246, 1232, and 1248 and a communication module 1752 corresponding to the same system. Therefore, the system controller α_1126 (or the system controller β_1128) can directly communicate information with the memory / communication module 1475 with a very simplified communication protocol. Therefore, the memory / communication module 1475 has an effect of simplifying communication of information recorded in the recording area 1740 of management information (table) related information therein.

  As functions realized by the other function module 1440 in FIG. 4A, only a single function example has been described in FIGS. 4B to 4E. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of different functions may be realized in one composite module 1295 as shown in FIG. 4F. For example, a plurality of different sensing functions (corresponding to the sensor modules 1_1260-1 and 2_1260-2) and a plurality of different driving (operation) functions (corresponding to the driving modules 1_1670-1 and 21670-2) and control in the composite module 1295 Process) function (corresponding to the processors 1230 and 1734 or the device controller 1240), memory function (corresponding to the memory units 1232 and 1248), and display function (display module 1226) may be realized at the same time. Further, as in the embodiment shown in FIG. 4F, the sensor module 1_1260-1 and the drive module 1670-2 are individually arranged in a place far away from the place where the antenna 1480 and the communication module 1660 are connected, and a long-distance cable or the like. It is also possible to take a structure capable of remote cooperation 1444 using

  In FIG. 4F, each communication module 1660 is individually connected by wiring to other function modules having functions other than communication. However, instead of being connected for each other function module, the communication module 1660 and a number of other function modules may be connected to a common bus line. In this case, another function module directly connected to the communication module 1660 is switched in a time-varying manner depending on the selector action or addressing.

Section 1.4 Structural Explanation in Sensor / Communication Module FIG. 5 shows a more specific and detailed structural example in the sensor / communication module 1460 outlined in FIG. 4B. As a basic structure, a sensor signal or detection information obtained by the sensor module 1260 is transferred to the communication module 1660. This sensor signal or detection information is transmitted to the communication module 1202-3 (FIG. 2) in the system controller α_1126 via the communication module 1660. Here, processing of information communicated in the communication middleware layer APL02 conforming to the C-format described later in Chapter 2 with reference to FIGS. 10A and 10B is also executed in the communication module 1660 in FIG.

  On the other hand, the power supplied to the sensor module 1260 and the communication module 1660 is obtained from a power storage module (battery) 1554. Further, the sensor / communication module 1460 of FIG. 5 incorporates a (solar) power generation module (solar cell) 1552 having a photoelectric conversion function, and a (solar) power generation module (solar cell) having this photoelectric conversion function. Electric power generated in 1552 is stored in a power storage module (battery) 1554. Although FIG. 5 shows a (solar) power generation module (solar cell) 1552 having a photoelectric conversion function as power generation means, any other energy conversion means may be used instead. As an energy conversion means other than the above photoelectric conversion element, for example, a thermo-electric conversion means such as a thermocouple may be used. The sensor / communication module 1460 in which such heat-electric conversion means is incorporated may be worn by an end user, and the sensor / communication module 1460 may be operated by power generation utilizing the body temperature of the end user. As another example, the wireless energy received by the communication module 1660 from the communication module 1202-3 in the system controller α_1126 in FIG. 2 may be converted into electric power and stored, and the near-field communication module 1560 described later is externally stored. The near-field energy received from can be converted into electric power and stored. In this manner, by incorporating the energy conversion means such as the (solar power) power generation module 1552 and the power storage module (battery) 1554 in the sensor / communication module 1460, the sensor / communication module 1460 can be used for a long time without external power supply. Can be operated.

  If the sensor module 1260 is used to measure light, ambient temperature, or ambient humidity, or if the sensor module 1260 corresponds to a human sensor or the like, the sensor module 1260 is a device 1_1250-1, 2_1250-2, It is mounted so as to be exposed on the surface of 5_1250-5 (FIG. 2). At the same time, the (solar) power generation module (solar cell) 1552 is also mounted on the surface of the device 1_1250-1, 2_1250-2, 5_1250-5.

  If the sensor / communication module 1460 is left in a dark place for a long time, the amount of power stored in the power storage module (battery) 1554 decreases, and there is a risk that a sufficient amount of power cannot be supplied to the sensor module 1260 or the communication module 1660. On the other hand, when the output voltage of the power storage module (battery) 1554 or the amount of power stored in the power storage module (battery) 1554 falls below a predetermined reference value, the system controller α_1126 in FIG. . Specifically, as will be described in detail in Chapter 2 with reference to FIG. 14, information indicating that “the battery level is low” is sent from the specific sensor / communication module 1460 to the system controller α_1126 in the form of “alarm notification”. Will be notified. When the processor 1230 in the system controller α_1126 detects a decrease in the storage amount of the storage module (battery) 1554 built in the specific sensor / communication module 1460, the processor 1230 notifies the end user via the user I / F unit 1234. As described above, by appropriately notifying the system controller α_1126 of the output voltage or the storage amount of the storage module (battery) 1554, it is possible to prevent the specific sensor / communication module 1460 from being stopped due to the decrease in the storage amount. This has the effect of ensuring overall operational stability.

  In the sensor / communication module 1460 shown in FIG. 5, a near-field communication module 1560 capable of near-field wireless communication is also incorporated. As the proximity wireless transfer technology used here, for example, TransferJet or FeliCa (registered trademark) (a coined word combining Felicity and Card) of a contactless IC card standard may be applied. As a method of using the near-field communication module 1560, in addition to the above-described external power supply, the near-field communication module 1560 may be used for detecting the installation location of the sensor / communication module 1460 at the initial setting as described below. Specifically, when the composite module 7_1295-7 corresponding to the sensor / communication module is installed alone in the system of the present embodiment shown in FIG. 2 (or a device incorporating the composite module 6_1295-6 corresponding to the sensor / communication module). As an initial setting (when 2_1250-2 is installed), a portable external device (not shown) with a built-in GPS (Global Positioning System) function is brought closer to communicate with the near field communication module 1560. The GPS position information at this time is notified to the system controller α_1126 via the communication module 1202-3. As a result, the position information where the composite module 7_1295-7 alone corresponding to the sensor / communication module (or the device 2_1250-2 incorporating the composite module 6_1295-6 corresponding to the sensor / communication module) is installed is registered in the system controller α_1126. Is done. This registration information is stored in the memory unit 1232 (FIG. 2) in the system controller α_1126, for example, as information in the format of FIG. 23 described in Chapter 2. As described above, since the installation position of the sensor / communication module 1460 can be known by performing the initial setting by the near field communication by the portable external device with the built-in GPS function, it is possible to provide a detailed service to the end user.

Section 1.5 Description of Structure in Drive / Communication Module FIG. 6A to FIG. 6D show a more specific and detailed structure example in the drive / communication module 1470 outlined in FIG. 4C. When the externally controllable drive / communication module 1470 is used as part of the circuit in the device 1250 (in-circuit part), the circuit part function is “ON / OFF switch” or “predetermined voltage output” or “variable”. In many cases, the “resistance value” function is used. In the present embodiment, the standard function (used most frequently in the circuit) is provided as a module in the specific device 1250. As a result, the corresponding device 1250 is characterized in that the price is reduced and the ease of assembly is improved. Among the functions described above as examples, the internal structure of the drive / communication module 1470 that provides the function of “variable resistance value” is shown in FIG. 6A, and the drive / communication module 1470 that provides the function of “ON / OFF switch”. FIG. 6B shows the structure, and FIG. 6C shows the internal structure of the drive / communication module 1470 that provides the function of “predetermined voltage output”. Among these, in order to provide the function of “variable resistance value” and the function of “ON / OFF switch”, an input terminal 1602 and an output terminal 1604 are required. FIG. 6A shows a structure in which the variable resistance portion 1610 is arranged between the terminals so that the variable resistance value between the two companies can be set. On the other hand, in FIG. 6B, a conduction / disconnection switching unit 1614 is installed between both terminals to constitute an ON / OFF switch between them. As specific circuit elements of the variable resistance unit 1610 and the conduction / disconnection switching unit 1614, a complementary metal-oxide-semiconductor (FET) type FET (Field-effect Transistor) element may be used. Here, a gamma characteristic (a resistance characteristic between the input terminal 1602 and the output terminal 1604 with respect to an input voltage applied to the variable resistor 1610 or the conduction / disconnection switching unit 1614) has a gentle element (even if the applied input voltage value is greatly changed). An element having a gradual change in resistance value is used for the variable resistance portion 1610, and an element having a steep gamma characteristic (from a conduction state in which the resistance value is close to “0” due to a slight change in input voltage around a predetermined threshold). Can be used as the conduction / disconnection switching unit 1614. However, in the present embodiment, not only the above-described CMOS FET element, but also any circuit element circuit element that provides a variable resistance value by some control or an ON / OFF switch function may be used. On the other hand, the terminal for outputting the “predetermined voltage” may be a single terminal of the voltage output terminal 1606 as shown in FIG. 6C. The output voltage output from this terminal is connected to the output of a predetermined voltage generator 1618 in the drive module 1670. In this embodiment, as a specific circuit example in the predetermined voltage generator 1618, a constant voltage source generated inside the drive / communication module 1470 or a constant voltage (for example, power supply voltage) supplied from the outside is used as a ground line (earth line). ) To extract an intermediate voltage from a variable resistor connected between and a current supply buffer circuit (an electron that can supply a relatively large external current to maintain the output voltage even when the external impedance is low) Circuit) is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and any method or circuit capable of generating and maintaining a predetermined voltage may be used.

  In any of FIGS. 6A to 6C, the set value is given from the communication module 1660 located outside the drive module 1670. Here, the feature of the present embodiment is that the setting value storage portion is internally held so that the setting value does not change even when the power source of the drive / communication module 1470 is turned off. Locations corresponding to this storage portion are a set resistance value storage unit 1620 in FIG. 6A, a set state storage unit 1624 in FIG. 6B, and a set voltage storage unit 1628 in FIG. 6C. Each of these is constituted by a nonvolatile semiconductor memory such as a NAND (Not And) memory as an example. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the storage portion may be composed of any nonvolatile memory. That is, in any of FIGS. 6A to 6C, the set value notified from the communication module 1660 is notified once to the set resistance value storage unit 1620, the set state storage unit 1624, and the set voltage storage unit 1628, and non-volatile in those storage portions Is remembered. At the same time, the stored set values are output from these storage portions, and the operations of the variable resistance unit 1610, the conduction / disconnection switching unit 1614, or the predetermined voltage generation unit 1618 are controlled.

  In the case where the drive modules 1270-1 and 1270-6 are used to control the device 1_1250-1 and 5_1250-5 in FIG. 2 and change the setting state, the specifics of these drive modules 1270-1 and 1270-6 are described. As an example, an extended form of a remote control using existing infrared communication may be adopted. In other words, the drive module 1270-1 and the communication module 1202-4 in the device 1_1250-1 constitute a drive / communication module 1470 (a type of the composite module 1295), and is separated from the device 1_1250-1 as a “new remote controller”. It can be placed at a different position. Similarly, the drive module 1270-5 in the device 5_1250-5 and a part of the communication module 1202-10 constitute a drive / communication module 1470 (a kind of composite module 1295), and the device 5_1250- is used as a “new remote controller”. 5 may be arranged at a position outside of 5. As a specific image example, this “new remote control” may be used as an extension system (replacement) of a remote control using conventional infrared communication attached to an air conditioner, a television set, lighting equipment, or the like.

  FIG. 6D shows the internal structure of the drive / communication module 1470 suitable for this utilization method. In the embodiment shown in FIG. 6D, both control of transition between binary states (change of state setting) such as “ON / OFF switching” and control related to “change of detailed state setting by multi-value information” are performed. Is possible. Control of transition between binary states (change of state setting) from the communication module 1660 that has received the communication information exchanged in the network system α_1132 is stored or updated in the setting state storage unit 1624. On the other hand, control information related to “changes in fine state setting by multi-value information” sent from the communication module 1660 is stored or updated in the set voltage storage unit 1628.

  The information stored or updated in the setting state storage unit 1624 and the setting voltage storage unit 1628 is format-converted by the format conversion unit 1644, and is then subjected to light emission modulation by the infrared light emitting element 1608 via the infrared light emission driving circuit 1648. Then, the infrared light receiving unit corresponding to the remote control in the device 1_1250-1 or 5_1250-5 is reached. Accordingly, the existing infrared communication remote controller is replaced with the drive / communication module 1470 shown in FIG. 6D without replacing the main body of many existing devices 1_1250-1 or 5_1250-5 such as an air conditioner, a television, and a lighting facility. Thus, there is an effect that the existing device 1250 can be easily incorporated into the network system α_1132 simply and inexpensively.

  Here, the minimum required function required for the existing remote controller does not necessarily store the state when the device 1250 is controlled. However, since the setting state storage unit 1624 and the setting voltage storage unit 1628 are built in the driving module 1670 in the driving / communication module 1460, there is an effect that the system controller α_1126 can later confirm the control history via the communication module 1660. . Note that the setting state storage unit 1624 and the setting voltage storage unit 1628 may use a NAND (Not And) memory or other nonvolatile memory as described above.

  Here, as communication information transmitted between the system controller α_1126 and the drive / communication module 1470, a C-format described later in detail in Chapter 2 may be used. In the following, a description will be given of a method for driving / transferring communication information exchanged with the system controller α_1126 of FIG. 2 in the drive / communication module 1470 based on the C-format. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and information communication processing may be performed with the system controller α_1126 in the A-format, E-format, or any other format.

  When the system controller α_1126 first issues an operation start command (turns on the power) to the existing device 1250 (issues a command), communication information (from the system controller α_1126 to the corresponding drive / communication module 1470 ( The communication access control information 1830 in FIG. 14 (d) is set to [111] (reset instruction), the multi-value transmission data part CTMDT is set to [0000], and the value of the binary transmission data part CT2DT is set to [1] ( ON). When the communication module 1660 receives the information, the information [1] (power ON) is transferred / stored in the setting state storage unit 1624 in the drive module 1670. Further, the information passes through the setting state storage unit 1624 and is notified to the format conversion unit 1644, and is converted into information indicating that the existing remote controller is turned on. Then, the converted information is transferred to the infrared light emission driving circuit 1648, and the light emission of the infrared light emitting element 1608 is controlled. Then, the converted information is transmitted to the existing device 1250, and the device 1250 is turned on.

  In the C-format shown in FIG. 14 (d), for example, change setting (reset) of multi-value information corresponding to, for example, changing the set temperature of an air conditioner or changing the illuminance of a lighting facility can be performed. In this case, the communication access control information 1830 in the communication information (FIG. 14 (d)) from the system controller α_1126 to the drive / communication module 1470 is set to [111] (reset instruction), and the multi-value transmission data part CTMDT is set to [ Set to something other than 0000]. In this case, in the 5-bit information that combines the multi-value transmission data part CTMDT and the binary transmission data part CT2DT, values from 0% to 100% are assigned to the values [00010] to [11111], respectively. Next, when the communication module 1660 receives the information, the changed set value is converted into a percentage. The information after the percentage conversion is transferred / stored to the set voltage storage unit 1628 this time. Further, the information passes through the set voltage storage unit 1628 and is notified to the format conversion unit 1644, and is converted into information indicating the state setting change value in the existing remote controller. Then, the converted information operates the infrared light emission driving circuit 1648 to control the light emission of the infrared light emitting element 1608, and the setting state of the existing device 1250 is changed.

  Next, a method for confirming the state already set in the drive / communication module 1470 by the system controller α_1126 will be described. In this case, communication information in which the communication access control information 1830 is first set to [011] (response (data) request) is communicated from the system controller α_1126 to the drive / communication module 1470. When the communication module 1660 in FIG. 6D receives a response (data) request from the system controller α_1126, the information already stored in the setting state storage unit 1624 and the setting voltage storage unit 1628 is read. Then, the result is set in the binary transmission data part CT2DT or the multi-value transmission data part CTMDT in FIG. Here, the communication access control information 1830 in the communication information communicated from the drive / communication module 1470 to the system controller α_1126 is set to [010] (response answer).

  Considering the ease of explanation of the operation of the drive / communication module 1470 in the present embodiment, the operation of the drive / communication module 1470 has been disclosed in the form of hardware (electric circuit). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the drive / communication module 1470 may be formed as a software module in the system of the present embodiment. However, even when the drive / communication module 1470 is formed by the soft module, the input / output terminals 1602 and 1604 or the voltage output terminal 1606 or the infrared light emitting element 1608 as shown in FIGS. 6A to 6D are installed. The following describes the case where a software module is used. The communication modules 1202-4 to 10 in FIG. 2 and the communication module 1660 in FIGS. 6A to 6D incorporate processors 1960 and 1736 as shown in FIGS. 7A and 7B, and perform communication control processing according to a predetermined communication control program. It is carried out. As the communication control program, any program language that can be executed in the processors 1960 and 1736 corresponds.

  Hereinafter, the entire communication control program is called a “main program”, and a predetermined small program block called from the main program is called a “subprogram module”. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and Java (registered trademark) scripts that do not depend on the OS (Operation System) or Java applets corresponding to HTML / HTML5 will be described together with terms used in Java. Among main programs (classes) that cause the processor built in the communication module 1660 in FIGS. 6A to 6D to process, processing according to a subprogram module (predetermined method (Method)) corresponding to the drive module 1670 Is executed. In this subprogram module (predetermined method), corresponding processing for the input / output terminals 1602 and 1604 or the voltage output terminal 1606 is executed based on a preset value set in the subprogram module (predetermined method (Method)). Is done. Then, when a setting change command is issued (command issuance) from the system controller α_1126 of FIG. 2 to the drive / communication module 1470, another processing for “setting value change” processing is performed in the main program (Class). Calls a subprogram module (separate method) to perform setting value change processing. Thereafter, corresponding processing for the input / output terminals 1602 and 1604 or the voltage output terminal 1606 is executed based on the changed set value.

  In the above description, the drive / communication module 1470 included in one type of the composite module 1295 has been described as an example. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and any composite module 1295 such as the sensor / communication module 1460, the processor / communication module 1465, and the memory / communication module 1475 may be realized by the above-described software module.

  6A to 6D are omitted for simplification of description, but the (solar) power generation module 1552 is included in the drive / communication module 1470 shown in FIGS. 6A to 6D as in FIG. An energy conversion means such as a power storage module (battery) 1554 and a near-field communication module 1560 may be incorporated.

Section 1.6 Explanation of Structure Example in Communication Module FIG. 7A and FIG. 7B show a structure example in the communication module 1660 of the antenna 1480 external type constituting the composite module shown in FIGS. 4A to 4F. 4A to 4E, the communication module 1660 with built-in antenna and the communication module 1752 in the same system support communication in the same system in the communication module 1660 shown in FIG. 7A or 7B. An antenna 1480 is incorporated.

  In FIG. 2, the system controller α_1126 (or system controller β_1128), the device controller 1240-1 or 1240-3 in the device 1_1250-1 or the device 5_1250-5, and the composite modules 1_1295-1 and 7_1295-7 that exist independently. The main feature of this embodiment is that it is devised so that the same communication module 1660 can be used in common. In this way, by sharing the communication module 1660 having the same structure among many constituent members (the system controller α_1126 (or the system controller β_1128) and the unit 1290) in the same network system α_1132, the communication module 1660 is used by using the mass production effect. This has the effect of reducing costs.

  As a specific method for realizing the above characteristics, the communication module 1660 has a function common to all the composite modules 1295 shown in FIGS. 4B to 4F. Here, the functions common to all the composite modules 1295 shown in FIG. 4B to FIG. 4F are 1) support a common communication protocol used in the same network system α_1132, and 2) relate to other functions other than the communication function. 2 points corresponding to information communication of all kinds of information. As described in sections 1.2 and 1.3, in the unit 1290 and the composite module 1295, the communication module 1660 is always connected to other function modules having functions other than communication. The function of is important.

  The communication module 1660 is provided with functions for realizing the above [1] and [2]. Specifically, the function [1] is mainly realized by the communication control unit 1700 of FIG. 7A. The function [2] is mainly realized in the interface unit 1710 of FIG. 7A. In FIG. 7A, the area is divided into the communication control unit 1700 / interface unit 1710 for each function for easy understanding. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and circuits that implement the above two points may be mixed, or some functions may be shared by the same circuit.

  Further, as a method of making the communication module 1660 versatile so that it can be shared in many composite modules 1295, this embodiment also features the structure of an interface unit (I / F unit) with another function module 1440. Is given. Specifically, the connection unit between the other function module 1440 is separated into the content information I / F unit 1950 and the address information I / F unit 1940, and a connection method is selected according to the type of the other function module 1440 to be connected. Variable. Accordingly, versatility with respect to various types of other function modules 1440 is improved, and an effect that can be applied to a multipurpose (various) composite module 1295 is produced.

  The above features will be described in detail below. When taking the form of the single function sensor / communication module 1460 shown in FIG. 4B or FIG. 5 as the composite module 1295 or the single function drive / communication module 1670 shown in FIG. 4C or FIG. 6A to FIG. If only address information unique to 1295 and address information of the system controller α_1126 (or system controller β_1128) are stored, information communication within the network system α_1132 is established. Therefore, when the other function module 1440 (FIG. 4A) is connected to only one sensor module 1260 (FIG. 4B) or only one drive module 1670 (FIG. 4C), the address information I / F unit 1940 of FIG. 7A is used. Is not used.

  On the other hand, when used in the system controller α_1126 (or system controller β_1128) as a part of the processor / communication module 1465 in the form as shown in FIG. 4D, the unit 1290 (the communication partner in the network system α_1132) Alternatively, the address information is different for each composite module 1295). Therefore, the address information of the communication partner is notified from the processors 1230 and 1734 in FIG. 4D via the bus line 1490 to the communication module 1752 corresponding to the same system. At this time, the address information I / F unit 1940 is used as the address information transmission means (information transmission input / output terminal).

  When used in the memory / communication module 1475 as shown in FIG. 4E, the address range where the recording area 1740 of the management information (table) related information is stored in the memory units 1242, 1246, 1232, and 1248 It is necessary to designate from the communication module 1752 corresponding to the same system via the line 1490. As described above, in the processor / communication module 1465 shown in FIG. 4D and the memory / communication module 1475 shown in FIG. 4E, both the content information I / F unit 1950 and the address information I / F unit 1940 in FIG. Connected to.

  On the other hand, at the end of section 1.3, a method of connecting to a plurality of other function modules using a common bus line instead of FIG. 4F has been described. In this case, a corresponding address of another function module directly connected to the communication module 1660 is specified in a part of the address information I / F unit 1940. As a result, it is possible to switch other function modules directly connected to the communication module 1660 in a time-varying manner.

  When wireless is used as a communication medium used for network communication in the network system α_1132, a current is sent to the antenna 1480 on the transmitting side to transmit a radio wave, and a radio wave is transmitted to the receiving side on the antenna 1480. A weak current is detected and a signal is detected. Then, both current supply and signal detection corresponding to the antenna 1480 are performed in the information communication execution unit 3016.

  On the other hand, the communication information exchanged with the other communication module 1660 from the information communication execution unit 3016 via the antenna 1480 has the structure of FIG. (Detailed description regarding the communication information shown in FIG. 11 will be described later in section 2.2.) The communication middleware data APLDT (and extension data EXDT) shown in FIG. 11B is the interface shown in FIG. 7A. It is processed in the unit 1710. That is, the communication middleware data APLDT (and extension data EXDT) is analyzed in the content extraction unit 1938 and necessary information is transmitted to the other function module 1440 via the content information I / F unit 1950. As a specific example, when the communication middleware data APLDT (and extension data EXDT) in FIG. 11B includes state setting change information (control information) for the device 1250 and the drive / communication module 1470, the specific The target content is decoded in the content extraction unit 1938 and the decoding result is notified to the drive module 1670 via the content information I / F unit 1950. Then, the operation (or status setting change) of the drive module 1670 is started in response to the notification content.

  The information input from the other function module 1440 via the content information I / F unit 1950 is format-converted in the content setting unit 1934 to generate communication middleware data APLDT (and extension data EXDT). As a specific example, when the connection destination of the content information I / F 1950 is the sensor module 1260, the sensor information obtained in the sensor module 1260 is converted into communication middleware data APLDT (and extension data EXDT) in the content setting unit 1934. Is done. The communication information is communicated to the system controller α_1126 (or the system controller β_1128) via the information communication execution unit 3016 and the antenna 1480.

  The information of FIG. 11C to FIG. 11F in the structure of FIG. 11A is processed in the communication control unit 1700 of FIG. 7A. That is, the information shown in FIG. 11C to FIG. 11F is generated in the physical layer frame generation unit 1914 and is combined with the information shown in FIG. 11B generated in the content setting unit 1934. The information is transferred to 3016 and the communication information is transmitted. On the other hand, when receiving communication information, the physical layer frame analysis unit 1918 analyzes the communication information having the structure shown in FIG. 11A, and the extracted information shown in FIG. 11B is sent to the content extraction unit 1938. Sent.

  When the address information I / F unit 1940 is connected at the time of transmission, the address information of the transmission partner is notified via the address information I / F unit 1940. Then, address information conforming to the format of FIG. 11A is generated in the address information generation unit 1924, and communication information of FIG. 11A is generated in the physical layer frame generation unit 1914.

  When the address information I / F unit 1940 is connected at the time of reception, the information shown in FIG. 11C to FIG. 11F is selected in the physical layer frame analysis unit 1918 and is stored in the address information extraction unit 1928. Forwarded to Only predetermined address information is extracted in the address information extraction unit 1928 and transferred to the address information I / F unit 1940.

  When this communication module 1660 is used in the single-function sensor / communication module 1460, instead of using the address information I / F unit 1940, the system controller α_1126 (system of the transmission partner in the address information generation unit 1924 is used. The address information of the controller β_1128) is stored in advance. Thereby, sense information can be automatically communicated to the system controller α_1126 (system controller β_1128).

Further, when the communication module 1660 is used in the single function drive / communication module 1470, the address information extraction unit 1928 uses its own address information in advance instead of using the address information I / F unit 1940. I remember it. That is, all pieces of radio information detected in the information communication execution unit 3016 are transferred to the content extraction unit 1938 and the address information extraction unit 1928 via the physical layer frame analysis unit 1918. Then, it is sequentially determined whether or not the receiving-side address information extracted in the address information extracting unit 1928 matches its own address information. Here, when the receiving address information does not match the address information of itself, the information temporarily stored in the content extraction unit 1938 is appropriately discarded.
Only when the address information on the receiving side matches the address information of itself, it is determined as communication information for the corresponding composite module 1295, and the information temporarily stored in the content extraction unit 1938 is transferred to the content information I / F 1950. .

  The series of processes described above is controlled by the processor 1960. In FIG. 7A, the connection line of the processor 1960 is omitted. However, the processor 1736 may be directly connected to the bus line BUS or the like, or may be directly connected to the processor 1960 and each unit. .

  Another embodiment within the communication module 1660 is shown in FIG. 7B. In FIG. 7B, there is a significant feature in that a memory unit 1790 is built in the communication module 1660. As a result, when the unit 1290 incorporating the communication module 1660 is moved into another system (for example, moved from the system α_1132 into the system β_1134), it is possible to easily adapt to different systems seamlessly. to be born.

  7B corresponds to the content information I / F unit 1950 and the address information I / F unit 1940 in FIG. 7A. 7B corresponds to the content extraction unit 1938 and the content setting unit 1934 in FIG. 7A. The signal processing unit 1780 in FIG. 7B may further include the address information extraction unit 1928 and the address information generation unit 1924 in FIG. 7A, or may further correspond to the information communication execution unit 3016, physical layer frame analysis. The unit 1918 and the physical layer frame generation unit 1914 may be included in correspondence.

  As shown in FIG. 4A, the communication module 1660 shown in FIG. 7B is attached to, embedded in, bonded to, or mounted on another function module 1440 having a function other than communication. The composite module 1295 is configured by attaching, embedding, bonding, or mounting the communication module 1660. Then, as shown in FIG. 3A (b) or (c), a unit 1290 including the composite module 1295 is configured. The unit 1290 can take various forms such as parts, products, products, devices, materials, and products. Therefore, the communication module 1660 is used by being attached to, embedded in, bonded to, or mounted on an object to be integrated (unit 1290) of all components, products, products, devices, materials, products, and the like (unit 1290).

  Specifically, the communication module 1660 includes various functional blocks constructed using an integration technique on the insulating substrate 1660-1. The communication module 1660 includes an antenna connection unit 1774 for connecting an antenna ANT_1772 for performing transmission / reception of the radio 1770. Here, the antenna ANT_1772 may be configured on the insulating substrate 1660-1 of the communication module 1660. The communication module 1660 includes an external module connection unit 1778, and can be connected to, for example, a plurality of other function modules 1766-1, 1766-2, ... 1766-n via the external module connection unit 1778. . Examples of the other function modules 1766-1, 1766-2,..., 1766-n include a sensor module 1260 and / or a drive module 1670, a processor module 1680, a memory module 1680, a display module 1226, and the like.

  There are various sensors as the sensor module 1260 used in the other function modules 1766-1-1766-n. Sensors are temperature detection, humidity detection, pressure detection, strain detection, water quality detection (things using scientific reaction, those using filtration, etc.), gas detection (things using scientific reaction), light / dark detection, ultra There are sensors that perform sound wave detection, color detection, pulse detection, and the like, and one or a plurality are selectively set according to the use environment of the communication module 1660. Further, different types of sensors may be prepared in combination depending on the order. Some sensors are connected to the external module connection unit 1778 via wireless (radio waves, infrared rays, ultrasonic waves, etc.).

  Further, as specific forms of the drive module 1670 used in the other function modules 1766-1-1766-n, electrical switches, mechanical switches, light emitters, heating elements, displacement objects (shape storage media), elastic bodies (rubbers) ) Etc. are arbitrarily selected according to the purpose of use.

  Here, one or a plurality of other function modules 1766-1, 1766-2,..., 1766-n may be configured on the insulating substrate 1660-1. Further, some other function modules may be additionally connected via an external module connection unit 1778 as an option.

  The communication module 1660 includes a power supply unit 1776 and can be connected to a power source via the power supply unit 1776. The power source may be arranged at a position away from the communication module 1660. Further, a power supply mounting portion may be provided on the insulating substrate 1660-1 and the power supply may be integrated with the communication module 1660.

  By the way, as a method for accumulating electric power in a power source (not shown), various methods described below are possible. As an example of the method, there is a method in which a current from a power generation element that generates power by sunlight is charged in a storage unit. This method corresponds to the combination of the (solar) power generation module 1552 and the power storage module (battery) 1554 in FIG. As another method, there is a method in which a current induced in a coil by the influence of electromagnetic waves is charged in a power storage unit. This method corresponds to the combination of the near-field communication module 1560 and the power storage module (battery) 1554 in FIG. Furthermore, there is a method in which a voltage generated in the piezoelectric element is converted into a current and charged in the power storage unit by applying mechanical vibration to the piezoelectric element. For example, pressure / vibration due to sound, pressure / vibration due to gas (wind, gas, etc.), pressure / vibration due to liquid (water, oil), etc. can be selectively used as the mechanical vibration. Any one method or a combination of a plurality of methods is selected according to the use environment of the communication module 1660.

  The antenna connection unit 1774, the external module connection unit 1778, and the power supply unit are connected to the signal processing unit 1780. In the communication module 1660, the processor 1736, the memory unit 1790, and the signal processing unit 1780 are connected to each other via the bus BUS. Here, based on the application stored in the application storage unit 1792 of the memory unit 1790, the processor 1736 controls the overall operation of the communication module 1660.

  The processor 1736 and the signal processing unit 1780 operate based on the application, capture the output from the sensor module 1260, output the control signal to the drive module 1670 and the display module 1226, the cooperative control processing with the processor module 1666, the memory Processing for inputting / outputting recording information to / from the module 1690, supply of a transmission signal to the antenna ANT_1772, fetching of a reception signal from the antenna ANT_, data writing processing to the memory unit 1790, data reading processing from the memory unit 1790, and the like are executed.

  The memory unit 1790 includes an application change software storage unit 1791 and a security target data storage unit 1799. Further, the memory unit 1790 includes a drive module management data storage unit 1792, a sensor module management data storage unit 1796, a self attribute data storage unit 1793, a life management data storage unit 1794, and an operation period management data storage unit 1795.

  The drive module management data storage unit 1792 in the memory unit 1790 stores management data of the drive module 1670 connected via the external module connection unit 1778. The sensor module management data storage unit 1796 stores management data of the sensor module 1260 connected via the external module connection unit 1778.

  For example, the communication module 1660 may be inspected when the communication module 1660 is inspected or when shipped from the factory. When an inspection device (not shown) gives a predetermined command to the communication module 1660 via the antenna ANT — 1772 at the time of inspection, the management data of the drive module 1670 stored in the drive module management data storage unit 1792 and / or Alternatively, the management data of the sensor module 1260 stored in the sensor module management data storage unit 1796 is read. The read management data is transmitted to the inspection apparatus via the antenna ANT_1772. Thereby, the inspection apparatus can know the sensing ability and driving ability of the communication module 1660.

  Although not described in FIG. 7B, a processor module management data storage unit that stores management data of the processor module 1680 in the memory unit 1790, a memory module management data storage unit that stores management data of the memory module 1690, Alternatively, a display module management data storage unit that stores management data of the display module 1226 may be set.

  In the system of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, a plurality of different systems (system α_1132 and system β_1134) are formed in the same domain 2_1122-2. Similarly, one or more systems (in many cases, a plurality of systems) are formed in each of the domain 1_1122-1 and the domain 3_1122-3. Furthermore, differences in application target fields and system usage purposes for each system, such as support for the civilian field, social infrastructure field, and healthcare field, are allowed. Even if the composite module 1295 or the unit 1290 including the communication module 1660 of FIG. 7B moves across a plurality of systems having different application fields and usage purposes, it is possible to perform an optimum operation according to each system. Yes. In other words, if the combined module 1295 or unit 1290 moves between different systems α_1132 and β_1134 in the same domain 2_1122-2, or between different systems in different domains 1_1122-1, 2_1122-2, 3_1122-3, The main feature of the present embodiment is that the operation of the combination module 1295 or the unit 1290 is appropriately switched so that the system α_1132 (or the system β_1134) to which the system belongs can be optimized according to the application field and the purpose of use. In order to enable the feature, an application storage unit 1792, an application change software storage unit (application change software) 1791, a security target data storage unit 1799 or a self attribute data storage unit 1793, life management data storage are stored in the memory unit 1790. Unit 1794 and / or an operation period management data storage unit 1795. As a result, there is an effect that flexible system compatibility of the composite module 1295 or unit 1290 in this embodiment can be ensured and general-purpose use can be achieved.

  As already described, the communication modules 1660 and 1202 shown in FIG. 7B are incorporated to form a composite module 1295 (see FIG. 4) or a device 1250 (see FIG. 2) to form a unit 1290 (FIG. 3A). At the stage of the unit 1290, the application storage unit 1792, the security target data storage unit 1799, the self-attribute data storage unit 1793, the life management data storage unit 1794, and the operation period management data storage are stored using external radio waves. Information may be recorded in advance in at least one of the parts 1795. In addition, the system controller α_1126 may write the above information at the time of check-in processing or plug-in processing (described later in section 4.2) executed after the user purchases the unit 1290.

  The application change software storage unit 1791 is used when an application for controlling the operation of the communication module 1660 is modified or changed. For example, when the composite module 1295 or the unit 1290 incorporating the communication module 1660 is moved into a system different from the conventional system (for example, when moved from the system β_1134 to the system α_1132), it belongs as described later in section 4.2. Each time the system changes, “plug-in processing” is executed. When the application target field and the purpose of use differ greatly between the system β_1134 before movement and the system α_1132 after movement, the system controller α_1126 (or system controller β_1128) that manages / controls / operates the system α_1132 after movement. 2 sends software for executing a new application via the communication module 1202-3 in FIG. The software for executing the new application is appropriately stored in the application change software storage unit (application change software) 1791 described above. Since the processing of the processor 1736 is executed based on the software that executes the new application, when the composite module 1295 or the unit 1290 is moved to the system α_1132 having a completely different target field or purpose of use, it is optimal for the system α_1132. Operation becomes possible.

  Here, there are a case where the communication module 1660 requests a new application and a case where an application change command is given from the outside (for example, the system controller α_1126). The application change timing is determined when the communication module 1660 is manufactured and shipped from the factory, or when the operation mode needs to be changed during use, or when the use environment of the communication module 1660 is changed (system Many cases are conceivable, such as a movement between α — 1132 and β — 1134) and a case where the usage period of the communication module 1660 has expired. As described above, by providing the application change software storage unit (application change software) 1791 in the memory unit 1790, the communication module 1660 can freely change, add, or change the application according to the change in the use environment or the purpose of use. Can be updated.

  On the other hand, the application storage unit 1792 in the memory unit 1790 in FIG. 7B contains common application software that does not depend on system changes. Therefore, even if the composite module 1295 or the unit 1290 incorporating the communication module 1660 moves between different systems, the common application software stored in the application storage unit 1792 is stored / continuously used without being changed. The

  The application software stored in the application change software storage unit (application change software) 1791 and the application storage unit 1792 is described in a predetermined program language or script language (including machine language). The application software 3050 may include an API command 3045 corresponding to (or predetermined) a predetermined OS_3030, as will be described later with reference to FIG. 18B. Not limited to this, it may be described in a Java script as described later with reference to FIGS. 19A and 19B, or may be described in a machine language and its similar language. Further, it may be described in a Web-related language such as HTML (Hyper-text Markup Language) or XML (Extensible Markup Language).

  The security target data storage unit 1799 can be used when storing highly important personal information, for example. Further, the security target data storage unit 1799 may be used as a part for personally storing arbitrary data.

  For example, as a scene where the communication module 1660 is used, the communication module 1660 may be embedded in a personal chart holder in a hospital. In such a case, personal information (name, age, disease name, examination progress) and the like may be stored in the security target data storage unit 1799. However, the chart holder is not necessarily used permanently and may be discarded. In addition, there is a case to be replaced with a new chart holder. In such a case, the security target data in the communication module of the old chart holder needs to be erased.

  Various methods can be used for the security target data erasure timing. For example, the communication module 1660 may not communicate with the system controller α_1126 for a certain period or more. In this case, it is determined that the communication module 1660 has been independently discarded or replaced, and the security target data is deleted. In addition, the system controller α_1126 may actively request the communication module 1660 to delete the security target data. Further, when the sensor module 1260 connected to the communication module 1660 detects a specific atmosphere and / or detection element (for example, pressure, heat, humidity, liquid, etc.), the security target data may be deleted. . That is, when the sensor module 1260 detects a specific atmosphere and / or a detection element (for example, pressure, heat, humidity, liquid, etc.) in this way, the processor 1736 automatically detects that the environment has changed from the normal own use environment. The security target data is erased after the determination. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the security target data erasure process may be executed when various predetermined conditions are satisfied.

  On the other hand, for example, when an old medical record holder is replaced with a new medical record holder and it becomes necessary to move the security target data of the old medical record holder to the new medical record holder, the system controller α_1126 performs control such as transfer or transfer of the security target data. You can go.

  The self attribute data storage unit 1793 stores attribute data related to handling (handling) of units (products, parts, materials, products, etc.) to which the communication module 1660 is attached, bonded, mounted, or embedded. The specific attribute data may include identification data of the corresponding unit (product name, part name, product name, etc.) and identification data such as the manufacturing location and manufacturer.

  For example, a composite module 1295 (or unit 1290) including the communication module 1660 may be bonded or embedded in an aluminum beverage can. Aluminum beverage cans are discarded after use and transported to a recycling plant. Here, if the information that “the material of the object to be bonded or embedded is made of aluminum” is stored as attribute data, the beverage can can be automatically classified into the aluminum processing section in the recycling factory. . In this case, the entire recycling factory corresponds to the system α_1132, and the classification device in the recycling factory corresponds to the system controller α_1126. Then, the classification device corresponding to the system controller α_1126 transmits a specific command to the communication module 1660 and reads the self-attribute data. Based on the self-attribute data, it can be determined how many beverage cans are made.

  On the other hand, the composite module 1295 (or unit 1290) including the communication module 1660 may be embedded in a plastic beverage bottle. In this case, the classification device sends a specific command to the communication module 1660 to read the self-attribute data and detect that the beverage can is made of plastic. Thereby, the classification device can easily and automatically classify the beverage can into the plastic processing unit. However, the present invention is not limited to the above example, and any integrated object (part, product, commodity, apparatus, material, etc.) to which the composite module 1295 (or the unit 1290) including the communication module 1660 is attached, embedded, bonded, or mounted. Self-attribute data may be used for products).

  However, when the composite module 1295 (or the unit 1290) including the communication module 1660 moves between different systems, the environment in which the module is arranged may change. The content of the self-attribute data may change progressively according to the environmental change. For example, when the beverage can is displayed at a store, the selling price of the beverage can, the display location in the store, or the product category may be stored in the memory unit 1790 as the self-attribute data. In this case, the system controller α_1126 managing the inside of the store may perform inventory management and settlement processing for the customer using the self-attribute data.

  As another example, a case where the composite module 1295 (or unit 1290) is used as a tag attached to a fish will be described. Fish lifted in the sea are transported to the port by fishing boats, bought by traders at the port's serimarket, transported by car, displayed at supermarket stores, and purchased by consumers.

  A case where a temperature sensor and a humidity sensor for quality control are installed as the sensor module 1260 in the tag (composite module 1295 / unit 1290) integrated with the fish will be described. As the self-attribute data at this time, appropriate temperature range data, appropriate humidity range data, and best-before period data are stored. Here, the crew of the fishing boat or the market manager inputs the self-attribute data.

  When the temperature and humidity of the surrounding environment exceed the appropriate range during the transportation or storage of the fish, the communication module 1660 outputs the first warning signal to the system controller α_1126 installed in the fishing boat or the transport truck. Can do. The second warning signal and the third warning signal can be output via the antenna 1772 even when the best period is approaching or when the best period is over.

  In addition, at the time of store display, sales price, store display location, product category, etc. are added as self-attribute data. In this case, the above self-attribute data is automatically stored in the memory unit 1790 from another system controller α_1126 installed in the store. Then, using this self-attribute data, inventory management and settlement processing for customers can be performed.

  As described above, according to the movement of the system in which the combined module 1295 / unit 1290 is arranged (belongs to), the system controller α_1126 that manages / controls / operates the system α_1132 automatically adds the above self-attribute data 1793 or There is a feature of the system of this embodiment also in the place where it can be updated. Accordingly, the flexibility and versatility of using the corresponding composite module 1295 and unit 1290 can be greatly improved. In other words, the system controller α_1126 can execute the optimum process for the system α_1132 by using the above-described additional / updated self-attribute data.

  In addition, the self-attribute data may be used as data for outputting a response signal indicating that the communication module 1660 is present when the communication module 1660 responds to a specific command (request signal). For example, the communication module 1660 may be embedded in a surgical instrument or an aircraft or train inspection tool. In this case, the work site is regarded as a specific system α_1132, and a response answer is requested to the communication module 1660 from the system controller α_1126 installed at the work site. The presence or absence of a forgotten item such as a surgical instrument or an inspection tool can be determined from the presence or absence of a response in the work site (system α_1132). In this way, it is possible to determine the presence or absence of forgotten items after surgery or after inspection using information communication processing relating to self-attribute data.

  As an example of using the self attribute data 1793 other than the above, owner information of the corresponding unit 1290 (or the combination module 1295 or the device 1250) may be recorded in this area. When the unit 1290 (or the combination module 1295 or the device 1250) in which the self-attribute data 1793 is recorded is sold on the market, it is displayed at the store as described above. At this time, the displayed store corresponds to one system β_1134. When the user purchases the unit 1290 (or the combination module 1295 or the device 1250), the user moves it to the home. Then, the purchased user's home corresponds to the system α_1132 (see FIG. 1). Therefore, the system in which the unit 1290 is arranged changes before and after the purchase of the unit 1290 (or the composite module 1295 or the device 1250). When the unit 1290 is placed in the user's home, the system controller α_1126 that manages / operates / collects information in the new system α_1132 performs a check-in process described later in section 4.2. At this time, the system controller α_1126 records user information regarding the owner in a part of the self-attribute data 1793. The user information is not limited to the owner name, and may be any of user ID information, user address information, telephone number information, mail address information, and the like. If the user information recorded in a part of the self-attribute data 1793 is recorded in this way, there is an effect that it is easy to search when the corresponding unit 1290 is misplaced outside.

  The above-mentioned owner is not limited to the direct owner of the unit 1290. That is, a person, organization, or company related to the use of the unit 1290 (or the combination module 1295 or the device 1250) is also included. Further, the compound module 1295 in which the self-attribute data 1793 is recorded may be a person, an organization, or a company related to the use of a product, part, or material that has been installed, inserted, or mixed.

  As an example, a tablet or powdered medicine into which the composite module 1295 in which the self-attribute data 1793 is recorded is inserted or mixed will be described. For example, when the medicine is taken at a hospital, facility, or home, the name of the person who took it and the date and time when it was taken are recorded in the self-attribute data 1793. In the self-attribute data 1793, the name of the medicine is recorded in advance. Then, even when the user who has taken this medicine is out of the office, the system controller β_1134 installed in the outside can manage “who took what medicine at what time”. For people with chronic illness, regular medication is very important but easy to forget. As described above, if the system controller β_1134 always manages the medication situation, it is difficult to forget to drink.

  By recording a plurality of pieces of information related to each other as the self-attribute data 1793 as described above, the composite module 1295 (unit 1290) in which the self-attribute data 1793 is recorded can be easily managed with high accuracy. .

  Life management data for managing the life of the composite module 1295 (or unit 1290) in which the communication module 1660 is built can be stored in the life management data storage unit 1794. This lifetime management data indicates the lifetime in which the composite module 1295 (or unit 1290) in which the communication module 1660 is built is used. When this lifetime has elapsed, the communication module 1660 automatically converges and stops operating. Thereby, unnecessary radio waves are not emitted after the lifetime.

  For example, with respect to the beverage cans after disposal and the fish after cooking described above, it is not necessary to use the corresponding tag (composite module 1295 / unit 1290). As described above, the lifetime management data storage unit 1794 is provided in the memory unit 1790 and the activity is automatically stopped after the lifetime, so that unnecessary radio wave generation in the system α_1132 can be prevented. By preventing unnecessary generation of radio waves, an effect of improving information communication efficiency in the system α_1132 is produced.

  Data for setting the operation period of the communication module 1660 can be stored in the operation period management data storage unit 1795. If the communication module 1660 has an operation period or a sleep period according to the use environment and use conditions, the power saving effect is improved and the interference prevention effect with surrounding devices is also obtained. As the operation period management data, for example, the operation period and the sleep period can be set in units of time, or the operation period and the sleep period can be set according to the sensor output.

Section 1.7 Description of Overall Structure of Wide Area Network System in this Embodiment Section 1.1 has already outlined the system of this embodiment. In contrast, in this section, the entire structure of the wide area network system in the present embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 1, the service provider B_1111-2 obtains products (or information) from the wholesalers B1_1104-1 and / or the wholesalers B2_1104-2 that handle similar products (or information) and provides services. .

  Here, wholesalers A_1102 and B1 / 2_1104-1 / 2 mean primary closing organizations and organizations that handle predetermined products and information. As a specific example of the organization or organization, for example, not only a business related to a private profit organization such as a foundation or a business corporation, but also a public organization such as a national or local government, a public corporation or a public interest corporation may be used. Therefore, the position of the wholesaler as viewed from the service providers A to C_1112-1 to 3 is not limited to “commercial transaction partner”, but may correspond to “predetermined service consignee” and “predetermined service guidance and authorized party”. good. For example, products handled by the wholesaler when the wholesaler corresponds to a business partner of the service providers A to C_1112-1 to 3 are not limited to public consumption materials such as electric power, gas, water, and gasoline, but also general consumption materials and money , Fixed assets such as real estate such as real estate such as bonds and precious metals, and information with product value that is difficult to obtain on the Internet (market research information and specialized for specific individuals and specific regions) Information (such as weather information or traffic information limited to a very small area).

Next, the service providers A to C_1112-1 to 3 in the system of the present embodiment mean an organization or group that provides a predetermined service. In particular, the service providers A to C_1112-1 to 3 have a feature of performing “integrated management regarding a predetermined service”. The service provided by the service provider may correspond to any type of service using information obtained from the sensor module 1260 described later. In particular, information obtained from sensor modules in domains 1 to 3_1122-1 to 3 to be described later via a network and a part of information related thereto are servers n_11 in the service provider B_1112-2.
The service provider B_1112-2 can provide a predetermined service based on the information. As described above, in the system according to the present exemplary embodiment, the service providers A to C_1112-1 to 3 can perform the operation of sucking up products and information from the domains 1 to 3_1122-1 to 3_1. Further, the service provider B_1111-2 has a plurality of servers 1 to n_1116-1 to n, and manages the databases 1118-1 to 1118-n for each of the servers 1 to n_1116-1 to n. In addition, distributed processing is performed between the servers 1 to n_1116-1 to n to increase the processing speed. Although omitted in FIG. 1, a server and a database corresponding thereto are similarly installed in the service provider A_1111-1 and the service provider C_1112-3.

  As one of the actual operations of the service provider, the goods and information wholesaled from the wholesaler A_1102 or the wholesaler B1 / 2_1104-1 / 2 are distributed in the domains 1 to 3_1122-1 to 3 (both inflow and outflow). Included). A specific service example is shown below.

α] Retail service to end users of products and information handled by wholesaler A_1102 and wholesaler B1 / 2_1104-1 / 2 β] Products and information handled by wholesaler A_1102 and wholesaler B1 / 2_1104-1 / 2 uniquely Service to be processed and provided to the end user using the processing result γ] Provide the service determined to be optimal based on the information obtained from the sensor module δ] Combination of the above [α] to [γ] The products handled by service providers are not limited to retailing of public consumption materials such as electric power, gas, water, and gasoline, but may also include retail of general consumption materials, retail of liquid assets and fixed assets, and the like. In addition, the information (products) to be handled is not limited to the information that has a product value that is difficult to obtain on the normal Internet (market research information, information specific to specific individuals or specific areas (meteorological information limited to very narrow areas) And traffic information)) may be handled as products.

On the other hand, the service provider A_1111-1 obtains a product (or information) different from the wholesaler B1 / 2_1104-1 / 2 from the wholesaler A_1102 and provides another type of service. Here, the service provider A_1111-1 and the service provider B_1112-2, or the service provider B_1112-2 and the service provider C_1112-3 mutually share information or exchange resources 1114 to improve service efficiency and sophistication. ing. In the service provider A_1111-1, a predetermined product storage unit 1154 that stores products obtained from the wholesaler A_1102 is installed. Then, the predetermined product generation unit 1152 in the service provider A_1111-1 shown in FIG. 1 manufactures a new product using the product to be obtained from the wholesaler A — 1102 as a material, or a product (or a product obtained from the wholesaler A — 1102 (or Information) to create new products (or new information). Although omitted in FIG. 1, a predetermined product storage unit 1154 and a predetermined product generation unit 1152 are also installed in the service provider B_1112-2 and the service provider C_1112-3.

  The predetermined product generation unit 1152 shown in FIG. 1 means a place for generating a unique product with a unique added value. As a specific example of the creation of the original product, processing of raw materials purchased from the wholesaler A_1102 is raised. For example, in the manufacturing industry, a product manufacturing factory corresponds to the predetermined product generation unit 1152. In the present embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a power plant that owns a solar battery, a wind power generator, a thermal power generator, a geothermal power generator, or a substation or a power transmission station as a related peripheral device may be used. . In addition, the system of the present embodiment is not limited to the above, and production places of other public consumption materials such as a gasoline refinery and a water storage facility can be made to correspond to the above-described example of the predetermined product generation unit 1152. Furthermore, as another product form other than that, a place where “unique information created in service provider A” is generated may correspond to the predetermined product generation unit 1152. For example, market trend information, weather forecast information, and the like, which are newly obtained as a result of analyzing various information disclosed on the Internet, also correspond to one form of the product.

  The predetermined product storage unit 1154 shown in FIG. 1 temporarily stores any of the following products (including information).

α] Merchandise and information wholesaled from wholesaler A_1102 or wholesaler B1 / 2_1104-1 / 2 β Commodity and information generated by the predetermined product generation unit 1152] Commodity sucked from domains 1 to 3_1122-1 to 3 Or information δ] a combination of the above [α] to [γ], for example, when the product to be temporarily stored is electric power, the predetermined product storage unit 1154 includes a storage battery and a charge / discharge amount monitor unit (a smart meter in the system α_1132). 1124) and a charge / discharge amount control unit. On the other hand, when the product to be temporarily stored is water or city gas, it is composed of a water and gas tank, a storage / discharge amount monitoring unit, and a storage / discharge amount control unit.

  The service provider A to C_1112-1 to 3 described above receives a service provided from a domain 2_1122-2 described later or a system α_1132 therein (details will be described later). And it is a system which pays the price for the service provision directly to the service providers A to C_1112-1 to 3. Here, as shown in FIG. 1, the server n_1116-n in the service provider B_1112-2 and the predetermined product storage unit 1154 in the service provider A_1111-1 are connected to the smart meter 1124 installed in the domain 2_1112-2 and the system α_1132. Or directly connected to a system controller α_1126 described later. Further, as described with a broken line in FIG. 1, the smart meter 1124 is also connected to the wholesaler A_1102 through a network and can directly communicate information. In FIG. 1, the communication partner of the measurement value of the smart meter 1124 is the server n_1116-n in the service provider B_1112-2, the system controller α_1126 in the same system α_1132, or the wholesaler A_1102. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the measured value of the smart meter 1124 is communicated and transmitted to the system controller β_1134 existing in the same domain 2_1122-2 but belonging to a different system β_1134 or other devices in the same domain 2_1122-2. Also good.

  The smart meter 1124 means a device (Device) that measures the amount of entry / exit of each product that enters and exits (similar) inside and outside the domain 2_1122-2 (or system α_1126) at predetermined time intervals. To do. Refers mainly to the measurement of the amount of inflows and outflows related to public consumption materials such as power meters, gas meters, water supply meters, sewer meters, etc., and in particular, it flows from the inside to the outside in parallel with the amount flowing in (or consumed inside) from the outside. The quantity (for example, sold to the outside) also has a characteristic that can be collected as a measured value. However, the system of this embodiment is not limited to the above-mentioned amount of public consumption, and for example, the general metered materials and liquid assets purchased through mail order sales or the amount of specific information is measured by the smart meter 1124, and the result May be communicated.

  In particular, in the system according to the present embodiment, the communication module 1202-1 is built in the smart meter 1124 (FIG. 8A), and has a function of communicating the measured value of the smart meter every predetermined time. Further, the time interval for transmitting the communication can be changed as appropriate by the server n_1116-n, the system controller α_1126, the wholesaler A_1102, or the like. In addition, the timing for transmitting the measurement value obtained from the smart meter 1124 is not limited to the predetermined time, but may be appropriately transmitted according to the request of the system controller α_1126, the server n_1116-n, or the wholesaler A_1102. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and communication may be transmitted when the smart meter 1124 determines that communication transmission to the outside is necessary.

  An example of a service form provided by the service provider A 1102 using the smart meter 1124 will be described below. In this embodiment, predetermined products and predetermined information stored in advance in the predetermined product storage unit 1154 in the service provider A 1102 are stored in the domain 2_1122-2 (or in the system α_1132) via the system controller α_1126 or the smart meter 1124. To be supplied. Conversely, surplus products remaining in the domain 2_1122-2 (or in the system α_1132) may be returned to the predetermined product storage unit 1154 via the smart meter 1124. In this case, the difference value between the product amount supplied from the predetermined product storage unit 1154 into the domain 2_1122-2 (or within the system α_1132) and returned to the predetermined product storage unit 1154 via the smart meter 1124 is obtained. A charge is charged from the service provider A_1112-1 as the amount of goods used.

  In parallel, the goods (or information) may be received directly using the infrastructure or distribution system owned or managed by the wholesaler A_1102 or the wholesaler B1 / 2_1104-1 / 2. That is, according to the broken line connected from the wholesaler A_1102 to the smart meter 1124 in FIG. 1, supply of goods (or information) handled by the wholesaler A_1102 in the domain 2_1122-2 or in the system α_1132 therein via the smart meter 1124. You may receive it directly. In this case, information on the contents and amount of goods (or information) supplied in the domain 2_1122-2 is simultaneously notified from the smart meter 1124 to the server n_1116-n in the service provider B_1112-2, and Based on the notification information, the service provider B_1112-2 periodically charges the user. Here, there are a plurality of merchandise supply paths from the wholesaler A_1102 to the smart meter 1124 serving as a window for supplying predetermined merchandise in the domain 2_1122-2 or the system α_1132 (from the wholesaler A_1102 to the smart meter 1124. The feature of the system of the present embodiment shown in FIG. 1 is that a new unique service based on the service provider A_1111-1 can be provided by the presence of a “broken line” direct route and a route passing through the service provider A_1112-1. . The unique effect that takes advantage of this feature will be described in detail in section 5.2.1.

  Next, the domain 2_1122-2 or the system α_1132 in the domain 2_1122-2 that can receive the service from the service providers A to C_1112-1 to 3 through the wide area network will be described. As shown in FIG. 1, one domain 2_1122-2 is composed of one or more systems α / β_1132 / 1134, and system controllers α / β_1126 / 1128 are individually installed in the systems α / β_1132 / 1134. ing. Further, the system controllers α / β_1126 / 1128 or the smart meter 1124 are connected to each other directly or via a server n_ 1116-n to enable information communication between them. The system α_1132 is allowed to be divided into a plurality of sections 1 to m_1142-1 to m (the sections will be described in detail in Chapter 4).

  As described above, the system according to the present embodiment is characterized in that a plurality of different systems (client systems) can coexist at the same time. 2 includes a unit 1290 having a function of acquiring or creating information and communicating, and a system controller α_1126 (and β_1128) that acquires and manages the information from the unit 1290. A composite client system (corresponding to the domain 2_1122-2 in FIG. 1) including a plurality of client systems α_1132 (and β_1134) (a plurality of client systems α_1126 and a client system β_1134), and the composite client system (domain 2_1122-2) The system controller α_1126 that manages the client system α_1132 included includes a plurality of units 1295-1 to -7-7 that are to be managed (section 1 in FIG. 2). _1142-1, section 2_1142-1, and section m_1142-m), and holds information on the section to which each unit belongs (section information in FIG. 23).

  The above-mentioned domains 1 to 3_1122-1 to 3 mean a network space composed of one or a plurality of systems linked to each other. In particular, the domain in the system of this embodiment corresponds to “a network space that is subject to various state observations” or “a network space that is subject to predetermined operations or execution or is subject to management execution (related to a specific service)”. To do. Here, in order to participate and operate in a specific domain, a domain-specific identification information ID (Identification Information) and a unique password may be required. When one system α / β — 1132/1134 is made to correspond to a specific area physically or geographically close, one domain 1 to 3 — 1122-1 to 3 is the physical or geographical space. It corresponds to a predetermined area on the network managed / used by a member of a specific group that transcends.

  Next, the system α_1132 means a minimum network system unit in which the inside is mutually connected by a network and one system controller α_1126 is installed inside. The network system is managed or operated by the system controller α_1126 described above. In particular, one system α — 1132 as a specific area physically or geographically close to one or more specific users (for example, an area defined within an action range of one or more specific users within a predetermined time). The physical or geographical extent of the location may be located. Further, one system α_1132 in the system of the present embodiment is specifically based on predetermined identification information such as PAN (Personal Area Network), LAN (Local Area Network), MAN (Metropolitan Area Network), WAN (Wide Area Network). It can be associated with the specified network unit. For example, in IEEE (Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers) 802.15.4, the setting of individual identification information PANID (Personal Area Network Identifier) is specified for each PAN, but this specific PANID One PAN may be associated with one system in the present embodiment. As another specific example, one system may be associated with one home (Home), one in-car, one mobile terminal peripheral space, one work environment (Work Station Area), and the like.

  The above-described system controller α / β_1126 / 1128 is a device that is arranged in one system and performs communication control and communication state management and operation in a network system corresponding to the system α / β_1132 / 1134. Point to. Further, as described above, the system controller α / β_1126 / 1128 is also connected to a wide area network (network used for information communication with the service providers A to C_1112-1 to 3) outside the system α / β_1132 / 1134. Yes. The system controller α / β_1126 / 1128 collects signals and information obtained from one or more sensor modules (sensor module 1260 described later with reference to FIGS. 8A and 9) in the same system α / β_1132 / 1134. Built-in processor for proper processing. Specific examples of the system controller include only one PC (Personal Computer), mobile terminals such as smart phones, tablets, and mobile phones, distribution boards with built-in processors, refrigerators with built-in processors, TVs or recordable recorders and audio only You may make it correspond to the recording machine etc. which record. The smart meter 1124 may include a processor so that the smart meter 1124 itself has the function of the system controller α_1126. Alternatively, the processor and the communication module (FIG. 8A, FIG. A communication module 1202), which will be described later with reference to FIG. 9, may be incorporated and used as a system controller. However, the present invention is not limited to this. In this embodiment, any processor built-in machine in which a program for collecting signals and information obtained from sensor modules in the system and providing appropriate services to the user is set to correspond to the system controller. Also good. Further, one system controller may be configured based on a combination / cooperation operation of a plurality of devices (Devices) physically.

  In particular, if the remote controller used as a system controller with a built-in processor and communication module is temporarily placed on a wall or shelf in a fixed or movable form such as screwed, it can be used in its own way (and resulting from it) Effect) is born. However, in this case, it is necessary to fix or arrange in a place where infrared communication with main devices such as an air conditioner, a television, and a lighting fixture is possible. Further, sensors / communication modules (described later with reference to FIG. 8B) related to temperature sensors, wind sensors, human sensors for short distances, and the like are installed everywhere in the room, and the remote controller (system controller α_1126) and Enables communication within the system α_1132. This makes it possible to control the temperature of only the place where there are multiple users in the room with high accuracy, or to control the display method so that the display method of the naked-eye TV can be viewed stereoscopically at the location of the multiple users. Can provide good service. This makes it possible to operate more efficiently than before without replacing the existing main unit (such as air conditioners, TVs, and lighting fixtures) by replacing only the existing remote controller with the above-mentioned remote controller with the system controller function. The effect is born.

In a conventional technology called M2M (Machine to Machine) or IoT (Internet of Things), a cloud server (corresponding to the server n — 1116-n in FIG. 1) collects all signals and information obtained from the home sensor module of each house. In many cases, services are provided directly from the cloud server to end users. In this case, the system controller α_1126 has a function of only relaying transmission of signals and information on the network as a gateway and a router shown in FIG. In such a conventional technique, (1) since the personal information of the user is easily transmitted to the relatively public server n_1116-n, there is a problem from the viewpoint of protecting the personal information of the user (2) the system controller α_1126 or There is a problem that the system as a whole has a vulnerability that a service to an end user is delayed if a trouble occurs in the communication line between the smart meter 1124 and the server n_1116-n. In the present embodiment, the system controller α_1126 is not limited to a signal / information transmission / relay function on a network as a gateway or router, but is used to determine or integrate or process signals and information from sensor modules collected by a built-in processor. It is characterized in that it performs a specific process including an original service to the user who is based. Accordingly, in the present embodiment, (1) the system controller α_1126 uniquely determines whether or not each signal or information can be transmitted to the server n_1116-n, so that the personal information protection of the user is maintained. (2) Collected from the sensor module Based on the received signal and information, the system controller α_1126 can provide a unique service to the user, and this service can be executed regardless of whether there is a communication line trouble with the server n_1116-n. The effect is improved. In particular, the system controller α_1126 in the present embodiment integrates information obtained from the sensor module 1260, and the user's behavior (behavior such as the presence / absence of the user and sleep / wakefulness) and situation (for example, whether the user is a child / adult). It is characterized in that it has a function that can determine / estimate and estimate the user's request. As a result, even when the server n_1116-n is not present, an advantageous effect can be obtained in which a comfortable service can be provided to the user in the domain 2_1122-2.

  In addition, the system according to the present embodiment has a significant feature in that a cooperative work can be performed between a plurality of system controllers α / β_1126 / 8 within the same domain 2_1122-2. Therefore, one system controller α_1126 collects signals and information obtained from all sensor modules (not shown, but also including sensor modules arranged in the system β_1134) existing in the same domain 2_1122-2. Is possible. As a result, the system controller α_1126 can effectively use the information in the same domain 2_1122-2 to provide the user with the optimum service in the system α_1132.

  As an emphasis work form between a plurality of system controllers α / β — 1126/8 within the same domain 2 — 1122-2, in the system of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, for example, the system controller α / β — 1126 / There are two types of network routes: a network route for directly exchanging information between 8 and a network route for indirectly exchanging information between the system controllers α / β_1126 / 8 via the server n_1116-n using, for example, the Internet route There is a feature. As a result, the user can receive various services. For example, when the system controller α_1126 which is a home PC and the system controller β_1128 corresponding to a mobile terminal such as a smart phone or a tablet are physically close to each other, a WLAN (Wireless Local Area Network) or a WPAN (Wireless Personal Local Area Network) is used. ) To exchange information at high speed. On the other hand, the use of an Internet line including a wired line has the effect of guaranteeing mutual information exchange regardless of how far the two are physically separated. On the other hand, since both parties exchange information directly, a private and private service can be obtained without involving the server n_1116-n, so that private secret information leaks to the relatively public server n_1116-n. Risk can be prevented. On the other hand, the server n_1116-n can acquire information that cannot be acquired in the domain 2_1122-2, such as local weather forecast information and traffic congestion information, by using another network route. Therefore, by indirectly exchanging information between the system controllers α / β — 1126/8 via the server n — 1116-n, it is possible to provide a variety of services utilizing information owned by the server n — 1116-n to the user. In this way, by switching the network communication path as appropriate, there is an effect that a variety of services desired by the user can be provided. Here, as described above, since the system controller α_1126 itself can estimate the user's behavior and state or estimate the user's desire / request, the connection path between the system controllers α / β_1126 / 8 can be switched by the independent determination of the system controller α_1126. .

Section 1.8 Description of Local Network System Structure in Present Embodiment In section 1.1, the structure in the local network system already configured in the system α_1132 included in the domain 2_1122-2 shown in FIG. The example is outlined with reference to FIG. In Section 1.8, application examples of the system of the embodiment other than FIG. 2 described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 8A to 9.

  Each device (Device) 1250-1 to 1250-1 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 8A incorporates communication modules 1202-4 to 6-6 and can perform information communication within the same system α_1132. Also, sensor modules 1260-1 to 1-5 or an actuator module 1270-1 are built in the devices 1250-1 to 1250-1. In contrast, in FIG. 8B, the relation state between the communication modules 1202-4 to 6 and the sensor modules 1260-1 to 5 is grasped or managed by the concept of the sensor / communication modules 1460-1 to 5. Similarly, the related state between the communication module 1202 and the drive module 1270 is grasped or managed by the concept of the drive / communication module 1470-1-2. In addition, as described in Section 1.3, the present invention is not limited to this, and is managed in an integrated manner based on the concept of a composite module 1295 that generically includes concepts such as the processor / communication module 1465, the memory / communication module 1475, and the display / communication module 1478. The However, a single composite module may exist alone as in the sensor / communication module 1460-5 of FIG. 8B.

  In the system of the present embodiment, the usage amount (or integrated amount) of public consumption materials such as electricity, gas, and water / sewage used in total within one system (for example, within the system α_1132) is automatically measured, A smart meter 1124 that automatically and periodically transmits the measurement data is installed. Actually, a different smart meter 1124 is installed for each public consumption material such as electricity, gas, and water / sewer, but only one smart meter 1124 is shown as a representative in FIGS. 8A / B. In addition, the usage amount (or integrated amount) of the public consumption material for each of sections 1_1142-1 and 2_1142-2 described later may be automatically measured / automatically transmitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 8A and 9, the detailed structure of the smart meter 1124 is provided with a discharge amount monitor unit 1206 (for example, a power sale amount measurement unit) separately from the inflow amount monitor unit 1208 (for example, a power purchase amount measurement unit). ing. Then, using this discharge amount monitor unit 1206, the amount of discharge (power sale) to the wholesaler A_1102 of the surplus public consumption material in the system α_1132 is measured. Each measured value (or integrated value) obtained in the smart meter 1124 is periodically reported to the server n_1116-n via the communication module 1202-1. At the same time, it is also reported to wholesaler A_1102.

  The communication module 1202 illustrated in FIG. 8A or 9 indicates a communication function unit capable of communicating information using wired or wireless. Wired communication supported by this communication function unit includes all communication methods starting from local video signal transmission lines and audio signal transmission lines to Ethernet (registered trademark) compatible communication related to telephone lines and the Internet. May be related. The wireless communication supported by the communication function unit includes ZigBee (registered trademark), Bluetooth (registered trademark), UWB (Ultra Wide Band), Z-Wave and other short-range wireless systems, Wi-Fi (Wireless Fidelity), Medium range wireless systems such as EnOcean, 2G / PDC, GSM (registered trademark) (Second Generation / Personal Digital Cellular, Global System for Mobile Communications), 3G / CDMA (Third Generation / Code Division Multiple Access), WiMAX (World wide Interoperability) For example, all types of long-distance wireless communication such as for Microwave Access) may be involved.

In particular, the system according to the present embodiment has a minimum process processing execution function in the communication modules 1202 and 1660, as will be described later with reference to FIG. 10A. As a result, the processing and execution of the communication protocol (communication information) having the structure from FIG. 11 to FIG. 15B as described later in Chapter 2 is processed in the communication modules 1202 and 1660. As this process processing, for example, a process processing conforming to a basic (standard) application having versatility such as a Java script that does not require a specific OS may be supported. In addition, the process processing corresponding to ECMA Script or HTML (Hyper-text M
arkup Language) or HTML5 decryption function or the execution of a Java applet corresponding thereto. Furthermore, not only the existing general-purpose script described above but also an original process method may be adopted.

  In FIG. 8A and FIG. 9, the communication module 1202 is built in the system controller α_1126, the smart meter 1124, and various devices (Devices) 1250, and mutual information communication is possible. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 8A and 9, a sensor module 1260 or a drive (Actuator) module 1270 is built in various devices (Device) 1250.

  In the system of this embodiment shown in FIG. 8A, a plurality of devices (Devices) 1250-1 to 1250-1 installed in the same system α_1132 pass through the built-in communication modules 1202-4 to 6-6 and the communication module 1202-3, respectively. Information communication with the system controller α_1126. Here, as shown in FIG. 8A, the device 1250-2 to 3 including only one or more (plural) sensor modules 1260-3 to 5, and one or more (plural) sensor modules 1260-1 to 2 are driven. The existence of a device 1250-1 that incorporates both of the modules 1270-1 and a device 1250 that incorporates only the drive module 1270 (not shown) is allowed. On the other hand, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 8A, a device 1250-that includes a device controller 1240-1 and has a memory unit 1242 that can sequentially store / manage history information related to the sensor modules 1260-1 and 1270-2 and the drive module 1270-1. 1 and devices 1250-2 to 3 which do not own them can be mixedly arranged.

  In the same way as in the service provider A_1111-1 described in Section 1.7 using FIG. 1, possessing the function corresponding to the predetermined product generation unit 1152 or the function corresponding to the predetermined product storage unit 1154 in the system α_1132, The surplus of the public consumption material can be secured and temporarily held. FIG. 8A / B shows a usage example of the (car) battery 1220 as an example of a function corresponding to the predetermined product storage unit 1154. However, the present embodiment is not limited thereto, and in the system of the present embodiment, any device (Device) having the function of the predetermined product generation unit 1152 or the predetermined product storage unit 1154 may be installed in the system α_1132. For example, a battery center or a storage tank (such as storage equipment) may be installed in units of buildings or in units of regions to temporarily hold surplus public consumption materials generated in the buildings or regions.

  8A / B, for the sake of convenience, a usage example of the (car) battery 1220 will be described as a specific example. Here, one vehicle interior space is made to correspond to one section 1_1142-1 described later. For this reason, all information detected in the vehicle (for example, gasoline consumption, engine speed, in-vehicle temperature, individual human body information, etc.) is detected by the sensor module 1222, and the result is the communication module 1202-2. To the system controller α_1126. Similarly, in this section 1_1142-1 (inside the vehicle), an inflow amount monitoring unit 1218 for measuring the amount of charge to the (car) battery 1220 and the amount of power discharged (sold) from the (car) battery 1220 to the outside are measured. A release amount monitor unit 1216 is installed, and each measurement value is transmitted to the system controller α_1126 via the communication module 1202-2. In particular, in the system of this embodiment, the discharge amount control unit 1212 that can accurately control the amount of power discharged (power sale) from the (car) battery 1220 and the amount of power charged to the (car) battery 1220 are accurately controlled. A possible inflow control unit 1214 is installed. Both are connected to the system controller α_1126 via the communication modules 1202-2 and 3. For this reason, the system controller α_1126 can accurately control the amount of electric power released (power sold) to the outside by feeding back the amount of electric power released (power sold) sequentially measured by the emission amount monitor unit 1216 to the amount-of-discharge control unit 1212. . Similarly, the system controller feeds back the inflow (power purchase) power amount sequentially measured by the inflow amount monitor unit 1218 to the inflow amount control unit 1214 to control the power amount charged in the (car) battery 1220 with high accuracy. .

  In section 1.7, the system controller α_1126 has already been described to perform communication control and communication state management and operation in the corresponding system α_1132 (network system). As shown in FIG. 8A, the system controller α_1126 includes a processor 1230. The processor 1230 collects information from all the sensor modules 1222 and 1260-1 to 5 in the same domain 2_1122-2, and sequentially stores the information in the memory unit 1232 as history information. Similarly, command information for the drive module 1270-1 is also stored as history information. Further, the system controller α_1126 has a user I / F unit 1234, which can directly input a request from the user and display a current progress state for the user. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the user I / F unit 1234 may be installed outside the system controller α_1126 and connected via the communication module 1202-3.

  In particular, the system according to the present embodiment does not automatically transfer all the information on all the sensor modules 1222, 1260-1 to 5260-1 and the drive module 1270-1 in the domain 2_1122-2 to the server n_1116-n, but the system controller α_1126 (internal The processor 1230) autonomously selects and transmits only necessary information to the server n_1116-n. Thereby, the effect of protecting the personal information of the user is born. In addition to the selection of information as described above, a part of processing and analysis may be performed from the information, and only the result may be notified to the server n_1116-n. As a result, only the minimum necessary information can be collected by the server n_1116-n, so that there is also an effect of improving the efficiency of the integrated management processing performed in the service provider B_1116-1.

  Furthermore, in the system according to the present embodiment, the system controller α_1126 (the processor 1230 in the system controller) can collect unique information from the server n_1116-n via the communication module 1202-3 and store it in the memory unit 1232. This unique information means information that cannot be obtained from the domain 2 — 1122-2, such as traffic congestion information, local weather forecast information, and time-varying price information of public consumption materials. The information accumulated in the memory unit 1232 in this way is analyzed / analyzed by the system controller α_1126 (internal processor 1230) to estimate / determine the end user's behavior, state or request. Based on the estimated / determined contents, the system controller α_1126 (the processor 1230 in the system controller) controls the system α_1132 (or the domain 2_1122-1) to provide an optimal service to the end user. As an example of this service providing method, the drive module 1270-1 in FIG. 8A may be remotely operated. In this way, the system controller α_1126 (the processor 1230 in the system) uniquely analyzes / collects information collected from the sensor modules 1222, 1260-1 to 5 and the server n_1116-n and a command history to the drive module 1270-1. As a result of the analysis, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a unique service such as providing a fine service to the user in the domain 2_1122-2, which has been difficult in the past. Furthermore, since such a unique service in the domain 2_1122-2 can be stably provided even in a state where communication with the server n_1116-n due to a system trouble is impossible, the robustness of the service provided to the end user can be ensured.

  An application example of the system of this embodiment shown in FIG. 8A is shown in FIG. In FIG. 9, all devices 1250-1 & 4 in the domain 2 — 1122-2 except the smart meter 1124 and the router (gateway) 1300 have the processor 1330 or the device controller 1240-1-2 built therein, and the router (gateway) 1300 with a built-in battery. It is possible to directly exchange information with the server n_1116-n via the server n_1116-n.

  Here, the processor 1330 incorporated in the section 1_1142-1 (in one vehicle) is not limited to control of the amount of power charged / discharged from the (car) battery 1220, but is efficient in air conditioning management and fuel efficiency in the vehicle, for example. Various controls such as engine combustion control are performed, and the related information can be transmitted to the server n_ 1116-n via the router (gateway) 1300 (or directly). Also, all the communication modules 1202-1 to 1202-1 to 7 are connected to the server n_1116-n via the router (gateway) 1300. Here, in the application example shown in FIG. 9, the router (gateway) 1300 does not perform any discrimination or selection, and the system shown in FIG. 8A automatically transfers all the information from the device 1250-1 / 4 to the server n_1116-n. There is a significant functional difference from the controller α_1126.

  On the other hand, in the application example shown in FIG. 9, the memory units 1244 and 1246 are built in all the devices 1250-1 / 4 in the domain 2_1122-2. Then, signals and information detected every moment by the sensor modules 1260-1 to 7 are sequentially stored in the memory units 1244 and 1246 in time series. In addition, command information that is appropriately issued from the device controllers 1240-1 to 1-2 to the drive modules 1270-1 to 1270-1 is also sequentially stored in the memory units 1244 and 1246. The device controllers 1240-1 and 1-2 can use the information stored in the memory units 1244 and 1246 to provide a unique service in units of the devices 1250-1 to 1250 to end users. When this service is provided, the history of the detection signals and measurement information from the sensor modules 1260-1 to 7, which are stored in the memory units 1244 and 1246 and change from moment to moment, is used to end the device controller 1240 -1/2. Estimate / judge the user's behavior, state or request, and control the drive modules 1270-1 to 270-3 (details will be described later in sections 4.2 to 4.4).

  The feature of the application example shown in FIG. 9 is that “the whole network communication system α_1132 is managed or controlled from outside the network communication system α_1132 (physical space region formed by)” or “network communication system α_1132. The system controller α_1126 that manages or controls the entire corresponding network communication system α_1132 is not included ”. From this point of view, management of information communication within the same system network line 1782 formed between the devices 1250-1 and 4250 in the system α_1132 through the router (gateway) 1300 with built-in battery The management may be performed by a system controller β_1128 installed at a position physically separated from the system α_1132 instead of the server n_1116-n.

  As a further application example, a “mixed form” between the embodiment system shown in FIG. 2 or FIG. 8A / B and the embodiment system of FIG. 9 may be taken. In this case, both a system controller α_1126 and a router (gateway) 1300 with a built-in battery may be provided as relay means inside and outside the system α_1132. Further, management, operation, or control of the entire network communication system α_1132 may be performed in cooperation by both the system controller α_1126 and the system controller β_1128, or normally only the system controller α_1126 may be performed. The system controller α_1126 and the system controller β_1128 frequently exchange information, and all the information necessary for collecting information and providing services to users for each section 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m is shared between the two companies. In this case, the related files stored in the memory unit 1232 in the system controller α_1126 are appropriately copied to the corresponding memory unit 1248 in the system controller β_1128 by mirroring. The address table of FIG. 23, the estimation / judgment collation table of FIG. 27, and the time series information of FIG. 28, which are examples of information necessary for collecting information and providing services to users for each section 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m. The tracking table will be described later. In this way, by appropriately sharing information between the system controllers α_1126 and β_1128, even if the management / operation and control subjects are switched (or mixed) in the middle, processing in the stable system α_1132 is prevented without being mixed. Will continue. Not limited to this, the system controller α_1126 and the server n_1116-n may cooperate to manage, operate, or control the entire network communication system α_1132. In this case, in the same manner as described above (using mirroring or the like), all information necessary for collecting information for each section 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m and providing a service to the user is stored in the system controller α_1126 and the server n_1116. You may share between n. By managing, operating, or controlling the entire network communication system α_1132 with a plurality of devices arranged at different positions in this way, it is possible to flexibly cope with emergencies, so the stability and reliability of the network communication system α_1132 is improved. There is an effect to do. For example, if the system controller α_1126 is shut down due to some unforeseen circumstances, or even if all information stored in the memory unit 1232 is destroyed due to a head crash or the like, the system controller β_1128 or the server n_1116-n is automatically assigned as an emergency response. Thus, the process of the system α_1132 can be continued stably without giving any stress to the user. In addition, since the user can operate the system controller β_1128 from a remote location to collect information from the network communication system α_1132 and control the network communication system α_1132, the convenience for the user is improved. In this case, in the system α_1132, the devices 1250-1 and 4250, 4 having the device controller 1240 and the memory unit 1242, the devices 1250-2 and 3 having no device controller 1240 and the memory unit 1242, or sensors / communications to be described later Composite modules that collectively refer to the module 1460 and the drive / communication module 1470 may be mixed.

  A supplementary explanation regarding the above-mentioned “mixed form” will be given. As shown in FIG. 5, the composite module 1295 (or unit 1290) arranged in the network system α_1132 often has a power storage module (battery) 1554. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs in the system α_1132, many of the combination modules 1295 (or units 1290) continue to operate without being affected. Furthermore, in the embodiment system of FIG. 9, since the battery is built in the router (gateway) 1300 that relays information communication inside and outside the system α_1132, it is not affected by the power failure in the network system α_1132. Therefore, if a means for backing up management / control in the network system α_1132 in the event of an unforeseen occurrence such as a power failure or failure, information communication in the system α_1132 continues without delay without being affected by the unforeseen occurrence such as a power failure or failure. To do.

  Information communication in the normal network system α_1132 as already explained in section 1.1 that “the only system controller α_1126 performs management / control / operation / information collection of information communication in the network system α_1132”. The system controller α_1126 performs management / control / operation / information collection. However, when an unforeseen occurrence such as a power failure or failure occurs, the system controller β_1128 performs information communication management / control / operation / information collection within the network system α_1132. However, at normal times, the system controller β_1128 may be handled as one unit 1290 belonging to the network system α_1132.

  As already described in Section 1.1 with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2, the system controller α_1126 that manages / controls / operates / collects information in the network system α_1132 is a unit in the network system α_1132. In addition to performing information communication within the network system with 1290, information communication outside the system is performed with the server n_1116-n (cloud or cloud server) existing outside the network system α_1132. When the system controller β_1128 performs the actual operation of the system controller α_1126 when an unforeseen occurrence such as a power failure or failure occurs, information communication between each unit 1290 and the server n_1116-n is desired in the same communication information format as before the actual operation. . This is because, using the same communication information format, it is possible to smoothly and seamlessly perform the epoch-making process.

  As described later in Section 2.1 with reference to FIG. 10A, the C-format can be used for communication information in the communication middleware layer APL02 between the system controller α_1126 and the composite module 1295. On the other hand, the communication information in the communication middleware layer APL06 between the system controller α_1126 and the server n_1116-n (cloud or cloud server) may use A-format, E-format, W-format, or the like. Therefore, when the system controller β_1128 performs proxy processing instead of the system controller α_1126, it is desirable to perform similar information communication. That is, the communication information in the communication middleware layer APL02 between the system controller β_1128 and the composite module 1295 uses the C-format, and the communication information with the server n_1116-n (cloud or cloud server) uses the A-format or E-format, W -Use formats, etc.

  The contents of the client system generated by combining the contents described later in section 2.1 with FIG. 10A and FIG. 17A in this way and the system of the present embodiment described above are summarized below. That is, this client system (system α_1132) can be connected to an external cloud (server n_1116-1 in FIG. 1) (via system controller α_1126 in FIG. 10A or router (gateway) 1300 in FIG. 17A or system controller β_1128). Further, the client system (system α_1132) acquires and manages the information from the unit 1290 (or the composite module 1295) having a function of communicating the information acquired or created independently, and the first system controller α_1126 A second system controller β_1128 different from the first system controller α_1126 that acquires and manages the information from the unit 1290 (or the combination module 1295), and System controller α_1126 manages a plurality of units 1290 (or combination module 1295) by dividing them into sections 1142 (FIG. 1), and information on the sections to which each unit belongs (address table of FIG. 23 described later in section 4.3) Or a time series information tracking table in FIG. 28), in which communication between the second system controller β_1128 and the plurality of units 1290 (or combination module 1295) is performed in a first data format. (C-format in FIG. 17A) and communication between the second system controller β_1128 and the cloud (server n_1161-1 in FIG. 1) is performed in the second data format (A / E / in FIG. 17B). (W-format).

  In the meantime, it has already been described that the system controller β_1134 may be treated as one unit 1290 belonging to the network system α_1132 in which the system controller α_1126 performs management / control / operation / information collection. In the system of the present embodiment, information communication between different units 1290 in the same network system 1132 is possible via (via) the network system α_1132. As described above, when information communication is performed between the system controller α_1126 and the unit 1290, the communication information in the communication middleware layer APL02 can use the C-format. Accordingly, even when information communication is performed between the system controller α_1126 and the system controller β_1128, the management / control / operation / information collection of the system controller α_1126 becomes easier when the C-format is used for communication information in the communication middleware layer APL02. Is born.

  On the other hand, even when the system controller β_1134 communicates information with the server n_1116-n (cloud or cloud server) at normal time, the A-format, E-format, or W-format is used for communication information in the communication middleware layer APL06. It is desirable to do. As a result, when the use of the system controller α_1126 becomes impossible due to a power failure or failure, an effect is obtained in which the temporary processing related to management / control / operation / information collection of the network system α_1132 can be performed smoothly and seamlessly.

  In other words, it can be expressed as follows. In other words, this client system (system α_1132) can be connected to an external cloud (server n_1116-1 in FIG. 1) (via the system controller α_1126 in FIG. 10A or the router (gateway) 1300 in FIG. 17A and the system controller β_1128). Yes, the first system controller α_1126 that acquires and manages the information from the unit 1290 (or the composite module 1295) having a function of communicating the information acquired or created uniquely, and the unit 1290 (or the composite module 1295) A second system controller β_1128 different from the first system controller α_1126 that acquires and manages the information from the first system controller β_1128, and the second system controller β_1128 includes the first system controller α_1126. Communication between the plurality of units 1290 via the system controller α_1126 is performed using a first data format (C-format or the like), and the second system controller β_1128 and the cloud (server of FIG. 1). n_1116-n) is characterized by using the second data format (A / E / W-format in FIG. 17B).

  In other words, the paraphrase up to now has often been relatively conscious of the cooperative processing and substitution processing of the system controller α_1126 and the system controller β_1128. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the feature of the embodiment of FIG. That is, this client system (system α_1132) can be connected to an external cloud (server n_1116-1 in FIG. 1) (via system controller α_1126 in FIG. 10A or router (gateway) 1300 in FIG. 17A or system controller β_1128). And a unit 1290 (or composite module 1295) having a function of communicating uniquely acquired or created information, a system controller β_1128 that acquires and manages the information from the unit 1290 (device 1250 in FIG. 9), A gateway 1300 having a function of communicating between the unit 1290 (the device 1250 in FIG. 9) and the system controller β_1128, and the system controller β_1128 includes a plurality of units 1290. 9 is divided into sections 1_1142-1 and 2_1142-2, and information related to the sections 1_1142-1 and 2_1142-2 to which each unit 1290 (device 1250 in FIG. 9) belongs (section 4.3). 23, which is described later in FIG. 23 or the time-series information tracking table in FIG. 28), and communication between the system controller β_1128 and the plurality of units 1290 (device 1250 in FIG. 9). For the communication between the system controller β_1128 and the cloud (server n_1116-n in FIG. 1), the second data format (A / B in FIG. 17B) is used. E / W-format).

Section 1.9 Example of Utilization of Compound Module in Local Network System In the embodiment shown in FIG. 8A or FIG. 9, the basic communication partner of the system controller α_1126 of FIG. 8A or the server n_1116-n of FIG. 1250-1 to 4. Conventionally, since the basic function is determined in advance for each device, the contents of the network communication information (communication protocol or exchange information 1810 in the communication middleware layer APL described in Chapter 2) conforming to the basic function for each device is standard. Predefined above. However, as each device evolves / develops and diversifies as the times change, it becomes difficult to quickly apply the standard to the equipment function of each device that changes from time to time. For example, the basic function of a television is “receive broadcast waves and display the content to the user”. However, current Japanese high-end televisions are not limited to the basic functions described above, but also include a data communication function or a recording function using a network line. Although not so popular at present, the naked-eye 3D TV (3 Dimensional Television) also has a built-in function for detecting position information of the user who watches. Further, in the future, a light sensor may be incorporated in the television (to optimally control the brightness of the display screen). Considering such diversification and expandability for each device, if communication information format (exchange information 1810) or communication protocol with devices 1250-1 to 4 is made versatile, the communication information is decoded. Adverse effects that lead to higher prices of the devices 1250-1 to 1250-1 incorporating the high-performance device controllers 1240-1 to 1-2. That is, it is difficult for the device 1250-2 or the device 1250-3 in FIG. 8A to decode complicated communication information having versatility, and a device for performing various controls in the device according to the decoding and the decoding result. The built-in controller 1240 is necessary.

  As a countermeasure, in FIG. 8B, the sensors / communication modules 1460-1 to 5 or the drive / communication modules 1470-1 to 2 belonging to the composite module 1295 can be installed in the devices 1450-1 to 4-4 alone or outside the devices. Yes.

  For convenience of explanation, all the devices 1450-1 to 1-4 in FIG. 8B have a structure in which sensors / communication modules 1460-1 to 1460-4 belonging to the composite module 1295 and drive / communication modules 1470-1 are incorporated. . However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the embodiment shown in FIG. That is, for example, the composite module 1295 (the sensor / communication module 1460 or the drive / communication module 1470) may be additionally incorporated in the devices 1250-1 to 1250-4 shown in FIG. 8A and FIG. In this case, information communication regarding the basic function for each device (for example, the function of “receiving broadcast waves and displaying the content to the user” in the previous example) is performed in the devices 1250-1 to 4-4 shown in FIG. 8A and FIG. 9. Correspond with. Information communication regarding new functions that are newly developed and diversified is directly performed by newly added composite modules 1295, 1460, and 1470. The entire functions possessed by the highly diversified / evolved device 1250 are integratedly managed / understood and controlled in the system controller α_1126. As a result, a new effect of facilitating extensibility (incorporation sensor / driving type extensibility) when adding a new function to a conventional existing device is produced. Furthermore, since the functions of the combined modules 1295, 1460, and 1470 are very limited and simplified, the communication information exchanged between the combined modules 1295, 1460, and 1470 with the outside can be greatly simplified. An effect is also born. If the communication information exchanged with the outside is greatly simplified in this way, it becomes unnecessary to incorporate a high-performance device controller 1240-1-2 for decoding / controlling the complicated communication information. Modules 1295, 1460, and 1470 can be easily reduced in price and size.

  In the example illustrated in FIG. 8B, the device 1450-1 and the device 1450-2 are disposed in the section 2_1142-2, and the devices 1450-3 to 4-4 are disposed in the section m_1142-m. However, the installation locations of the devices 1450-1 to 1-4 are not necessarily fixed, and any one of the specific devices 1450-1 to 1450-4 may be transported and shifted into another section.

Similarly, in the embodiment system of FIG. 8B, the sensor module and the drive module are individually integrated with the communication module in the smart meter 1124 and in the section 1_1142-1 (for example, corresponding to the entire interior of one vehicle). As a result, as shown in the smart meter 1124 in FIG. 8B, the discharge amount monitor / communication module 1406 and the inflow amount monitor / communication module 1408 are configured and individually connected to the system controller α_1126 and the server n_1116-n via the network. Yes. Similarly, the section 1_1142-1 includes a discharge amount monitor / communication module 1416, an inflow amount monitor / communication module 1418, a discharge amount control / communication module 1412, and an inflow amount control / communication module 1414, each of which is individually connected to the communication module 1202. 3 is connected to the system controller α_1126 (the processor 1230 in the network) via the network. Here, the discharge amount monitor / communication module 1406, the inflow amount monitor / communication module 1408, the discharge amount monitor / communication module 1416, and the inflow amount monitor / communication module 1418 correspond to the sensor / communication module 1460. The discharge amount control / communication module 1412 and the inflow amount control / communication module 1414 correspond to the drive / communication module 1470. In this case, all detection signals and measurement information obtained from the sensors / communication modules 1460-1 to 1460-1 or the discharge amount monitor / communication modules 1406, 1416 and the inflow amount monitor / communication modules 1408, 1418 in the system α_1132 are stored in the system. The controller α_1126 collects the data collectively (and stores it in the memory unit 1232). In addition, the system controller α_1126 collectively controls (issues a command) for all the drive / communication modules 1470-1-2, the discharge amount control / communication module 1412 and the inflow amount control / communication module 1414 in the system α_1132. As a result, the single system controller α_1126 enables efficient integrated management and control for all the devices 1450-1 to 1450-5 in the system α_1132 and high-quality service provision to the end user.

  Furthermore, in the system example of the embodiment shown in FIG. 8B, there is an effect that the devices 1450-1 to 1450-5 can be manufactured at a very low cost. That is, by mass-producing standard composite modules 1460 and 1470 having versatility, the composite modules 1460 and 1470 can be manufactured at a significantly low cost. In addition, no new interface unit for connecting the composite modules 1295, 1460, and 1470 is required, and it can be incorporated into the corresponding devices 1450-1 to 1450-1 at a simple physical arrangement level very easily and inexpensively. When the low cost supply of the drive / communication modules 1470-1 and 2 is possible, the number of the drive / communication modules 1470-1 and 2 to be incorporated in the devices 1450-1 to 1450-5 can be increased as compared with the example of FIG. 8B. Further, the method of assembling the composite modules 1295, 1460, and 1470 to the devices 1450-1 to 1450-5 is not limited to screwing and fixing, and for example, provisional fixing using a double-sided tape or adhesive tape by an end user may be performed. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 8B, one sensor / communication module 1460-4 to 1-5 is built in each of the device 1450-1 and the device 1450-3, and a plurality of sensor / communication modules 1460- are included in the device 1450-2. 2-3 are built in. However, if the method described above is used, it becomes easy for an end user to reattach a specific sensor / communication module 1460-2 to 5 to another device 1450.

  In the embodiment system shown in FIG. 8B, the sensor / communication module 1460-5 is not installed in the device 1450, but is installed in any place in the specific section 1142 (or in the domain 1122). . Such a sensor / communication module 1460-5 (or composite module 1295, 1460, 1470) can be installed alone, for example, by the user using a sensor / communication module 1460 (or a tape, an adhesive, a thumbtack or the like). The composite module 1295, 1460, 1470) may be fixed to the wall, roof, or floor, or may be mixed with paint and applied to the wall, roof, or floor. Further, although not shown, the drive / communication module 1470 is installed alone in any place in the specific section 1142 (or in the domain 1122) (for example, in the form of an air conditioner, a television, a remote control for controlling lighting equipment, etc.). Also good.

  As another example of the system of the present embodiment, the combination modules 1295, 1460, and 1470 can be moved together with the user, and the position change history of the combination modules 1295, 1460, and 1470 is measured to collect user action history information. Also good. Further, the drive / communication module 1470 can be moved together with the user (not shown), and from any place in the specific section 1142 (or in the domain 1122) (for example, controlling an air conditioner, a television, a lighting facility, etc.) Control of state changes (for example, air conditioning or brightness changes) in the section 1142 may be performed. Here, as a method of making the combined modules 1295, 1460, and 1470 movable with the user, for example, temporarily fixing with a tape or an adhesive to a portable product that the user wears on a regular basis such as glasses, tie pins, shoes, or a wallet. Adhere. Or you may fix firmly with a screw | thread etc., and you may incorporate in a portable article inside.

Chapter 2 Outline of Communication Information Hierarchical Structure and Data Structure In Chapter 1, the overall structure of the system of the present embodiment was described with reference to FIGS. In this second chapter, the features and detailed contents of the data structure (communication protocol contents) of communication information communicated with each other in the present embodiment described in the first chapter will be described.

2.1 Hierarchical structure of network communication-related functions in this embodiment The network communication used in this embodiment has a hierarchical structure for each function as shown in FIGS. 10A / B and FIGS. There is a big feature. Physical communication media (communication media) necessary for network communication in the physical layers PHY02 and PHY06 corresponding to the physical functions of the lowest layer shown in FIGS. 10A / B and FIGS. 16 to 17B in this hierarchical structure. Provisions regarding When using wired or wired Ethernet as a specific example of this physical communication medium, cables and connectors having the shapes and characteristics defined in the physical layer PHY06 standard are used. To do. On the other hand, when wireless is used as the physical communication medium, it is adapted to the frequency, channel, modulation scheme, basic communication frame configuration, etc. defined in the physical layer PHY02 and PHY06 standards.

  In the media access layers MAC02 and MAC06 corresponding to the access function on the communication media (communication media) positioned above the physical layers PHY02 and PHY06, nodes connected to the network (device 1250 in FIG. 8A or FIG. 8B). Information necessary for correctly communicating communication information with the combination modules 1460 and 1470) is defined. Further, the uppermost extended application layer EXL06 and the communication middleware layers APL06 and APL02 define various service provisions using network communication (corresponding to various service provision functions using communication).

By providing a hierarchical structure corresponding to each function in this way, it becomes possible to select / combine the optimum format for each layer according to the characteristics and performance of the communication partner. As a result, there is an effect that the overall cost of the communication system (with respect to the device 1250 shown in FIG. 8A) can be increased simultaneously with the price reduction (combination modules 1460 and 1470 shown in FIG. 8B) as the overall system of this embodiment. . A specific example of this effect will be described below. First, the physical layer PHY02 and the media access layer MAC02 can adopt a Z-format (details will be described later in section 2.3) that is suitable for short-range wireless, which is optimal for “power saving” required for the composite modules 1460 and 1470. . Furthermore, in order to optimize the “reduction in price” required for the composite modules 1460 and 1470, the communication middleware layer APL02 adopts a “communication information simplified” C-format (details will be described later in section 2.5). You may do it. On the other hand, in order to adapt to the high functionality of communication required between the server n_1116-n and the device 1250-1, the communication middleware layer APL06 can simultaneously communicate a plurality of information in an A-format (for details, see section 2.7). Or the E-format (details will be described later in section 2.6) or the W-format, and the communication information of the extended application layer EXL06 may also be used.

Also, it corresponds to the Internet protocol (internet protocol) function as an intermediate layer of communication information having the above hierarchical structure (a layer higher than the media access layers MAC02 and MAC06 and a layer lower than the communication middleware layers APL02 and APL06). There is the following feature of the present embodiment where information defined in the Internet Protocol Version 6 Layer IPv6 can be communicated “in common”. Here, “commonly communicable” means all nodes connected to the network (communication objects corresponding to the communication source and destination of network communication) in all the present embodiment systems shown in FIGS. 1 to 8B. Meaning, as a specific example in this embodiment, the device 1250 in FIG. 8A, the server n_1116-n, the wholesaler A_1102, or the composite modules 1460 and 1470 in FIG. This means that communication information defined in version 6 layer IPv6 (details will be described later in section 2.4) may be communicated. This situation can be explained by another method as follows. That is, as shown in FIG. 10A, in the communication information used (transmitted) in the same system network line 1788 (detailed contents will be described later) as the outside system network line 1788 described later, Information defined by a standard corresponding to version 6 layer IPv6 may be included. Here, the Internet Protocol Version 6 Layer IPv6 defines a communication protocol on the Internet, and performs address management and communication route management on the Internet. Therefore, in the standard defined by this Internet Protocol version 6 layer IPv6, it does not depend on the types of nodes such as the wholesaler A_1102, the server n_1116-n, the system controller α_1126, the device 1250-1, and the composite modules 1460 and 1470. A unique IP address (Internet Protocol Addresses) can be set for every node (communication object). In this way, when communicating between different systems in the same domain 2_1122-2 in the system of the present embodiment (when communicating between the system α_1132 and the system β_1134 in FIG. 1), by using the IP address, Management will be greatly simplified (details will be described later in section 2.8). As a specific example of the effect, for example, an overseas business trip destination (corresponding to the location of the system β_1134 in FIG. 1) from a home using a portable terminal (corresponding to the system controller β_1128 in FIG. 1) such as a smartphone or a tablet 1 (corresponding to the location of the system α_1132), the necessary information can be collected from the sensor / communication module 1460, or the drive / communication module 1470 can be operated, which greatly improves the convenience for the user. At this time, since the business trip destination (system β_1134) and the home (system α_1132) are protected in the same domain 2_1122-2 where intrusion from other outside is impossible, sufficiently strong security protection is made. Yes.

  First, using the system model of the embodiment shown in FIG. 8B, a hierarchical structure (architecture) for each function related to network communication is shown in FIG. 10A. In FIGS. 10A and 10B, since the system model of the embodiment shown in FIG. Further, instead of the composite modules 1460 and 1470 as the rightmost network node arranged in the network line 1782 in the same system, the communication in the devices 1250-2 and 3 in which the device controller 1240-1 described in FIG. Modules 1202-5 and 6 (and sensor modules 1260-3 to 5) may be associated with each other.

  Here, the left side of FIG. 10A shows a hierarchical structure (architecture) for each function related to communication between the server n_1116-n and the system controller α_1126 of FIG. 8B. The right side of FIG. 10A shows a hierarchical structure (architecture) for each function related to communication between the system controller α_1126 of FIG. 8B and each of the composite modules 1460 and 1470.

  As shown in FIG. 1, in the system according to this embodiment, the server n_1116-n can be installed at a location physically outside the area where the system α_1132 to which the system controller α_1126 belongs is located. Accordingly, as shown on the left side of FIG. 10A, communication between the server n_ 1116-n and the system controller α_1126 uses the network line 1788 outside the system. The network line 1788 outside the system may use an internet line via wired or wired or wireless. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a network line used within a relatively narrow range such as a LAN (Local Area Network) can be used.

  Further, as the above-described physical communication media (communication media) using wired communication, optical cables (fiberoptic cables) may be used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and any other physical medium corresponding to the above-mentioned wire may be any of signal transmission means such as electric cords, telephone wires, or power lines. Further, either an analog signal or a digital signal may be used as the signal form to be transmitted. Not only the difference in the physical form of such a communication medium and the signal form transmitted therein, but also the communication standards in the physical layer PHY06 differ depending on the communication line management company and the country / region where the communication is managed / supervised. . Therefore, in the system of the present embodiment, all communication standards in the physical layer PHY06 via the existing line are collectively referred to as “L-format”. On the other hand, when wireless is used in the physical layer PHY06 as the network line 1788 outside the system, a long-distance wireless 2G (Second Generation), 3G (Third Generation), or WiMAX (World Wide Interoperability for Microwave Access) communication standard is used. May be. Furthermore, the present embodiment system can use communication information compliant with all wireless communication standards including the mid-range wireless system. All wireless communication standards including these long-range wireless systems and medium-range wireless systems are collectively referred to as “G-format” here.

In comparison, all the composite modules 1460 and 1470 shown in FIG. 8B are arranged in common in the system α_1132 managed by the system controller α_1126.
The physical formation range of the system α_1132 is limited to a relatively narrow area. Therefore, information communication between the system controller α_1126 and the combination modules 1460 and 1470 is performed using the network line 1782 in the same system in FIG. 10A. In order to distinguish from the “G-format” and “L-format” communication standards used in the external network line 1788 described above, it is used in the physical layer PHY02 of information communicated in the same internal network line 1782. Communication standards are collectively referred to as “Z-format”. In the system of the present embodiment, either the wireless system or the wired system (or a mixture thereof) may be used as the network line 1782 in the same system.

  On the other hand, the standard used in the media access layer MAC02 / 06 shown in FIG. 10A is often studied / proposed by the same standard development organization together with the physical layer PHY02 / 06. Therefore, the “L-format” or “G-format” can be used in the media access layer MAC06 transmitted on the external network line 1788 between the server n_1116-2 and the system controller α_1126 in accordance with the physical layer PHY06. Similarly, the “Z-format” can be used in the media access layer MAC02 transmitted on the same system network line 1782 between the system controller α_1126 and the composite modules 1460 and 1470. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the Z-format may be used for the physical layer PHY02, and the L-format or G-format may be used for the media access layer MAC02. In addition, the L-format or G-format may be used for the physical layer PHY06, and the Z-format may be used for the media access layer MAC06.

  The processing (mainly communication control processing) of information related to each function from the physical layer PHY06 to the Internet protocol version 6 layer IPv6 described above is performed by the communication modules 1768 and 1202 in the server n_1116-n and the system controller α_1126. -3 is executed. The communication modules 1460 in the composite modules 1460 and 1470 whose internal structures have been described with reference to FIG. 5 and FIG. . In the communication control unit 1700, information processing (mainly communication control processing) related to each function from the physical layer PHY02 to the Internet protocol version 6 layer IPv6 is performed.

  Information related to each function from the physical layer PHY06 to the Internet protocol version 6 layer IPv6 so far is mainly related to communication control, and has little relation to the function, operation and performance of the device 1450, for example. On the other hand, the communication middleware layers APL02 and APL06 and the extended application layer EXL06 in FIG. 10A are related to various service providing functions using network communication. Processing of communication information related to the functions of the communication middleware layer APL06 and the extended application layer EXL06 (mainly processing related to service provision to the user) is executed by the processors 1738 and 1230 in the server n_1116-n and the system controller α_1126. . On the other hand, information related to the function of the communication middleware layer APL02 communicated via the same system network line 1782 is processed in the interface unit 1710 in the communication module 1660 in the composite modules 1460 and 1470. As described above, the combination modules 1460 and 1470 do not use an expensive processor, and the communication module 1660 can process all communication information communicated through the network line 1782 in the same system. There is. By eliminating the need for incorporating an expensive processor in this way, an effect of providing the composite modules 1460 and 1470 at a low cost is produced.

  Among the information communicated via the external system network line 1788, the unique information that can be used only on the specific application software installed in both the server n_1116-n and the system controller α_1126 is stored in the extended application layer EXL06. The system of this embodiment has a great feature in that it can be stored in and communicated. This makes it possible to differentiate between application software installed in both the server n_1116-n and the system controller α_1126. As a result, it is possible to promote the development of application software technology and promote the development of application software of each company based on the competition principle, and to improve the convenience for the user. Furthermore, by using the unique information stored in the extended application layer EXL06, there is an effect that the quality of service provided to the user by the application software is improved. If the performance and additional expansion functions owned by the devices 1250-1 and 2250-1 and 2 shown in FIG. 8A and FIG. 9 are improved / developed in the future, A-, E-, W- used in the communication middleware layer APL06 accordingly. Necessary to sequentially upgrade the format standards. However, since a very complicated work is required for upgrading the standard, there arises a problem that it is difficult for the upgrade of the standard to follow the performance improvement and additional expansion of functions of the devices 1250-1 and 1250-1. On the other hand, by using the extended application layer EXL06 by the application software vendor, it is possible to easily cope with the performance improvement of the devices 1250-1 and 2 and additional expansion of functions without waiting for the standard version upgrade. As described above, the information stored and communicated in the extended application layer EXL06 can be freely set according to a specific software vendor. Therefore, the description format of the communication information here does not need to be defined as a global standard in advance.

  On the other hand, the communication information related to the service providing function of the communication middleware layer APL02 / APL06 may use information conforming to a prescribed format such as A-, E-, W-, C-format, for example. . Thus, when the communication information related to the service providing function of the communication middleware layer APL02 / APL06 conforms to a predetermined standard format, mutual compatibility between the servers 1116, the system controllers 1126/1128, and between the composite modules 1460 and 1470 is achieved. Produces an effect that makes it easier to remove.

  As shown in FIG. 25, both the server n_1116-n and the system controller α_1126 have a large-capacity memory unit 1232 (and database 1118-n), and can have a high-speed and powerful processor 1738/1230. Accordingly, various and large amounts of communication information corresponding to various service provisions can be set in the communication middleware layer APL06 transmitted between the two. On the other hand, in the composite modules 1460 and 1470, it is difficult to incorporate a processor capable of providing various services. Accordingly, in the system of the present embodiment corresponding to the above situation, the format (A-format, E-format, W-format, etc.) used in the communication middleware layer APL06 is different for information communication with the composite modules 1460, 1470. A format (C-format or the like) may be used in the communication middleware layer APL02. In particular, the C-format (details will be described later in section 2.5) used in the communication middleware layer APL02 is relatively simplified, thereby reducing the processing burden in the composite modules 1460 and 1470 and reducing the price. As a result, the consumption of the built-in power storage module (battery) 1554 can be reduced by improving the relative processing speed and shortening the processing time. However, the system according to the present embodiment is not limited thereto, and an A-format, an E-format, a W-format, or the like may be used for information communication with the composite modules 1460 and 1470.

  Here, information used in the communication middleware layer APL02 included in the communication information using the network line 1782 in the same system and information used in the communication middleware layer APL06 included in the communication information using the network line 1788 outside the system. The switching (conversion) process between the system controller α_1126 and the system controller α_1126 is processed. On the other hand, in the communication middleware layers APL02 and APL06 of the system of the present embodiment, the communication information used in the same system network line 1782 and the communication information used in the external system network line 1788 do not necessarily have to completely match. There may be some differences between the two pieces of communication information. This processing method will be described below. As already described in section 1.1 and section 1.7, and as shown in FIG. 8B, the system controller α_1126 performs management and management of network communication in the network system α_1132. Information detected by all sensors / communication modules 1460 sequentially obtained in real time via the same system network line 1782 and information on all states controlled (set) by the drive / communication module 1470 are managed information 1744. The data is appropriately stored in the memory unit 1232 in the system controller α_1126. Here, the management information 1744 may be stored in a table format as a management table. 8A and 8B are mixed, the system controller α_1126 simultaneously stores information (detection information, current status information, etc.) of all devices 1250 as part of the management information 1744. . The system controller α_1126 extracts only the specific information within the range in which the user's personal information is protected from the management information 1744, and communicates information to the server n_1116-n via the intra-system network line 1788. The information communicated to the server n_1116-n is stored in the database 1118-n as management information 1748 (which may be table format information) managed by the server n_1116. In this way, the system controller α_1126 not only protects the user's security by converting between the communication information used in the communication middleware layer APL02 and the communication information used in the APL06 (information switching). Since the minimum necessary information is selected and received in advance, the server n_1116-n can be simplified.

The following features occur as a client system that combines the above-described content with the overall system overview content already described in section 1.1. That is, a unit that can be connected to an external cloud (the server n_1116-n in FIG. 1), has a function of acquiring or creating and transmitting information provided to the system controller α_1126 and managing the information (system controller α_1126). The system controller α_1126 divides a plurality of existing units into sections to be managed (sections 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m in FIG. 1). , An electronic device system that holds information about the section to which each unit belongs, and the communication between the system controller and the plurality of units (a combination module 1295, 1460, 1470 which is a kind of) Data format (Fig. 1 The communication between the system controller α_1126 and the cloud (the server n_1116-n in FIG. 10A) is performed in the second data format (A / E / W). -Format or L /
G format is supported). In particular, the first data format and the second data format are different data formats.

  As described later in Section 2.2, the first data format includes a header (corresponding to the physical layer header PHYHD in FIG. 11) and first data (from the MAC layer header MACHD to the TCP header TCPHD in FIG. 11). Data) and second data (communication middleware data APLDT) in addition to the first data.

  In addition, when performing communication processing of communication information having the above-described characteristics across the above-described system controller α_1126, the following characteristics are provided. That is, the system controller α_1126 uses the second data format (A / E / W-format or L / G format in FIG. 10A) as the communication information obtained from the unit (a combination module 1295, 1460, 1470 which is a kind of unit). ) And transmitted to the cloud (server n_1116-n), and the information communicated from the cloud (server n_1116-n) is changed to the first data format (C-format or Z-format). To the unit (combined modules 1295, 1460, 1470 which are a kind of unit).

  Here, the unit has a function of transmitting information to be provided to the system controller (the communication module 1660 shown in FIG. 4A is responsible) and a function of detecting external environment information “for example, temperature, illuminance, etc.” as the information (FIG. 4B sensor module 1260), or a state change function (changed by the drive module 1670 in FIG. 4C) that changes the state of the unit itself that is the basis of the information to be transmitted. Therefore, the unit acquires or creates the information of the first data format as part of the function to communicate.

  4A to 4C, the communication module 1660, the sensor module 1260, and the drive module 1670 are separated from each other for convenience of explanation. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the present embodiment, the functions may be shared with each other or some of the functions may overlap. In this case, the function to detect and the state change function in the unit are combined with the function to communicate.

  When the communication module 1660 has the structure shown in FIG. 7A, the functions of the communication module 1660 may be realized by a combination of all functional circuits without using the processor 1960 described in FIG. 7A. In this case, the unit does not have a CPU (Central Processing Unit) for processing the information.

  Next, in the same communication middleware layers APL02 and APL06, description of feature comparison between communication information used (transmitted) in the same system network line 1782 and the outside system network line 1788 will be given with reference to FIG. Communication information based on the A-format or E-format may be used for communication between the system controller α_1126 and the server n_ 1116-n via the external system network circuit 1788. In the system according to the present embodiment, the A-format includes all formats described in “text information in a broad sense as communication information related to the communication middleware layer APL”. On the other hand, as described later in section 2.6, the E-format uses a format in which “setting code is stored in a predetermined area defined in advance” in the area of communication middleware data APLDT (see section 2.2). Any format is included. In particular, the A-format and E-format have a feature that “information including plural items can be communicated (transmitted) at a time”. However, there is a risk that the network line outside the system 1788 used for this information communication temporarily becomes congested due to the use status of other users. Therefore, if a system that repeats communication very frequently between the system controller α_1126 and the server n_ 1116-n is employed, there is a risk that the communication between the two companies will stagnate only when the network line is abnormally congested. Compared to this, by adopting a format in which information of a plurality of contents can be communicated at a time as shown in the present embodiment, there is an effect of reducing the communication frequency between the two and reducing the risk of communication stagnation. However, the present embodiment system is not limited thereto, and communication information conforming to the C-format or W-format may be used for communication between the system controller α_1126 and the server n_ 1116-n.

  In the A-format or E-format, a plurality of tables in a template format determined in advance according to the type of the exchange information 1810 communicated between the system controller α_1126 and the server n_1116-n are defined. And what type of table will be used as a template? Is included in the exchange information 1810 as type identification information 1840 of the exchange information. The exchange information (table) 1810 communicated in this way is shared between the system controller α_1126 and the server n_1116-n, thereby improving the efficiency of information processing between the two companies. That is, by installing the application software including the processing routine of the exchange information (table) 1810 on both the system controller α_1126 and the server n_1116-n, it is possible to provide advanced services to the user.

  On the other hand, information indicating the purpose of use of the exchange information (table) 1810 notified to the receiving party is included in the exchange information (table) 1810 as communication access control information 1830. For example, as the communication access control information 1830 in the E-format, “write request”, “read request”, “notification request”, “write / read request”, “write response”, “notification”, “read” to the receiving party Codes corresponding to “response”, “notification response”, “write / read response” and the like are set. Further, in the communication access control information 1830 in the A-format, “record-only (WRITE ONLY)” (which means a state setting instruction to the receiving party or a notification to the receiving party of the transmission source state) and (the current state of the receiving party) "Read only" or "Record / play (READWRITE)" can be described in the exchange information (table) 1810 in the XML (Extensible Markup Language) format.

  Although not shown in FIG. 10B, the World Wide Web may be used as another method for communicating information via the external network line 1788. This method corresponds to the W-format of FIG. 10A, and the server n_1116-n or the system controller α_1126 also has a Web server function. In this case, the communication information transmission side (either server n — 1116-n or system controller α — 1126) designates the receiving party (server n — 1116 — n or the other side of system controller α — 1126) based on URL (Uniform Resource Location), Communication information is automatically written in the entry field specified in the form format (Form) on the homepage. When the information communication is completed, the reception side stores the received information (or the processing result) in the management information 1744 or 1748 according to a program set in advance by PHP (a term recursively abbreviated as Hypertext Preprocessor) or a Java applet. Here, by providing multiple writing fields specified in the form format in the same homepage, it is possible to set a situation where “information of multiple contents can be communicated (transmitted) at one time”, and the above-described effects are also exhibited in the W-format. it can. Therefore, the W-format in the system of the present embodiment includes all formats in which “the communication side fills in a write field designated in advance by the receiving side and performs information communication”. Not limited to this, any format in which “a tag unique to HTML or HTML5 is described” may be classified as a W-format.

  As described above, in the information communication between the server n_1116-n and the system controller α_1126 via the external system network line 1788, a contrivance is made to reduce the communication frequency. On the other hand, in the same system network line 1782, the system controller α_1126 performs management and operation of the communication line in the network system, so there is no risk that the network line is congested and the communication is stagnated. The communication information in the communication middleware layer APL02 for the composite modules 1460 and 1470 is simplified in order to adapt to the price reduction and downsizing of the composite modules 1460 and 1470. As a specific example, information communication in any of cases 1 to 3 shown in FIG. 10B can be performed. In this case 1, for example, a setting state change (state control) command (command issuance) 1852 for the drive / communication module is issued from the system controller α_1126, and the execution result of the command 1852 is returned from the drive / communication module. On the other hand, in case 2, for the purpose of collecting sense information (detection information) by the sensor / communication module 1460, a response request (request) 1872 is issued from the system controller α_1126, and the sensor / communication module 1460 senses as a response (response) 1874. Answer information (detection information). When the sensor / communication module 1460 notifies the system controller α_1126 of sense information (detection information) at an arbitrary timing (or a preset periodic timing), the periodic / non-periodic as in Case 3 A manual report 1894 may be made.

  In the system of the present embodiment, the information communication method is not limited to the above, and other communication methods may be used. For example, as shown in FIG. 8A, when a device 1250-1 including a device controller 1240-1 and a memory unit 1242 is installed in a system α_1132, a network line within the same system between the device 1250-1 and the system controller α_1126. For information communication on 1782, as shown in FIG. 16, a communication middleware layer APL06 or an extended application layer EXL06 compliant with the A-format, E-format, or W-format may be used. As an exemplary embodiment in this case, application software that can utilize the extended application layer EXL06 may be installed in the server n_1116-n in advance. After obtaining the user's permission via the user I / F unit 1234 (described in FIG. 8A), the system controller α_1126 automatically transfers the application software to both the system controller α_1126 itself and the corresponding device 1250. Alternatively, the installation process may be performed. At this time, the system controller α_1126 accesses the server n_1116-n and transfers application software stored in advance in the database 1118-n. In this way, the system controller α_1126 is relayed to connect the in-system network circuit 1788 and the in-system network circuit 1788 so that the application software can be automatically installed up to the corresponding device 1250 without burdening the user. Since an environment in which the extended application layer EXL06 can be used can be automatically constructed, an effect of ensuring compatibility and flexibility in the network system of the latest device 1250 whose function has been newly expanded is produced. However, the present embodiment system is not limited to the above. For example, communication information conforming to the C-format may be used for information communication in the communication middleware layer APL06 between the system controller α_1126 and the device 1250 shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 9, when the devices 1250-1, 4 and the server n_1116-n are directly connected via the router (gateway) 1300, the router (gateway) is used instead of the system controller α_1126 in FIG. ) 1300 is arranged between the device 1250 and the server n_1116-n. In this case, in the extended application layer EXL06 and the communication middleware layer APL06, the same communication information is used both in the external network circuit 1788 and in the same system network circuit 1782. Further, in this case, since the device 1250 and the server n_1116-n have their own IP addresses, the transmission side IP address information SIPADRS and the reception side IP address information DIPADRS set in the Internet Protocol Version 6 layer. Information can be directly communicated between the device 1250 and the server n_1116-n using (details will be described later in Section 2.4 using FIG. 13). In this case, communication information based on the E-format or the A-format is mainly used for information communication in the communication middleware layer APL06 between the device 1250 and the server n_1116-n. However, the present embodiment system is not limited to this, and a C-format or a W-format may be used. As described above, the same communication information is used both in the outside network circuit 1788 and in the same system network circuit 1782, so that the burden of the relay processing of the router (gateway) 1300 can be greatly reduced. However, the physical layer PHY02, PHY06 and the media access layer MAC02, MAC06 use different formats (in the example of FIG. 16, the Z-format is used for the network line 1782 in the same system, and the L-format is used for the network line 1788 outside the system. Alternatively, the G-format may be used). In this case, format conversion is performed in the router (gateway) 1300.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 1, when information communication is performed between system controllers α_1126 and β_1128 belonging to different systems α_1132 and β_1134 belonging to the same domain 2_1122-2, the system controller α_1126 shown on the left side of FIG. A communication method similar to that between the servers n_1116-n may be used. In this case, the same communication information as that on the external system network line 1688 may be used in all layers from the physical layer PHY06 to the extended application layer EXL06. In this case, the application software may be automatically installed on the system controller β_1128 in the same manner as described above. Accordingly, communication information conforming to the E-format or A-format is mainly used for information communication in the communication middleware layer APL06 in this case. However, the present embodiment system is not limited to this, and a C-format or a W-format may be used. In this case, the formats used in the physical layer PHY06 and the media access layer MAC06 are as follows:
○ If the distance between the system α_1132 and β_1134 is far, use L-format or G-format,
O Z-format may be used when the distance between the systems α_1132 and β_1134 approaches. In the L-format and G-format, information communication can be performed anywhere in the world. On the other hand, relatively long communication time is required. In the Z-format, the communication range is limited but the relative communication time is limited. There are short features. Therefore, by switching the format to be used according to the distance between the two, there is an effect that the advantage between the two formats can be used as appropriate.

  Further, consider a case where FIG. 1 and FIG. 8B coexist as an application example of the system of the present embodiment. In this case, the combination modules 1460 and 1470 in the system α_1132 may be directly accessed from the system controller β_1128 (FIG. 1) in the different system β_1134. In this case, the communication method is such that the system controller β_1128 shown in FIG. 1 is arranged in place of the server n_1116-n in FIG. 10A and the network line in the same domain is rewritten instead of the network line outside the system in FIG. 10A. . Therefore, in this case, L-format, G-format, A-format, E-format, or W format may be used as communication information within the network line 2082 in the same domain. Furthermore, the system of the present embodiment is not limited to this. For example, a Z-format or a C-format may be used. Similarly to the above, the format may be automatically switched between the Z-format and the L / G-format according to the distance between the composite module (within the system α_1132) and the system controller β_1128. A detailed method using the Internet protocol version 6 layer IPv6 in this case will be described later in detail in section 2.8.

Section 2.2 Relationship between the hierarchical structure of communication-related functions and communication information on the network line The specific hierarchical structure shown in FIGS. 10A and 16 to 17B and the actual communication within the network line The relationship with the information content is shown in FIG. Regardless of whether the network communication medium is wired or wireless, communication information is intermittently transmitted in units of one block on these physical communication media. This block corresponds to the physical layer frame PPDU in FIG. Here, in the case of a single channel (single corresponder), communication of other communication information is not possible when the chunk (physical layer frame PPDU) is transmitted on the network communication medium. Therefore, if the size of the block (physical layer frame PPDU) is too large, the occupation time of the network communication medium becomes long, and there is a risk of hindering other communications. In order to solve the above problem, in the system of the present embodiment, the data size of one physical layer frame PPDU is set to 127 bytes or less. Thereby, there is an effect of reducing the adverse effect of hindering other information communication by one physical layer frame PPDU communication in the network system. In addition, as shown in FIG. 11A, the physical layer header PHYHD in this one physical layer frame PPDU is transmitted in the order of transmission from the transmission side to the reception side (the order from the front or the order in which information is sent out earlier). MAC layer header MACHD, IPv6 header IPv6HD, TCP header TCPHD, communication middleware data APLDT, extended data EXDT, and erroneous check CRC. On the other hand, when this data arrangement is viewed from the viewpoint of FIG. 11 (f), “physical layer header PHYHD is arranged at the head in physical layer frame PPDU, followed by physical layer data or physical layer payload PSDU, and this physical It can be said that MAC layer header MACHD, IPv6 header IPv6HD, TCP header TCPHD, communication middleware data APLDT, extension data EXDT, and erroneous check CRC are sequentially stored in the layer data / payload PSDU.

  In FIG. 10A and FIGS. 16 to 17B, the entire physical layer frame PPDU is processed in the physical layers PHY02 and PHY06. Here, the physical layers PHY02 and PHY06 indicate a concept that abstracts “functions for dealing with physical communication media”. On the other hand, the actual processing corresponding to each function from the physical layer PHY02, PHY06 to the Internet protocol version 6 layer IPv6 is executed in the communication module 1768, 1202-3 and the communication control unit 1700 (FIG. 10A). The However, in this section 2.2, in order to make it easy to explain the relationship between the function for each layer and the communication information communicated on the network line, the information delivery procedure for each layer will be described in detail. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and communication information may be created by omitting a part of information delivery for each layer. For example, inside the communication modules 1768 and 1202-3 and the communication control unit 1700 (FIG. 10A) at the time of transmission, they are given from the communication middleware layers APL02 and APL06 (substantially in the processors 1230 and 1738 or the communication module 1660 in FIG. 10A). Information (data structure) shown in FIG. 11A is directly created from communication middleware data APLDT and extension data EXDT (or only communication middleware data APLDT) (provided from the interface section) and transmitted from network lines 1782 and 1788 ( Send). At the time of reception, only the necessary physical layer frame PPDU is selectively extracted from the network lines 1782 and 1788 within the communication modules 1768 and 1202-3 and the communication control unit 1700 (FIG. 10A), and communication middleware data APLDT and extension data EXDT ( Alternatively, the communication middleware data APLDT only) may be extracted and passed to the communication middleware layers APL02 and APL06 (substantially, the interfaces in the processors 1230 and 1738 or the communication module 1660 in FIG. 10A).

  As a detailed reception-side function that the physical layers PHY02 and PHY06 bear, the contents of the physical layer header PHYHD arranged at the head position in the received physical layer frame PPDU are identified, and the physical layer data arranged immediately thereafter or The entire physical layer payload PSDU is delivered to the media access layers MAC02 and MAC06. Therefore, when viewed from the media access layers MAC02 and MAC06, the physical layer data or the entire physical layer payload PSDU corresponds to the MAC layer frame MPDU. On the other hand, the detailed functions on the transmission side that the physical layers PHY02 and PHY06 are responsible for include the MAC layer frame MPDU received from the media access layers MAC02 and MAC06 in the physical layer data or physical layer payload PSDU, and the physical layer header PHYHD. A physical layer frame PPDU constructed by adding to the head is transmitted through the network lines 1784 and 1788.

  As shown in FIG. 11 (e), the MAC layer frame MPDU is composed of the MAC layer header MACHD, MAC layer data / payload MSDU, and erroneous check CRC in order from the top. Then, in the media access layers MAC02 and MAC06, at the time of reception, access correspondence control on the communication medium is performed using communication information stored in the MAC layer header MACHD in the MAC layer frame MPDU passed from the physical layers PHY02 and PHY06. Do. Specifically, only the MAC layer data / payload MSDU related to the corresponding device 1250, composite module 1460, 1470 or system controller α_1126 is taken out and passed to Internet Protocol Version 6 Layer_IPv6. On the other hand, at the time of transmission, the information passed from the Internet protocol version 6 layer_IPv6 is stored in the MAC layer data / payload MSDU, and the MAC layer frame MPDU to which the MAC layer header MACHD is added is formed on the MAC layer frame MPDU side. hand over.

  Using the erroneous check CRC (FIG. 11 (e)) added to the last position in the MAC layer frame MPDU, it is possible to check whether there is a data error in the MAC layer frame MPDU (or extract the location where the data error has occurred). It becomes. Specifically, a CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Checksum) code is used as the erroneous check CRC in the present embodiment. This is a residual value in binary display when the MAC layer header MACHD and MAC layer data / payload MSDU in the MAC layer frame MPDU in binary display (connection of “1” or “0”) are divided by a predetermined code. Calculated as (remainder). At the time of transmission, the erroneous check CRC calculated by the above method is added to the end position in the MAC layer frame MPDU. Also, the MAC layer header MACHD obtained at the time of reception and the MAC layer data / payload MSDU as a whole are divided by the above code, and the remainder value is compared with the erroneous check CRC obtained at the time of reception. If the two companies agree, it is considered “no error”. If there is an “error”, the error location can be extracted by performing a reverse operation from the erroneous check CRC obtained at the time of reception. Here, the error correction capability (that is, the size of the error correctable area in the entire error correction target data including the erroneous check CRC (here, the entire MAC layer frame MPDU)) is determined by the data size of the erroneous check CRC. Accordingly, when the data size of the erroneous check CRC is fixed, the smaller the overall data size of the error correction target data (MAC layer frame MPDU) including the erroneous check CRC, the higher the relative error correction capability. Data reliability of the MAC layer frame MPDU (when taken into account) is improved.

  Considering the above situation, the present embodiment is characterized in that an erroneous check CRC is arranged at the end position in the MAC layer frame as shown in FIG. As described in Section 2.3 with reference to FIG. 12A, the physical layer header PHYHD contains a lot of information with relatively high robustness. That is, even if some error bits are mixed in the physical layer header PHYHD, it is possible to cope with the error automatically corrected by some means. On the other hand, the data accuracy required for the information in the MAC layer frame MPDU handled by the media access layers MAC02 and MAC06 or higher is very high. Therefore, the reliability of the entire communication information (physical layer frame PPDU) is improved by removing the relatively robust physical layer header PHYHD and adding an error correction function to the entire MAC layer frame to improve the relative error correction capability. There is an effect that can be relatively improved.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 11 (d), an IPv6 header IPv6HD is arranged at the head, and information composed of IPv6 data / payload IPv6DU immediately following is stored in the MAC layer data / payload MSDU. In the Internet protocol version 6 layer IPv6, a pair of the TCP header TCPHD, the communication middleware data APLDT, and the extension data EXDT is stored in the IPv6 data / payload IPv6DU at the time of transmission, and the media access layer MAC02 is added with the IPv6 header IPv6HD. To MAC06. When receiving, after extracting the IPv6 header IPv6HD from the MAC layer data / payload MSDU passed from the media access layers MAC02 and MAC06 and performing the original processing, finally the communication middleware data APLDT and the extension data EXDT (or The communication middleware data APLDT only) is transferred to the communication middleware layers APL02 and APL06.

  The communication middleware data APLDT and the extension data EXDT (or only the communication middleware data APLDT) shown in FIG. 11B are processed in the communication middleware layers APL02 and APL06. Here, regarding various service providing functions using the network communication performed by the communication middleware layers APL02 and APL06, the interfaces in the processors 1230, 1738 and 2030, the device controller 1240 or the communication module 1660 shown in FIG. 10A and FIGS. This is realized by various processes performed by the unit.

Section 2.3 Data structure of Z format in physical layer and media access layer Z format that can be used in physical layer PHY02 and media access layer MAC02 corresponding to network circuit 1782 in the same system (see FIGS. 10A and 16) 12A shows a specific data structure example in the physical header PHYHD and the MAC layer header MACHD. However, the Z-format described below is merely an example used in the system of this embodiment, and other formats corresponding to the network circuit 1782 in the same system may be used. Further, the information communicated on the same system network circuit 1782 is not limited to the hierarchical structure such as the physical layer PHY02 and the media access layer MAC02, and information corresponding to another hierarchical structure is transmitted as information communicated on the network circuit 1782 in the same system. May be used.

  First, the data structure of FIG. 12A (c) is the same as the content of FIG. 11 (a). Then, as shown in FIG. 12A (b), the physical layer header PHYHD includes the synchronization header SYNC arranged in the first 5 bytes and the physical layer data / payload length information LPSDU arranged in 1 byte immediately thereafter. Composed. Therefore, the data size of the physical layer header PHYHD is 6 bytes (5 + 1). The physical layer data / payload length information LPSDU represents the data size of the physical layer data / payload PSDU in FIG. 11F and is set in units of bytes. As already explained at the beginning of section 2.2, the maximum data size of the entire physical layer frame PPDU is set to 127 bytes. Therefore, a value of 121 bytes (127-6) or less is set in the physical layer data / payload length information LPSDU.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 12A (a), the synchronization header SYNC is composed of a 5-byte preamble PRM arranged first, and then a 1-byte physical layer frame start information SFD. Then, [00000000h] (where “h” indicates a hexadecimal value) is set as the preamble PRM. Here, since a direct sequence spread spectrum system is used for signal modulation, a synchronization signal can be obtained from the preamble PRM unit of all “0”. [A7h] is set in the area of the physical layer frame start information SFD. Then, when [A7h] indicated by the hexadecimal value is converted into a binary number display, “10100111” is obtained.

  A method of using the communication information in the physical layer header PHYHD in the communication control unit 1700 or the communication modules 1768 and 1202-3 in the communication module 1660 in FIG. 10A or the communication modules 1202-4 and 2002 in FIGS. explain. The communication information in the physical layer header PHYHD is mainly used for chip synchronization and bit synchronization on the receiving side. That is, the communication module incorporates an oscillator (PLL circuit: Phase Lock Loop Circuit) capable of automatically synchronizing the frequency and phase. This oscillator (PLL circuit) automatically synchronizes the frequency and phase in accordance with the preamble PRM (chip synchronization). Next, for example, the position of the physical layer frame start information SFD is detected by a method such as pattern matching, and (1) it is recognized that the Z-format is used for the physical layer PHY02, and binary bits 1/0 are continuously generated The start bit position of the MAC layer header MACHD is detected (bit synchronization).

  As shown in FIG. 12A (d), the MAC layer header MACHD contains MAC layer frame control information MACNTL in the transmission order from the transmission side to the reception side (the order from the front or the order in which the information is sent out). It consists of areas for storing the MAC layer sequence number MASQNM and address information MADRS.

  In the area of the control information MACNTL of the first MAC layer frame, information for controlling the entire MAC layer frame MPDU (FIG. 11 (f)) is stored in 2 bytes. Information indicating the type of the MAC layer frame MPDU is stored in the first 3 bits as detailed information in the control information MACNTL of the MAC layer frame. Here, as specific types, identification information such as “beacon”, “data”, “ACK (Acknowledgement)” and “command frame type” is stored. The next 1 bit stores security presence / absence information. Further, the next 1 bit stores pending data presence / absence information, and the next 1 bit stores the Acknowledgment message request presence / absence information.

  In the next 1 bit, is the corresponding information communication limited to communication within a PAN (Private Area Network)? Is it communication across multiple PANs? Is stored. As already described with reference to FIG. 1 or FIG. 8A, in the system according to the present embodiment, one PAN may correspond to one system α_1132 or one section 1142. Therefore, the information setting method may be changed depending on which one is to be used. However, when the Z-format is used for information communication within the same domain network line 2082, information corresponding to “communication across multiple PANs” may be stored in this information area. This is because, as shown in FIG. 1, the system of the present embodiment allows a situation in which the distance between the system controller α_1126 and the system controller β_1128 is greatly separated (out of one PAN) in the same domain 2_1122-2. Therefore, in this case, information corresponding to “communication across multiple PANs” is stored in the storage area. On the other hand, when the portable system controller β_1128 is moved close to the system controller α_1126 (when moved to the same PAN), information corresponding to “communication within the PAN” is stored in the storage area. Store.

  The address mode information of each of the reception side and the transmission side is stored in the next 2 bits and the last 2 bits in the control information MACNTL (2 bytes) of the MAC layer frame. Here, as the Z-format, IEEE extended addresses DEXADRS and SEXADRS may be designated, or a shortened address may be designated. As shown in FIG. 12A (e), the system according to the present embodiment is characterized in that IEEE extended addresses DEXADRS and SEXADRS are used on the receiving side and the transmitting side as the address mode information. In the system of the present embodiment, not only network communication is performed via the system controller α_1126 and the communication modules 1202-3 to 6-6 built in the devices 1250-1 to 1250-1 as shown in FIG. 8A, but also as shown in FIG. Network communication is possible through composite modules such as the communication modules 1460-1 to 5 and the drive / communication modules 1470-1 and 2. Therefore, in the system of this embodiment, the communication modules 1202-3 to 4 are used at the level of the media access layer MAC02 using the IEEE extended addresses DEXADRS and SEXADRS for this address mode. Or are the combined modules 1460-1 to 5, 1470-1, 2? (1) High-speed switching of the communication middleware layer APL02 on the receiving side (C-format or other format?) Is made easy (see below using FIG. 12B (e) for details). (2) The effect of facilitating the discovery of an error on the transmitting side (recognition of communication module 1202-3-4? Or combination module 1460-1-5, 1470-1, 2?) Occurs.

  Next, the information storage area of the sequence number MASQNM of the MAC layer whose data size is 1 byte described in FIG. 12A (d) will be described. As described above, in the system of this embodiment, the data size of the entire physical layer frame PPDU is set to 127 bytes or less. Therefore, when the data size of the communication middleware data APLDT and the extension data EXDT (see FIG. 11B) increases, only one physical layer frame PPDU is insufficient for communication (transmission) of this information. In particular, when the A-format or E-format is used as the communication middleware layer APL06, this risk is increased. As a countermeasure, in the system according to the present embodiment, the communication middleware data APLDT and the extended data EXDT are divided into 256 (2 to the 8th power) physical layer frame PPDUs to enable transmission (communication). Specifically, the communication middleware data APLDT and the extension data EXDT are divided into a plurality of pieces and sequentially transmitted (communication) on the network line. In this case, the physical layer header PHYHD and the IPv6 header IPv6HD (and TCP header TCP) shown in FIG. 11A all have the same information content. Then, in accordance with the order of transmission (communication) on the network line, a value (incremented value) obtained by incrementing by 1 starting from “0” is stored in the area of the sequence number MASQNM of the MAC layer. As a result, the divided transmission order of the communication middleware data APLDT and the extension data EXDT is determined, so that there is an effect that information communication can be stably performed even if the reception order of the physical layer frame PPDU is changed due to a network trouble.

  Since the data structure shown in FIG. 12B (c) is exactly the same as FIG. 12A (e), the address information MADRS in the MAC header MACHD will be described with reference to FIG. 12B. In the system of this embodiment shown in FIG. 1, one system α_1132 may be formed by a single PAN (Private Area Network) or a combination of a plurality of PANs. Not limited to this, each section 1142-1 to m in the same system α_1132 may be formed of one or more PANs. As described above, when one system α_1132 is composed of a plurality of PANs, the system controller α_1126 needs to manage the plurality of PANs. Information communication across different PANs is performed within the same system α_1132. In order to cope with this situation, the system controller α_1126 assigns PAN-specific identification information for each PAN, and as shown in FIG. 12B (c), the PAN-specific identification regarding the PAN including the reception side and transmission side nodes. An area for storing information DPANID and SPANID is set in the address information MADRS storage area.

  On the receiving side and the transmitting side, the IEEE extended addresses DEXADRS and SEXADRS are each composed of a storage area for each information of a 1-byte extended IEEE extended address EXEXADRS and an 8-byte IEEE 802.15.4-compliant chip-specific set address ADRSIEE. Here, the IEEE 802.15.4-compliant chip-specific set address ADRSIEE refers to all communication modules 1202-3 to 6 and sensor / communication modules 1460-1 to 5 that conform to the IEEE802.15.4 standard worldwide. Or a unique number assigned in advance to each composite module such as the drive / communication module 1470-1 or 2. And this unique number does not overlap on a global level between different communication modules and composite modules. This unique number is assigned before shipment of the communication modules 1202-3 to 6 and the composite module. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a unique number may be obtained by applying directly to IEEE. When this unique number is issued by IEEE or a predetermined official organization, the unique number issuance organization, in particular, regarding the composite module, the individual performance and function, and the communication information when communicating in the C-format corresponding to it. Obtain information such as type (category and template type used for information communication). Therefore, not only the function and performance of each target composite module can be understood from the information of the set address ADRSIEEE for each chip compliant with IEEE 802.15.4, but the type of communication information using the C-format can be officially predicted. The communication middleware layer APL02 has an effect that the preparation for the corresponding processing in advance can be performed quickly and easily.

  Next, FIG. 12B (e) shows an example of the data structure in the expanded IEEE extension address EXEXADRS (Expanded IEEE Extension Address) in the system of the present embodiment. The first 1 bit of this is an area where module structure information MST can be stored. When this 1 bit is [0], it represents the communication modules 1202-3 to 6-6 built in the system controller α_1126 or in the device 1250-1 to 1250-1. On the other hand, when this bit is [1], it indicates that the corresponding node has a composite module structure. Further, the information stored in the next 1-bit area means composite module structure information CMST. When this bit is [0], the corresponding node indicates a sensor / communication module, and when this bit is [1], the corresponding node indicates a drive / communication module.

Sense information transmitted from a sensor / communication module at a location starts with a binary light level (whether illumination is ON or OFF) and a multi-value light level (corresponds to illuminance), and varies widely such as human feeling and temperature. . Further, as described in Section 1.5 with reference to FIGS. 6A to 6D, the information for controlling the drive / communication module includes a wide variety of information such as ON / OFF binary or multi-value, or remote control information of the device. Yes. For this reason, the system according to the present embodiment provides an area where information identifying the type of the sensor / communication module 1460 and the drive / communication module 1470 corresponding to the node can be recorded as 6-bit composite module type identification information CMTID. On the other hand, in contrast to the method of setting the information CNTID for identifying the type of each of the composite modules 1460 and 1470, the A-format uses the number attribute in the <table> Element as a method of identifying the type of the device 1250 (see FIG. In the E-format, the exchange information type identification information EPC (refer to the description in 2.6 using FIG. 15A (f)) is used. Therefore, this composite module type identification information CMTID may be used as the type identification information 1840 of the exchange information shown in FIG. 10B. As a result, similar to the A-format and E-format, this composite module type identification information CMTID
Makes it easy to interpret the meaning of the data stored in the multi-value / binary transmission data parts CTMDT and CT2DT (described later in section 2.5 using FIG. 14D) compliant with the C-format. There is an effect. Further, by comparing the module structure information MST, the composite module structure information CMST, and the composite module type identification information CMTID with the target node function expected from the per-chip set address ADRSIEEE conforming to IEEE802.15.4, the address information MADRS is read. The effect of improving accuracy and reliability is also born. In other words, if the transmitting side accidentally records other information in the storage area of the module structure information MST, the composite module structure information CMST, and the composite module type identification information CMTID, or the playback information is erroneously recorded during playback on the receiving side. When bit shift (erroneous reproduction) occurs, error detection can be easily performed by the above comparison. (In this case, an alarm notification is sent from the reception side to the transmission side. As an example, [000] is set in the communication access control information 1830 in FIG. 14D, and the multi-value transmission data part CTMDT and binary transmission are set. ([00011] is set together with the data part CT2DT. Details will be described later in section 2.5.)
Section 2.4 Data Structure of Internet Protocol Version 6 Layer In this section 2.4, the data structure in the communication information corresponding to Internet Protocol Version 6 Layer IPv6 will be described with reference to FIG. Here, there is a great feature in that it has an area for storing the IP address information SIPADRS and DIPADRS on the transmitting side and the receiving side described by 16 bytes shown in FIG. 13B. This IP address is set separately for all communication modules and composite modules in the world. The IP addresses set for all communication modules and composite modules in the world do not overlap each other. Therefore, by enabling communication of information including the IPv6 header IPv6HD (FIG. 13 (a)) in the system of the present embodiment, it can be specified from anywhere in the world if it is included in the same domain 2_1122-2 (FIG. 1). This makes it possible to communicate information with other communication modules and specific composite modules.

  In the IPv6 header IPv6HD, the IP packet related information IPPKT is stored in the first 8-byte area shown in FIG. Further, as shown in FIG. 13C, the head information SIPHD, IPv6 data / payload length information LIPv6DU, header type identification information NXHD immediately following the IPv6 header, and passable node remaining number information HPLMT are stored. Are arranged in the aforementioned order. This IPv6 data / payload length information LIPv6DU indicates the data size of the IPv6 data / payload IPv6DU shown in FIG. 11 (d), and the area for storing this information has a size of 2 bytes.

  Next, the header type identification information NXHD immediately following the IPv6 header will be described. As shown in FIG. 11A, various headers are sequentially stored in one physical layer frame PPDU. The header type immediately following the IPv6 header IPv6HD is designated by the header type identification information NXHD immediately following the IPv6 header. Accordingly, in the example described in FIG. 11A, “TCP header TCPHD” is designated as the header type identification information NXHD immediately following the IPv6 header. The header type identification information NXHD immediately following the IPv6 header makes it possible to specify a communication route setting method on the communication network (on the Internet). In the system of this embodiment, the information content stored in the physical layer frame PPDU is not limited to FIG. 11A, and other information may be stored. For example, as another application example, another type of header information may be arranged immediately after the IPv6 header IPv6HD. As a specific example, UDP (User Datagram Protocol) may be used instead of TCP (Transmission Control Protocol) shown in FIG. 13, and the UDP header may be arranged immediately after the IPv6 header IPv6HD. As a further application example, the communication middleware data APLDT may be directly arranged / stored immediately after the IPv6 header IPv6HD. For example, when the E-format is used as the communication middleware data APLDT, the E-format header E-HD is first added to the communication middleware data APLDT as described later in section 2.6 with reference to FIG. Is arranged / stored. Therefore, in this case, information for identifying the “E-format header E-HD” is designated by the header type identification information NXHD immediately following the IPv6 header.

  In information communication between the server n_1116-n and the system controller α_1126 using the network line 1788 outside the system shown in FIG. 10A and information communication between the system controller α_1126 and the system controller β_1128 using the network line 2082 in the same domain, FIG. As described, information is often not directly communicated between the two, and in many cases, information is communicated via a plurality of relay points (relay nodes) in the middle of the network line 1788 outside the system or the network line 2082 in the same domain. The Then, the maximum number of relay points (relay nodes) in the middle of the communication circuit allowed between the transmission side node and the reception side node is a positive value (integer) in which the remaining passable node number information HPLMT in FIG. ). For example, when information communication is performed between the two, the value of the passable node remaining number information HPLMT is first set in the transmission side node. Next, every time this communication information passes (relays) through a relay point (relay node) in the middle of the communication circuit, the value of the passable node remaining number information HPLMT is decremented by “1” (ie, When the relay point (relay node) is passed once, it is updated to the value of the passable node remaining number information HPLMT after passing as a value obtained by subtracting “1” from the value of the passable node remaining number information HPLMT before passing) . Then, when the value of the remaining passable node number information HPLMT becomes “0”, the information communication on the network is canceled. Since the passable node remaining number information HPLMT is described in 1 byte, a maximum of 256 (2 to the 8th power) relay points (relay nodes) can be routed.

However, as the number of relay points (relay nodes) increases, the communication station time (required time for information transmission) from the transmission side to the reception side becomes longer. On the other hand, in the case of urgent information transmission such as “alarm notification”, it is necessary to shorten the communication time. In consideration of the information transfer time at the relay point (relay node), the number of relay points (relay nodes) must be set to 100 or less, preferably 10 or less. Therefore, in the information communication using the external system network line 1788 and the intra-domain network line 2082 in the system of this embodiment, the setting value of the passable node remaining number information HPLMT on the transmission side is set to 100 or less, preferably 10 or less. There is a feature in the place. Of course, the remaining passable node number information HPLMT that is reset (updated) in the relay point (relay node) that is routed in the middle of the network line 1788 outside the system and the network line 2082 in the same domain applied to the system of the present embodiment. The value is also 100 or less, preferably 10 or less. When the value of the remaining passable node number information HPLMT becomes small in this way, the router arranged at the relay point (relay node) in the middle of the network line 1788 outside the system and the network line 2082 within the same domain automatically reaches the receiving side node. Search for the shortest route to prevent information communication from being interrupted. As a result, the time required for communication between the server n_1116-n and the system controller α_1126 or between the system controller α_1126 and the system controller β_1128 can be shortened, and it is possible to quickly communicate information that is urgent, such as “alarm notification”. Yes.

On the other hand, as an information communication form using the same system network line 1782 in the system of this embodiment, information communication between the system controller α_1126 and the composite modules 1460 and 1470 shown in FIG. 10A and between the system controller α_1126 and the device 1260 shown in FIG. Information communication is possible. As shown in FIG. 1, when a plurality of sections 1142 constitute one system and, for example, a different PAN (Personal Area Network) is used for each section 1142, network communication over a plurality of PANs is necessary. In this case, an information transfer process at a relay point (relay node) is necessary every time communication information exceeds a different adjacent PAN. Therefore, in the system according to the present embodiment, it is necessary to define an upper limit value of a relay point (relay node) to be relayed between the transmission side node and the reception side node even in information communication using the same system network line 1782. As shown in FIG. 5, the composite module used in the system of the present embodiment is supplied with power from a built-in power storage module (battery) 1554. Each time the communication information is transferred as a relay point (relay node), the power stored in the power storage module (battery) 1554 is consumed. Therefore, in information communication using the network line 1782 within the same system, it is necessary to reduce the number of communication information transfers at the relay point (relay node) as much as possible. Here, considering the relationship between the amount of power consumed for one transfer of communication information and the amount of electricity stored in the electricity storage module (battery) 1554, the number of intermediate relay points (relay nodes) is 30 or less, preferably 10 or less. It is appropriate to set to. Therefore, the network line 1782 in the same system in the system of this embodiment.
When performing information communication above, there is a significant feature in that the value of the passable node remaining number information HPLMT is set to 30 or less, preferably 10 or less in the transmitting side node. Thereby, unnecessary waste of the amount of power stored in the power storage module 1554 built in the composite module can be prevented, and network communication within the system of the present embodiment can be stably maintained over a long period of time.

  As shown in FIG. 13D, the area of the head information SIPHD in the IPv6 header IPv6HD is composed of areas in which the version information IPVRS, the communication class information IPCLS, and the communication type label information IPLBL are stored. Arranged in the above order. Here, the area in which the version information IPVRS is stored is composed of 4 bits, and stores a value of “6” (“0110” in binary description) as the Internet protocol version number.

  The communication type label information IPLBL is stored in an area configured with 2.5 bytes, which is set immediately before the area in which the IPv6 data / payload length information LIPv6DU is stored. If the data size of the communication middleware data APLDT and the extended data EXDT (FIG. 11 (b)) increases, the data is divided and distributed (stored) in a plurality of physical layer frames PPDU. The method of communication was explained in section 2.3. At this time, the method of storing the sequentially incremented value in the area of the MAC layer sequence number MASQNM in the MAC layer header MACHD has been described so that the transmission order between the plurality of physical layer frames PPDU can be understood. In parallel with this, the system of this embodiment identifies the same communication middleware data APLDT (and extension data EXDT) as a whole when distributed and stored in a plurality of different IPv6 data / payload IPv6DUs (see FIG. 11D). In order to do so, the above-described communication type label information IPLBL is used. At this point, the content of the communication type label information IPLBL is set first (before network communication) in the transmission side node. Accordingly, when communication middleware data APLDT (and extension data EXDT) related to the same service provision is collectively distributed (stored) in a plurality of IPv6 data / payload IPv6DUs and communicated. Are communicated with the same label information stored in common in the storage area of all corresponding communication type label information IPLBL. In the system of this embodiment, information communication between the server n_1116-n and the system controller α_1126 using the external network line 1788 shown in FIG. 10A and the system controller α_1126 using the same system network line 1782 shown in FIG. Information communication between 1250 and information communication between system controller α_1126 and system controller β_1128 using network line 2082 in the same domain is possible. Then, by changing the content of “communication type label information IPLBL” for each communication middleware data APLDT (and extension data EXDT) related to different service provisions, a plurality of communication middleware data APLDT (and extension data EXDT) relating to a plurality of different service provisions are obtained. At the same time, the effect of enabling communication between the two is born. As a result, a plurality of different information provision services can be simultaneously performed between the server n_1116-n and the system controller α_1126 (or between the system controller α_1126 and the device 1250, or between the system controller α_1126 and the system controller β_1128). Service can be provided simultaneously. Further, by combining this “communication type label information IPLBL” with the information of the MAC layer sequence number MASQNM in the MAC layer header MACHD described above, another effect of further improving the reliability confirmation accuracy of the communication information at the time of reception is obtained. to be born. As another application example, the same information stored in the “communication type label information IPLBL” for the communication middleware data APLDT (and extension data EXDT) related to the same service provision is used as the “encryption key”. You may do it.

The communication class information IPCLS described in FIG. 13D is used to indicate a communication class during network communication. In particular, it is assumed that this communication class information IPCLS is mainly used in an upper layer (that is, communication middleware layer APL02, APL06, or extended application layer EXL06) than Internet protocol version 6 layer IPv6 in FIG. 10A. The extended IEEE extended address EXEXADRS has already been described in Section 2.3 with reference to FIGS. 12B (d) and 12 (e). And as an application example of this embodiment system,
○ The storage area of the IEEE extended addresses DEXADRS and SEXADRS on the receiving side and the transmitting side is abolished. ○ The storage areas of the IEEE extended addresses DEXADRS and SEXADRS on the receiving side and the transmitting side are respectively IEEE 802.15. Only the information of the 4-compliant per-chip setting address ADRSIEE is stored (that is, the IEEE extended addresses DEXADRS and SEXADRS on the receiving side and the transmitting side are made to match the IEEE 802.15.4-compliant per-chip setting address ADRSIEE, respectively).
Store the information of the IEEE 802.15.4 compliant set address ADRSIEEE in the storage area of the communication class information IPCLS (that is, the communication class information IPCLS is set to the IEEE 802.15.4 compliant set address of each chip). Match with ADRSIEEEE)
May be performed.

  As already described with reference to FIG. 10A in section 2.2, the function of the Internet protocol version 6 layer IPv6 is performed by the communication control unit 1700 in the communication module 1768, 1203-3 or the communication module 1660. The service providing functions corresponding to the communication middleware layers APL02 and APL06 and the extended application layer EXL06 are performed by the processors 1738 and 1230 or the interface unit 1710 in the communication module 1660. Therefore, information before the TCP header TCPHD including the IPv6 header IPv6HD in FIG. 11 is processed in the communication control unit 1700 in the communication module 1768, 1202-3 or the communication module 1660. Similarly, the communication middleware data APLDT (and extension data EXDT) is processed in the processor 1738, 1230 or the interface unit 1710 in the communication module 1660. When the physical layer frame PPDU is received, the communication class information IPCLS is first processed in the communication control unit 1700 in the communication module 1768, 1202-3 or the communication module 1660, and then the communication middleware data APLDT (and the extension data) are processed. EXDT) is delivered to the processor 1738, 1230 or the interface unit 1710 in the communication module 1660. Therefore, before the communication middleware data APLDT (and the extension data EXDT) is received by storing the extended IEEE extension address EXEXADRS described in FIGS. In addition, it becomes possible to prepare for the combined module in advance in the processors 1738, 1230 or the communication module 1660. This produces an effect of improving the processing speed of the system controller α_1126 for communication information transmitted from the composite module.

Section 2.5 Data structure of C-format in communication middleware layer “C-format” used in the system of the present embodiment is the same as the network line 1782 in the same system described with reference to FIG. 10A in section 2.1. The main purpose is to use the communication middleware layer APL02 in which information is communicated to the composite modules 1460 and 1470. Not limited to this, as described at the end of section 2.1, this C-format may be used for information communication between the system controller β_1128 in the different system β_1134 and the communication modules 1460 and 1470 in the system α_1132. good. Further, it may be used for information communication with the device 1250. Here, in this C-format, the extended application layer EXL06 (see FIG. 10A) is not defined, and is used only in the communication middleware layer APL02.

  In order to reduce the processing load on the communication modules 1460 and 1470 as much as possible, the data structure of the C-format is characterized by being simplified as much as possible. As a specific method for simplifying the data structure, the data structure avoids the duplication of information in the area from the physical layer header PHYHD to the TCP header TCPHD in FIG. (Details and effects will be described later.) As a specific example, instead of having the communication middleware data APLDT size information in the communication middleware data APLDT, IPv6 data / payload length information LIPv6DU in the IPv6 header IPv6HD Is also used. Here, the IPv6 data / payload length information LIPv6DU indicates the data size of the IPv6 data / payload IPv6DU in FIG. Since the data size of the TCP header TCPHD is determined in advance, the data size of the communication middleware data APLDT is automatically determined from the IPv6 data / payload length information LIPv6DU as shown in FIGS. The basic data size of communication middleware data APLDT in the C-format is defined as 1 byte. However, depending on the contents of the communication information between the composite modules 1460 and 1470, the extension transmission data CEDT is added to the last part as shown in FIG. It may be expanded.

  As already described in section 2.1 with reference to FIG. 10B, in the A-format or E-format, exchange access control information 1830 is included in exchange information (table) 1810 used for information communication. The exchange access control information 1830 can be stored in the “3-bit format” even in the C-format. In particular, by describing in 3 bits (= 8 types of control information is described), there is an effect that various exchange access control information 1830 can be identified. As a specific control method, when the command (command issuance) 1852 described in case 1 of FIG. When a result report (status) 1854 is returned, a response response of [010] or a report notification or an acknowledgment notification of [001] is set as the exchange access control information 1830.

  In the system of the present embodiment, a threshold value (reference level when converting to a binary signal) is set from the outside when the signal detected by the sensor in the sensor / communication module 1460 is converted into binary information for information communication. It is possible. When this threshold value is set, a threshold level setting instruction of [110] is set as the exchange access control information 1830 corresponding to the command (command issue) 1852 in case 1 of FIG. 10B.

  On the other hand, a response (data) request of [011] is set as the exchange access control information 1830 corresponding to the reply request (request) 1872 of case 2 in FIG. 10B. In response 1874, [010] response reply / report notification is set as the exchange access control information 1830.

  Further, in response to the periodic / non-periodic report 1894 voluntarily performed from the combination module 1460, 1470 side of case 3 in FIG. 10B, the response answer / report notification of [010] is set as the exchange access control information 1830. . If an abnormality is found in the combination module 1460, 1470, [000] is set in the exchange access control information 1830 as the above-mentioned non-periodic report and an alarm notification is made. In addition, when performing periodic reporting independently from the combination module 1460, 1470 side, a time interval (interval) for regular reporting from the system controller α_1126 side can be set. In this case, [101] is set in the exchange access control information 1830 and an instruction regarding the report interval is given.

  For example, as a smart meter 1124 in FIG. 8A, consider a case in which, for example, the amount of power used (public consumption material) is reported to the system controller α_1126, the server n_1116-n, or the wholesaler A_1102 at the specified time interval (interval). In this case, there are a method of reporting an instantaneous value of instantaneous power consumption (public consumption material) and a method of reporting a value integrated every predetermined period. In response to this situation, the system according to this embodiment sets [100] in the exchange access control information 1830 and gives an instruction regarding the data accumulation interval. Here, when [00000] is designated as the area for storing the transmission data set immediately after the storage area of the exchange access control information 1830, the instantaneous usage amount (use of public consumption materials such as electric energy) Amount) is reported from the compound module at specified time intervals.

  As shown in FIG. 14D, the storage area of the multi-value transmission data part CTMDT configured with 4 bits set immediately after the storage area of the exchange access control information 1830 and the binary transmission configured with 1 bit. Depending on the storage area of the data part CT2DT, binary or multivalued transmission data is transmitted. Here, the transmission data does not have a special information storage area indicating either binary or multi-value, and is characterized in that binary / multi-value identification is performed by the transmission data. That is, when the transmission data is binary, all the values of the 4-bit multi-value transmission data part CTMDT are set to “0” (that is, [0000]). When the ON state or the OK state is indicated here, [1] is set in the binary transmission data portion CT2DT. When indicating an OFF state or an NG (No) state, [0] is set in the binary transmission data portion CT2DT. On the other hand, a description will be given of a transmission data setting method in the case where an abnormal situation occurs in the composite modules 1460 and 1470 and an alarm is notified to the system controller α_1126 ([000] is set in the exchange access control information 1830). In this case, [0000] is set in the multi-value transmission data part CTMDT. If the abnormal state of the combined modules 1460 and 1470 is a sensor detection abnormality or a drive unit drive system abnormality (uncontrollable / difficult control), [1] is set in the binary transmission data part CT2DT. As shown in FIG. 5, since the power storage module (battery) 1554 is built in the sensor / communication module 1460 or the drive / communication module, there is always a risk of depletion of the power storage amount (out of remaining amount). Accordingly, when the remaining amount in the power storage module (battery) 1554 decreases, [0] is set in the binary transmission data portion CT2DT to notify the system controller α_1126 of a decrease in the remaining battery amount.

  On the other hand, when information communication is performed using multi-value transmission data, the multi-value is expressed by a 5-bit signal including the multi-value transmission data portion CTMDT and the binary transmission data portion CT2DT. For example, when multi-value information from 0% to 100% is stored as transmission data, the multi-value from 0% to 100% is converted into a value divided into 30 and [00010] (corresponding to 0%) to [11111]. ] (Corresponding to 100%). However, the present embodiment system is not limited to this, and the multi-value information may be expressed by other methods by combining the multi-value transmission data part CTMDT and the binary transmission data part CT2DT. Also, for example, in the case of high-precision sense information communication or threshold or control value high-precision setting, which is insufficiently expressed with 30-divided values such as detection of temperature and humidity, and illumination intensity change of lighting equipment, the binary transmission data section CT2DT The area for storing the extended transmission data CEDT can be added immediately after the area for storing the multi-value information. Further, the number of bits used for multi-value expression at this time is indicated based on the IPv6 data / payload length information LIPv6DU in the IPv6 header IPv6HD as described above.

  As described above, the binary / multi-level identification is not performed with the binary / multi-level identifier in particular, and the data size of the communication middleware data APLDT can be reduced. As a result, information communication congestion (congestion) on the network line 1782 in the same system is alleviated, and processing in the combination modules 1460 and 1470 (particularly in the interface unit 1710 shown in FIG. 10A) is simplified and combined. The price of the modules 1460 and 1470 can be reduced.

Also, information indicating the meaning of transmission data expressed in multiple values does not have an area to be stored in the communication middleware data APLDT conforming to the C-format. Instead, as information indicating the meaning of the transmission data expressed in multiple values, the information of the setting address ADRSIEE per chip compliant with IEEE802.15.4 in FIG. 12B (d) is used. There are features. As already described in section 2.3, the issuing organization of this IEEE 802.15.4-compliant chip-specific set address ADRSIEE knows the functions and performance of the composite modules 1460 and 1470 corresponding to the address. By disclosing this information on the Internet, the meaning of the transmission data corresponding to the composite module corresponding to the setting address ADRSIEE for each chip compliant with IEEE 802.15.4 can be understood. Further, from the description in Section 2.3 using FIG. 12B (e) and the description in Section 2.4 using FIG. 13 (d), the IEEE extended addresses DEXADRS on the receiving side and transmitting side in the MAC layer header MACHD. The compound module type identification information CMTID can be stored in the SEXADRS or in the communication class information IPCLS in the IPv6 header IPv6HD. Therefore, by combining the above-described IEEE 802.15.4-compliant chip-specific setting address ADRSIEE and the composite module type identification information CMTID, transmission is performed between the composite modules 1460 and 1470 (for example, expressed in multiple values). Can understand the meaning of data CTMDT, CT2DT, CEDT and how to interpret them with high accuracy. Thus, since it can be used for the meaning and interpretation of the transmission data CMTDT, CT2DT, CEDT, the above-mentioned composite module type identification information CMTID is the exchange information type identification information 1840 corresponding to each composite module 1460, 1470 (see FIG. 10B). Related to. That is, the composite module type identification information CMTID can be used for the same purpose as the number attribute in the <table> Element in the A-format described later in Section 2.7 (see FIG. 15B (b)). On the other hand, the type identification information 1840 of the exchange information corresponds to the type identification information EPC of the exchange information (see the description in section 2.6 using FIG. 15A (f)) in the E-format. As described above, in both the E-format and the A-format, the exchange identification type identification information 1840 of FIG. 10B is included in the communication middleware data APLDT.

  In the C-format as compared with the E-format and A-format, information in the MAC layer header MACHD (composite module type identification in FIG. 12B (e)) is obtained as information related to the type identification information 1840 in the exchange information in FIG. 10B. Information CMTID) or information in the IPv6 header IPv6HD (FIG. 13 (d) information in the communication class information according to the explanation in section 2.4) has a great feature. As already described in section 2.2, at the time of reception, communication information is processed in order from the layer located on the lower layer side in FIG. 10A. Therefore, whether the target node is the sensor / communication module 1460 at the function level of the media access layer MAC02 or the function level of the Internet protocol version 6 layer IPv6 that is relatively located on the lower layer side? Or drive / communication module 1470? If the type of the composite module is known in advance as well as the identification of the communication module, before the communication middleware data APLDT is transferred from the communication control unit 1700 in the communication module 1660 (shown in FIG. 10A) to the interface unit 1710, the interface unit The effect of being able to prepare for the C-format within 1710 is born. As a result, communication information processing on the receiving side can be speeded up.

  As described above, in the C-format, the information defined in other layers is shared and the data size of the communication middleware data APLDT is minimized. This alleviates information communication congestion (congestion) on the same system network line 1782, simplifies the processing in the composite modules 1460 and 1470 (particularly in the interface unit 1710 shown in FIG. 10A), and the composite module 1460, The price of 1470 can be reduced.

  Next, specific data examples of the communication middleware data APLDT in the C-format according to the method described above will be shown. For example, when an “operation stop” command (command issuance) 1852 (FIG. 10B) is issued from the system controller α_1126 to the drive / communication module 1470, “[111] reset instruction” is set in the communication access control information 1830. Then, “[0000] binary data designation” is set in the multi-value transmission data portion CTMDT, and “[0] OFF designation” is set in the binary transmission data portion CT2DT. When the sensor / communication module 1460 notifies (reports), for example, a situation where the used amount of public consumption materials up to now is 50% to the system controller α_1126, a “[010] report notification is sent to the communication access control information 1830. "[10001] 50%" is set in the 5-bit area in which the multi-value transmission data portion CTMDT and the binary transmission data portion CT2DT are combined.

Another specific data example will be shown. As described later in Section 4.3,
○ For large adults with thick fingers, stable user input is possible even if the sensitivity of the touchpad and capacitive buttons is low,
○ Children and women with thin fingers may not respond unless the sensitivity of the touchpad or capacitive button is increased. Correspondingly, after estimating / determining the user state (finger thickness) according to section 4.3, the sensitivity is set from the system controller α_1126 for the sensor / communication module 1460 corresponding to the touch pad or the capacitive button. An example is shown. In this case, “[110] threshold level setting instruction” is set in the communication access control information 1830. Consider a case where the sensitivity of a touch pad or a capacitive button is increased from 25% to 73%. Then, [11000] corresponding to 73% is designated in a 5-bit area in which the multi-value transmission data part CTMDT and the binary transmission data part CT2DT are combined.

In the above embodiment, the communication timing of binary information such as ON / OFF is divided from the communication timing of multi-value information such as status setting, and whether or not the information set in the multi-value transmission data part CTMDT is [0000]. Is the communication information binary? Is it multi-valued? Let me identify. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as another embodiment, binary data such as ON / OFF and multi-value data such as status setting may be communicated together at the same timing. In this case, a 1-bit binary value may be set in the binary transmission data part CT2DT, and a multi-value may be set with 4 bits in the multi-value transmission data part CTMDT. In this way, the system can communicate binary data and multi-value data such as status settings together at the same time, such as “designate a status setting value (for example, set temperature) at the same time as starting operation”. The frequency of information communication between the controller α_1126 and the composite modules 1460 and 1470 is lowered, and an effect of reducing communication congestion in the same-system network line 1782 (FIG. 10A) is produced.

  It has already been described that communication accuracy and communication stability can be improved by combining the IEEE 802.15.4-compliant chip-specific setting address ADRSIEEE and the composite module type identification information CMTID. In the unlikely event that an error occurs in the system controller α_1126 and the functions of the combination modules 1460 and 1470 of the communication partner are mistaken, this error can be found by comparing the information between the two. If an error in the system controller α_1126 is found on the combination module 1460, 1470 side, the system according to the present embodiment supports a function that can notify the system controller α_1126 of the error from the combination module 1460, 1470. In this case, “[000] alarm notification” is set in the communication access control information 1830 in FIG. Then, [00011] is set in a 5-bit area in which the next multi-value transmission data part CTMDT and binary transmission data part CT2DT are combined to notify the target misrecognition notification. As described above, the system according to the present embodiment supports the function of notifying the error generated in the system controller α_1126 from the composite modules 1460 and 1470 or the device 1250, and thus the stability and reliability of information communication on the network line 1782 in the same system. Has the effect of improving.

Section 2.6 E-Format Data Structure in Communication Middleware Layer “E-Format” used in the system of the present embodiment is mainly the device 1250 or the like as described in Section 2.1 with reference to FIG. It is intended to be used in the communication middleware layer APL06 in which information is communicated to the server n_1116-n. In addition, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be used for information communication between different system controllers α_1126 and β_1128, and may be used for information communication with the combination modules 1460 and 1470. As already described in Section 2.1 with reference to FIG. 10B, in the E-format, information communication is basically performed by exchanging exchange information (table) 1810 between the transmission side node and the reception side node. Accordingly, this exchange information (table) 1810 (or a part thereof) is stored in the IPv6 data / payload IPv6DU as a part in the communication middleware data APLDT shown in FIG. As described later in section 2.7, the A-format has a feature described in a broad text format. In comparison, the E-format has a feature of storing the correspondence information in a predetermined area set in advance as a setting code. Accordingly, the E-format is defined as a format in which “setting code is stored in a predetermined area in the area of communication middleware data APLDT”. Therefore, in the system of the present embodiment, any format for sequentially storing setting codes in a predetermined area set in advance is included in the E-format.

  At the head of the communication middleware layer data APLDT based on the E-format, an E-format header E-HD shown in FIG. 15A (b) is stored in the 2-byte area. The value of the E-format header E-HD is set to [1081h] (“h” indicates a hexadecimal value (hexadecimal) and [0001000010000001] in binary display). In the next 2-byte area, identification information TID for associating between request transmission and response reception is stored. The identification information TID for associating between request transmission and response reception is the association between the response request (request) transmitted in advance by the response request (request) transmission side when the response (response) is received and the received response (response). It means the parameter to plan. (The sequence of the response (response) 1874 to this response request (request) 1872 corresponds to the sequence shown in case 2 of FIG. 10B.) The code stored in this area is the response request (request) transmission side node. Can be arbitrarily specified. Next, when the receiving node of the answer request (request) makes a response (response), the same code as the code set by the previous answer request (request) transmitting node is stored in this area. Then, it is determined whether or not the received information indicates a response (response) of the previous response request (request) based on the matching degree determination of the identification information TID for association between the request transmission and the response reception.

  The E-format data E-DT stored in the next area shown in FIG. 15A (b) corresponds to the exchange information 1810 described in section 2.1 with reference to FIG. 10B. Then, as shown in FIG. 15A (c), the E-format data E-DT includes 3 bytes of transmitting device identification information SEOJ, 3 bytes of receiving device identification information DEOJ, 1 byte of communication access control information ESV. The control / processing related information CM1 is arranged in the order described above. Here, the one-byte communication access control information ESV corresponds to the communication access control information 1830 described in section 2.1 with reference to FIG. 10B.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 15A (d), both the transmission-side device identification information SEOJ and the reception-side device identification information DEOJ are both 1-byte device type group code DTGC, 1-byte device type code DTC, and 1-byte same type. The internal device identification code DIDC is configured and arranged in the order described above. This device type group code DTGC represents a device type group. For example, which group includes a sensor related device group, an air conditioning related device group, a housing / facility related device group, a cooking / housework related device group, etc. Show. The next device type code DTC represents a device type such as a television or an air conditioner. When a plurality of different devices 1250 corresponding to the same device type are installed in the same system α_1132 (for example, when a plurality of air conditioners are installed in one house), identification for each device 1250 is performed. In order to do this, the same-type device identification code DIDC is set.

  When an air conditioner is considered as an example of the device 1250, there are setting states regarding a plurality of items such as “setting temperature”, “setting air volume”, “setting air direction”, “setting timer time (automatic ON / automatic OFF)”. The setting change (state change control) can be performed simultaneously on a plurality of items. Accordingly, in the exchange information (table) 1810 shown in FIG. 10B, even for a single device, “status related to multiple items” or “simultaneous setting change instruction (status change control information) related to multiple items” is defined. Information can be described in the form of a list. Therefore, in the control / processing related information of FIG. 15A (c), as shown in FIG. 15A (e), it is possible to perform state change control corresponding to the collection of state information and the setting change for a plurality of items at the same time. The number of items of state information to be collected at the same time or the number of items for which state change control (setting change) is performed at the same time is described in 1 byte in the control / processing number NCM. Then, the control / processing information CM-1 to n for the nth time from the first time are arranged in the order as many as the number of items set in the control / processing number NCM.

  Each control / processing information CM-1 to CM-n is composed of 1-byte exchange information type identification information EPC, 1-byte individual exchange information data size PDC, and individual exchange information EDT, as shown in FIG. 15A (f). And are arranged in the order described above. “Status information to be collected”, “status information to be answered”, or “status change (setting change) control information” stored for each item corresponding to each device 1250 is stored as the individual exchange information EDT described above. . Data size information for each individual exchange information EDT is stored as a data size PDC of the individual exchange information.

  Depending on the type of the corresponding device 1250 (that is, based on the content of the device type code DTC described above), the item content indicating the state and the item content of the state change control (setting change) target are different. Therefore, in the E-format, for each type of the corresponding device 1250 (the content of the device type code DTC), an item of information to be collected and an information expression format, or an item of state change control (setting change) and an expression of control information A format is determined in advance, and a template and an item code (template code) according to the expression format for each item are prepared in advance. The item code set for each corresponding device 1250 type (the content of the device type code DTC) is stored as the type identification information EPC of the exchange information. The exchange information type identification information EPC corresponds to the exchange information type identification information 1840 shown in FIG. 10B.

Here, taking the case of changing the setting of the home air conditioner (state change control) as controlled by the system controller α_1126, information in the E-format data E-DT corresponding to the exchange information (table) 1810 will be described. . At this point, a command (command issuance) for setting change (state change control) in E-format corresponds to the “write request” described in section 2.1. Accordingly, [60h] (= no response required) or [61h] (= response required) is set as the communication access control information ESV (1830) in FIG. 15A (c). (For reference, the setting code of the communication access control information ESV (1830) corresponds to [62h] at “read request”, [73h] at “notify”, and [72h] at “read response”. The household air conditioner device type group code DTGC corresponds to [01h], which means an air conditioning related device group. The device type code DTC is [30h]. Here, the same machine type device identification code DIDC assigned to the first air conditioner in the system α_1132 is [01h]. Therefore, when the system controller α_1126 issues a state change control command 1852 to the home air conditioner (corresponding to case 1 in FIG. 10B), the identification information of the receiving device in FIG. 15A (c) is [013001h]. . When the system controller α_1126 controls the corresponding air conditioner to change to an operating state, the exchange information type identification information EPC is [80h], the data size of the individual exchange information is [01h] (= 1 byte), individual The exchange information EDT is [30h]. Therefore, the initial control / processing information CM-1 combining these pieces of information can be expressed by [800130h]. Next, when the set temperature is changed to 26 ° C. as the control / processing for nth, the type identification information EPC of the exchange information is [B3h], and the data size of the individual exchange information is [01h] (= 1 byte). The individual exchange information EDT is [1Ah] which means 26 ° C. Therefore, the n-th control / processing information CM-n obtained by combining these pieces of information is expressed as [B3011A].

Section 2.7 A-format data structure in the communication middleware layer The “A-format” used in the system of this embodiment is mainly the device 1250 or the like as described in section 2.1 with reference to FIG. It is intended to be used in the communication middleware layer APL06 in which information is communicated to the server n_1116-n. In addition, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be used for information communication between different system controllers α_1126 and β_1128, and may be used for information communication with the combination modules 1460 and 1470. As already described in Section 2.1 with reference to FIG. 10B, in the A-format, information communication is basically performed by exchanging exchange information (table) 1810 between the transmission side node and the reception side node. Accordingly, this exchange information (table) 1810 (or a part thereof) is stored in the IPv6 data / payload IPv6DU as a part in the communication middleware data APLDT shown in FIG.

In the A-format, as shown in FIG. 15B, communication middleware data APLDT may be described in an XML (Extensible Markup Language) format. In the present specification, a method for describing contents on a text basis such as XML or HTML (Hypertext Markup Language) is referred to as a “broadly defined text format”. For example, in HTML, a tag is always described in a description sentence. However, in the “broad sense text format” referred to here, the above tag description is not necessarily required, and any text format description in a broad sense is included in the “broad sense text format”. Therefore, for example, a Java applet, a Java script, or a program such as C language is also included in the broad text format. Thus, by describing the communication middleware data APLDT in a broad text format, there is an effect of ensuring versatility and expandability as the communication middleware data APLDT. Therefore, the A-format in the system of this embodiment is defined as “a format described in a broad text format as communication information related to the communication middleware layer APL”. Any format described in the broad text format is included in the A-format. The exchange information (table) 1810 configured in the table format of FIG. 10B corresponds to the “<table> Element region” (range from <table −> to </ table>) in FIG. 15B (b). good.

  In the A-format, <tdl> Element which is a Root Element may be set as a parent element (Parent Element) of the <table> Element. (Here, <tdl> means transferring data language.) Also, as described in FIG. 15B (b), date attribute (date attribute) is used as attribute information (Attribute) of the <tdl> Element. ) May describe the creation date of the corresponding table. Here, in the description of FIG. 15B (b), the creation date of the corresponding table is “December 25, 2014”.

  As shown in FIG. 15B (b), the number attribute (number attribute) or name attribute (name attribute) in the <table> Element corresponds to the type identification information 1840 of the exchange information shown in FIG. 10B. In the communication middleware data APLDT described in the A-format, the location corresponding to the device type group code DTGC and the device type code DTC is displayed as shown in the E-format described in section 2.6. There is no. Instead, a table template that preliminarily defines information items to be collected in the state of the device 1250 and an information expression format, or items to be changed in the state of the device 1250 (setting change) and an expression format of the control information, Detailed settings are made for each corresponding device type. A table number and a table name are designated for each template of the table set finely for each device type. As an example of this, as described in “number =“ 02 ”” in FIG. 15B (b), the template number of the corresponding table may be directly specified by the numerical value specified by the number attribute. Therefore, by describing the number attribute or name attribute in the corresponding <table> Element, it is possible to automatically describe in the communication middleware data APLDT in accordance with the table template. In addition, in the system according to the present embodiment, other description sentences may be associated with the above-described exchange information type identification information 1840 that can be used for selecting a standard template used in the information exchange table. Similarly to the method of associating the template of the table according to the type of the device 1250 by specifying a numerical value with the number attribute, the standard template call for information exchange according to the type of the composite module 1460, 1470 is called in FIG. The composite module type identification information CMTID in e) may be used (see section 2.5 for details).

  In FIG. 15B (b) as an example of communication information description in the communication middleware data APLDT conforming to the A-format, the power consumption periodically accumulated in the smart meter 1124 in FIG. "Shows an example of a description to be notified to the service provider B_1111-2 (the server n_1116-n) that provides the power supply service. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, since the smart meter 1124 is connected to the system controller α_1126 and the wholesaler A1102, the communication information may be communicated to the system controller α_1126 and the wholesaler A1102. . On the other hand, since the voltage value to be supplied is determined in advance depending on the place where the smart meter 1124 is installed (that is, corresponding to a general household, building, or factory), the integrated current value is notified instead of the integrated electric energy. . The information described in “broad text format” may be used for information communication with any device 1250 or any composite module 1460, 1470, not limited to the description example of FIG. 15B (b).

As an example of the integrated current value notification shown in FIG. 15B (b), the A-format uses a standard table (table template) in which “table number is 2” and table template name is “Device Nameplate Table”. You may do it. In A-format, Table may be abbreviated as “TBL”. Therefore, "number =" 02 "" is described as the number attribute in <table> Element, and "name =" DEVICE_NAMEPLATE_TB "is specified as the name attribute.
L ”.

As already explained in section 1.7, smart meter 1124 types are not limited to “electric power consumption”, but various types such as “gas usage”, “clean water usage” and “sewage discharge”. There is a smart meter 1124 that notifies the usage status of each public consumer material. On the other hand, in the description example of FIG. 15B (b), “type =“ E_ELECTRIC_DEVICE_RCD ”” is described in the type attribute in the sense of “measuring the amount of electricity used”. By the way, the above-mentioned “RCD” means a Record of packedRecord. As already described in section 2.2, the communication middleware layer data APDLT (part of) described in FIG. 15B (b) is packed in the MAC layer data / payload MSDU and communicated. Therefore, the expression “packedRecord” is used in the sense of “packing (part of) the communication middleware layer data APDLT and recording in the physical layer frame PPDU for communication”. Therefore, the number attribute in the <packedRecord> Element also uses the same word as above and uses “name =" E_ELECTRIC_DEVICE_
RCD "" is described.

  In the description in section 2.1 using FIG. 10B, the exchange access control information 1830 is included in the exchange information (table) 1810 for both the A-format and the E-format described in section 2.6. showed that. This communication access control information 1830 is made to correspond to the accessibility attribute in <table> Element or <set> Element described later. Any one of READWRITE, READONLY, and WRITEONLY can be requested from the receiving node by this accessibility attribute. Here, READ means an instruction to read the status of the receiving side node (for example, the device 1250 or the composite module 1460, 1470) and to reply the read information (or to notify the sense information). To “read request”. WRITE means an information response or status change setting instruction to the receiving node, and corresponds to “notification”, “read response”, or “write request” in E-format. READWRITE is used when instructing the receiving side node to correspond to the sequence of response request (request) 1872 / response (response) 1874 in case 2 of FIG. 10B. In addition, in the system according to the present embodiment, other description sentences may be associated with the communication access control information 1830. In the example of FIG. 15B (b), information on the “integrated current value (Ampere)” measured by the smart meter 1124 is notified to the receiving side node (for example, the server n — 1116-n, the controller α — 1126, or the wholesaler A 1102). "WRITEONLY" is specified.

  The element in the embodiment shown in FIG. 15B (b) indicates “individual items such as sense target information, detection target state information or control (setting change) target state information”. Yes. Therefore, it is specified in advance in the template of the table selected in accordance with the information content (information content specified by number attribute or name attribute in <table> Element) specified by the type identification information 1840 of the exchange information in FIG. 10B. Each item is set and described in an individual <element> Element.

Among the table templates pre-set with “table number 2”, the table template specified by “type =“ E_ELECTRIC_DEVICE_RCD ”” is the individual specified in the <packedRecord> Element As items, “E_KH” (periodically accumulated energy), “E_KT” (test pulse output amount), “E_INPUT_SCALAR” (the unit of communication information is specified, and the value input from the sensor is set to “how many minutes” "E_ELEMENT" (smart meter local number), "E_VOLTS" (instantaneous voltage value / voltage fluctuation in the power transmission system can be monitored in real time) and "E_AMPS" (periodic) The current value accumulated in step 1) is prepared in advance. In the description example shown in FIG. 15B (b), only “E_KH” and “E_AMPS” are defined using <element> Element.

  First, the <element> Element in which “E_KH” is specified in the name attribute declares that “notification of the amount of power that this communication information is accumulated periodically” is sent. According to the standard, only the information <element name = "E_KH"> can be used to understand what "E_KH" means. However, <description> Element is set so that the contents of the exchange information (table) 1810 can be understood without referring to the standard. As described above, the A-format also has a feature in the A-format that can be described in a broad text format having “a function that can be supplementarily explained by a broad text”. As a result, the description contents can be understood without referring to the standard document, so that the receiving node can easily understand the exchange information (table) 1810.

  As an example of the A-format, <set> Element is used to set a numerical value. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and numerical values may be set by another description method. Before using <set> Element, specify the type of “E_AMPS_RCD” in <element> Element with “E_KH” specified in name attribute (<element name = "E_AMPS" type = "E_AMPS_RCD"). Specify that the item “Current value periodically accumulated” is notified by packingRecord in the MAC layer data / payload MSDU ”. After that, <set> Element is defined using the same “E_AMPS_RCD” name.

  The “periodic integrated current value” measured by the smart meter 1124 is set by a value attribute in an <enum> Element (enum means an electrical numerator). (Here, the smart meter 1124 automatically substitutes the measured value at $$$$ of value = "$$$$".) Also, the variable name “E_AMPS”, which means the numerical value set here, It is specified by name attribute in <enumerator> Element.

  The <description> Element has already been explained as a “function to supplementally explain” in the A-format. However, the present invention is not limited to the above, and supplementary explanations may be made using label attributes and text attributes.

Section 2.8 Address table used in the system of this embodiment and examples of its use From the contents described in Sections 2.3 to 2.7 above, different addresses are set for the same module in different layers. You can see that For example, in the address table showing a list of various addresses that can be set for the sensor module 1260-1 and the drive module 1270-1 in FIG. 8A or the drive / communication module 1470-2 and the sensor / communication module 1460-5 in FIG. 8B. An example of the data structure is shown in FIG. As a method of using this address table, the method described in section 4.2 may be used in addition to the contents described in section 2.8.

  In FIG. 23, various addresses set in duplicate in the drive / communication module 1470-2 and the sensor / communication module 1460-5 in FIG. 8B are collectively described in the same vertical column. In addition, various addresses that are set to overlap with the sensor module 1260-1 and the drive module 1270-1 built in the device 1250-1 in FIG. 8A are collectively described in the same vertical column. In this regard, the IEEE extended address EXADRS included in one of the address items in the address table of FIG. 23 is given to the communication module chip 1202-4 (see section 2.3). Accordingly, the IEEE extended address EXADRS corresponding to the sensor module 1260-1 and the drive module 1270-1 in FIG. 23 is set with an address related to the communication module chip 1202-4 built in the same device 1250-1.

  Among the address items described in the address table of FIG. 23, in the media access layer MAC02, as described in section 2.3, the IEEE extension address EXADRS is individually set. Next, in the Internet protocol version 6 layer IPv6, as described in section 2.4, the IP address IPADRS (transmission side IP address information SIPADRS / reception side IP address information DIPADRS) is individually set. On the other hand, in the communication middleware layer APL06, the device type code DIDC in the same type is set in conformity with the E-format described in section 2.6.

A feature of the system of this embodiment is that the list of FIG. 23, in which section information where each module is currently arranged, is added to the above list in the memory unit 1232 in the system controller β_1134 and the system controller α_1126. . Thereby,
(1) We can provide services efficiently and accurately,
(2) Easy format conversion within the system controller β_1134 and system controller α_1126,
(3) Since it is easy to detect an error that occurs in a transmission side node or a node in the middle of a communication path, an effect of improving the reliability of information communication is produced.

  As described in Chapter 4, the system according to the present embodiment can provide a service for each section 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m. Therefore, when the state of the plurality of devices 1250 and the plurality of drive / communication modules 1470 is controlled (changes the setting state) in the same section 1142 as one form of the service, state control (setting is performed using the information in FIG. (Change of state) Selection of the target device 1250 and the drive / communication module 1470 becomes very easy.

  As described in section 2.1, when information is communicated across different network lines (in-system network line 1782 / out-system network line 1788 / in-domain network line 2082), the format must be changed halfway. There is. In this case, the format conversion can be performed smoothly and accurately by using the information shown in FIG.

  Here, the information communication between the system controller β_1128 arranged in the system β_1134 different from the device 1250 or the combination module 1460, 1470 arranged in the system α_1132 will be specifically described. A description will be given of a case where format conversion is performed in the relay system controller α_1126 during the information communication. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the system of this embodiment may use the information shown in FIG. As a precondition for this, it is assumed that the information in FIG. Even if the arrangement position of the system controller β_1128 is far away from the system α_1132, the system controller β_1128 can collect what information from the system α_1132 using the information in FIG. Change). Further, since the system according to the present embodiment uses Internet Protocol Version 6 Layer IPv6 for all information communication, IP address information IPADRS is set in advance in the system controller β_1128, all devices 1250, and the composite modules 1460 and 1470. Yes.

  First, a method of performing format conversion from the C-format to the E-format for the communication middleware layers APL02 and APL06 in the system controller α_1126 during the information communication will be described. As already explained in section 2.5, since the C-format itself does not have any address information, information that needs to be set in the E-format cannot be obtained from this C-format information. However, as shown in FIG. 23, information related to the E-format is recorded in advance in FIG. Accordingly, in the system controller α_1126 (specifically, in the processor 1230), the device type group code DTGC, the device type code DTC, and the same type device identification code DIDC described here are used to comply with the E-format. Create information.

  On the contrary, the case where the A-format, E-format or W-format is converted to the C-format will be described. As already described in Section 2.5, when the composite modules 1460 and 1470 use the C-format, the extended IEEE extension of FIG. 12B (d) (e) defined in a layer other than the communication middleware layer APL02 The address EXEXADRS is used. However, by utilizing the IEEE extended address EXADRS for each of the compound modules 1460 and 1470 described in FIG. 23, processing corresponding to the C-format can be performed smoothly. If a format that does not include the expanded IEEE extended address EXEXADRS is used in the IEEE extended address EXADRS, a composite module that supports the IEEE 802.15.4-compliant chip-specific address ADRSIEE via the Internet The attribute information 1460 and 1470 can be obtained. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and other methods may be used. In other words, the system according to the present embodiment takes advantage of the common use of the Internet Protocol Version 6 Layer IPv6 for all information communication, and as described in section 2.4 (even during information communication using a format other than C-format). Information of the extended IEEE extended address EXEXADRS of FIG. 12B (d) may be stored in advance in the communication class information IPCLS of 13 (d).

  Next, a method for changing the format of the physical layers PHY02 and PHY06 and the media access layers MAC02 and MAC06 within the system controller α_1126 (specifically, within the processor 1230) will be described. In this case, only the physical layer and the media access layer are replaced using the information shown in FIG. 23 based on the common IP address IPADRS specified by the Internet Protocol version 6 layer IPv6. That is, in the system according to the present embodiment, the transmission side IP address information SIPADRS and the reception side IP address information DIPADRS (see FIG. 13B) are stored in the IPv6 header IPV6HD in common regardless of the communication line route on the way. Therefore, by referring to the receiving-side IP address information DIPADRS with respect to the information in FIG. 23, the receiving-side PAN-specific information PANID and the IEEE extended address EXEADRS used in the Z-format can be extracted.

  Finally, description will be given of improving the reliability of information communication using a network line by using the information of FIG. In the unlikely event that an error occurs in the information transmission side node or a node that relays information in the middle of the communication path (including system controller α_1126), information inappropriate for some of the communication information described in FIGS. 12A to 15B There is a risk of contamination. When this happens, information communication in the network system is hindered. By sequentially verifying communication information using the information shown in FIG. 23 in the system controllers α_1126 and β1128 with respect to this problem, it is possible to very easily identify whether or not an error has occurred in the communication information and specify the error location. As a result, an effect of improving the reliability of information communication is produced.

Chapter 3 Management / Display Method for Each Unit Section 3.1 Overview of Basic Unit Management Method As described in Section 1.1 with reference to FIGS.
"Domain / system / section / unit / equipment or composite module"
Has a hierarchical structure. In other words, the domain 2_1122-2 is composed of one or more systems α_1132, and one system can be divided into sections 1142. A unit 1290 is arranged for each section 1142. Further, as a specific form of the unit 1290, a single device 1250, a single composite module 1295, or a mixed system thereof is allowed. Further, there is a system controller α_1126 for managing or controlling network communication in the system α_1132 and collecting information, and manages the unit 1290. Therefore, alternative management / control / information collection of another system controller β_1128 can be performed as appropriate so that it is possible to cope with unforeseen occurrences such as a power failure or failure. Further, regarding this replaceable system controller β_1128, “movable” or “at least temporarily outside the corresponding system α_1132” is allowed.

  As a unit management method based on the above hierarchical structure, the system of this embodiment has a feature of “managing a unit belonging to each system α_1132”. As described above, the system controller α_1126 (or the system controller β_1128) manages / controls / collects information about network communication for each system. Therefore, as described above, “all the units 1290 included in the same system α_1132 are collectively managed in units of the system α_1132”, so that the system controller α_1126 (or the system controller β_1128) is convenient for network communication management / control / information collection. There is an effect of improving the property.

  In addition to this, “plug-in process”, “plug-out process”, or “check-in process” described later in section 4.2 is used to manage in the system α_1132 according to the unit 1290 that enters and leaves the system α_1132. The place where the target unit 1290 is switched ”has the following characteristics. That is, when a specific unit 1290 enters the system α_1132, the system controller α_1126 (or system controller β_1128) automatically detects it, and the specific unit 1290 is detected as a managed unit 1290 of the system controller α_1126 (or system controller β_1128). Automatically register as. Conversely, when another predetermined unit 1290 leaves the system α_1132, the system controller α_1126 (or system controller β_1128) automatically detects it, and the other predetermined unit 1290 is detected by the system controller α_1126 (or system controller β_1128). Are automatically deleted from the management target unit 1290.

  As a result, even if the multiple units 1290 frequently come in and out of the specific system α_1132, there is an effect that network communication management in the specific system α_1132 can be performed while ensuring stable and high reliability.

For example, when an external hard disk device, external optical disk device, or USB memory device is connected to a conventional computer system, it is automatically recognized (plug-in process) as a “new additional drive” (for example, D drive or E drive) "Drive management". Here, when the number of units 1290 belonging to the same system α_1132 is small, each unit 1290 may be managed as an individual drive as described above. However, the system of the present embodiment allows a large number of units 1290 to belong in the same system α_1132. As described above, if “D drive”, “E drive”,... Are sequentially added to each unit 1290 added in the same system α_1132, drive management fails at a stage beyond “Z drive”. Thus, when the unit 1290 management using the prior art is attempted, there is a problem that it is not possible to cope with the increase in the number of units 1290 in the same system α_1132. Similarly, considering not only drive management but also port assignments such as network communication control,
B] As the unit 1290 increases, a further related problem occurs that the corresponding port allocation also fails. When we try our own innovative measures aimed at avoiding the problems of [A] and [B],
C] There arises a further problem that compatibility with a management method on a conventional computer system is lost.

In the present embodiment as a method for simultaneously solving the above problems [A] to [C],
A major feature is that "units are managed in a manner similar to file management via a computer network". Then, it is regarded as “1 unit 1290≈1 pseudo file”. Here, “predetermined information collection from the unit 1290 (eg, collection of sensor information)” viewed from the system controller α_1126 (or system controller β_1128) that manages the unit 1290 is referred to as “information reproduction (READ) processing from the unit 1290”. To manage. Similarly, the processing of “change of the setting state for the unit 1290 (control)” viewed from the system controller α_1126 (or system controller β_1128) managing the unit 1290 is changed to “setting state information after the change for the unit 1290 (content to be controlled)” Is managed as “WRITE processing”.

In file management via a computer network, “URL (Uniform Resource Locator) designation” is often used to designate a file storage location on the network. However, since the location of the unit 1290 is determined within the same system α_1132, the present embodiment is also characterized in that “the system α_1132 to be managed is assigned as one drive, folder, or directory instead of specifying the URL”. Yes. If an individual drive is assigned to each unit 1290 as in [A] above, it becomes difficult to cope with the increase in the number of units 1290. However, as described above, “assigning only one drive, folder, or directory to one system α — 1132” not only flexibly supports the increase in the number of units 1290, but also does not cause a failure in port allocation. The effect of ensuring compatibility with the management method in the conventional computer world is born.

  Next, an implementation method for the above basic concept will be described. In order to apply the above “unit 1290 management method” on application software using a computer network, there is a method of defining a new “unit management compatible API (Application Interface)”. In addition to this, a new “unit management compatible built-in function or reference / usable subprogram” may be defined. Here, a program called a “subroutine” may be used as a subprogram that can be referred to / used from the other program. Further, as the above-described built-in function, a program called “function” or a program called a predetermined “method” which is incorporated and used in specific application software (specific class) by a Java script may be used.

Section 3.2 Unit management means In addition to the above-mentioned application software, the following hardware measures are also taken as means for realizing the basic concept of unit management described in section 3.1.

  FIG. 18A shows a hardware configuration and a software hierarchical structure around a conventional computer system. A processor 3010 built in the computer is connected to a communication control unit 3028 and a recording medium control unit 3024 via a bus line 3012. Here, in the information communication between the processor 3010 and the recording medium control unit 3024, command / status information corresponding to a device drive (commonly referred to as a devdora) is mutually communicated via a connection unit 3018 directly connected to the bus line 3012. The recording medium control unit 3024 decodes the content and directly drives the recording medium (hardware unit) 3014. As specific examples of the recording medium (hardware unit) 3014, a hard disk, an optical disk, a USB memory, and the like can be given.

  On the other hand, the information communication execution unit 3016 shows a part that actually executes network communication, and has communication means corresponding to wired / wireless communication media. The information communication execution unit 3016 is also controlled by the processor 3010 in the same manner as described above.

  Conventional computer control as viewed from software includes a device driver area 3022 involved in the control of the recording medium (hardware part) 3014 and a communication driver area involved in the control of the information communication execution part 3016 in the OS (Operating System) layer 3030. 3026 is included. On the other hand, the application software 3050 issues an API (Application Programming Interface) command 3045 to the OS layer 3030 to execute the application software 3050.

  Compared to the above-described conventional type, the system controller α_1126 (or the system controller β_1128) performs both information communication control using the external network line 1788 and information communication control using the same in-system network line 1782 as shown in FIG. 10A. There is a big feature in the place to do. In order to make this possible, as shown in FIG. 18B, both the external connection correspondence information communication execution unit 3017 and the in-system connection correspondence information communication execution unit 3015 are possessed. For convenience of explanation, FIG. 18B describes the two physically separated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a structure may be adopted in which a part between the external connection correspondence information communication execution unit 3017 and the internal connection correspondence information communication execution unit 3015 is overlapped / shared. You may have an inclusive relationship.

  The external system connection correspondence information communication execution unit 3017 and the internal system connection correspondence information communication execution unit 3015 in FIG. 18B mean a transmission / reception unit for wireless radio waves (including detection) or a communication information transmission / reception unit for wired communication. Therefore, there is an out-system connection compatible communication control unit 3029 and an in-system connection compatible communication control unit 3021 that control them. Further, for convenience of explanation, the OS layer 3030 is described such that a predetermined program area corresponding to the communication driver area 3027 corresponding to the connection outside the system and a predetermined program area corresponding to the communication driver area 3025 corresponding to the connection within the system exist. However, there is actually no need for an independent subprogram to exist, and when a part of both is shared, or one of the program steps corresponds to a BIOS (Basic Input / Output System) control area 3020. It may be duplicated / shared with the program area.

  In the embodiment of FIG. 18B as a means for realizing the operation outline described in section 3.1, the virtual device driver area (which is managed as a pseudo file for each unit is referred to as “device driver” corresponding to the recording apparatus). The management / control area 3034 of the unit in the system corresponding to (using terminology) is formed (physically realistic or virtually). The management / control area 3034 of the in-system unit includes a processor 3010 (at least a part thereof) having a hardware structure including a control program corresponding to the in-system connection compatible communication driver area 3025, and an in-system connection compatible communication control unit. 3021 and a bus line 3012 (including the connection portion 3018) connecting the two.

  The configuration in the management / control area 3034 of the unit in the system corresponds to the processor / communication module 1465 described with reference to FIG. 4D. In other words, as already described in section 1.3, a part related to network communication using the same system network line 1782 in the system controller α_1126 (or system controller β_1128) is a composite module 1295 called a processor / communication module 1465. Is configured.

  However, even if a special line called the same system network line 1782 is used, the part that is involved in network communication should be regarded as a part of the communication control unit 3028 and the communication driver area 3026 in FIG. Conceivable. However, as described in section 3.1, when the unit 1290 is managed assuming that “1 unit 1290≈1 pseudo file”, the management / control area 3034 of the unit in the system described above is shown in FIG. Functionally close to the device driver area 3022. Therefore, in the example embodiment of FIG. 18B, at least a part of the management / control area 3034 of the in-system unit is included in the device drive area 3022 in the OS layer 3030. Thus, as described in FIG. 18B, “a part of the control program corresponding to the existing device driver area 3022 may be used for unit 1290 management”. Not limited to this, a part of the control program corresponding to the existing BIOS control area 3020 may be used for the management of the unit 1290 (that is, a part of the control program corresponding to the BIOS control area 3020 may be used in the system unit). It may be included in the management / control area 3034).

  In the exemplary embodiment of FIG. 18B, the case where a predetermined OS (Operating System) is used in the system controller α_1126 (or the system controller β_1128) has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the execution process of the system controller α_1126 (or the system controller β_1128) may be performed without using any existing OS.

In the application example of the embodiment shown in FIGS. 19A and 19B, a means for managing the unit 1290 using a Java script is shown. In this Java script, instead of using a predetermined OS (Operating System), a processor 3 that supports JVM (Java Virtual Machine)
Installed every 010. The program environment executed here is composed of a class group 3160, and for example, the main method 3148 in the application class 3158 is executed in response to a user request. Here, the class group 3160 includes various programs described in Java scripts.

  In FIG. 19A, a processor 3010 and an in-system connection correspondence information communication execution unit 3015 mean a hardware unit. The operation of the intra-system connection correspondence information communication execution unit 3015 is controlled by the intra-system connection correspondence communication control unit 3021.

In the prior art, a program related to file management in the class group 3160 is stored in a file class 3154 including a plurality of in-file class instance method groups 3144. On the other hand, in the application example of the embodiment, the management / control class 3150 of the in-system unit for unit 1290 management is newly set in the class group 3160. In the management / control class 3150 of the unit in the system, there is an area in which the unit management / control related method group 3140 is stored. Where unit 129
There are various methods for executing each subdivided operation process related to zero management / control. A collection of these various methods is called a method group, and constitutes the management / control related method group 3140 of the unit.

  Next, the relationship between the program 3188 described in the main method 3148 in the application class 3158 and the unit management / control related method group 3140 will be described with reference to FIG. 19B.

  When the application class 3158 is activated, installation processes 3174 and 3170 (import processing) of the file class 3154 designated in advance and the management / control class 3150 of the system unit newly proposed in the application example of this embodiment are performed. Then, the in-file class instance method group 3144 included in the incorporated (imported) file class 3154 and the unit management / control related method group 3140 included in the management / control class 3150 of the unit in the system. Can be used from within the application class 3158.

  Next, a predetermined method in the instance method group 3144 in the file class is referred to 3194 from the program step 3188 described in the main method 3148, and the execution processing related to the file system can be performed efficiently. Similarly, by referring to a specific method included in the unit management / control related method group 3140 from another program step 3188 described in the main method 3148, management / control / information collection regarding the unit 1290 can be efficiently performed. .

  In the application example of the present embodiment, a predetermined organization different from the user creates a program corresponding to the management / control class 3150 of the unit in the system in advance, and appropriately sends the program to the system controller α_1126 (or system controller β_1128) via the Internet. Install additional. In addition, since the program step 3188 for referring to a specific method in the unit management / control related method group 3140 in the main method 4148 is one line (at most, several lines), the unit 1290 in the application class 3158 is very easily arranged. Management / control / information collection is possible. By using the above method, there is an effect that the management / control / information collecting means of the unit 1290 can be easily incorporated without almost burdening the software developer of the system controller α_1126 (or system controller β_1128).

FIG. 20 shows a comparison between the existing file system and the unit management method in this embodiment. In the existing file system, the basic management information is stored in a storage medium, whereas in the unit management method in the present embodiment, the storage location is stored in the memory unit 1232 in the system controller α_1126. Next, a method for accessing content (predetermined file in the file system / predetermined unit in unit management) will be described. In an existing file system, a file name (including a URL where the file is stored) is specified, and a range in which predetermined information in the file is recorded is specified as a relative address range in the file. In contrast, in the unit management method according to the present embodiment, addressing of the corresponding unit is performed. This designated address means an address (for example, IP address IPADRS or IEEE extended address EXADRS) described in the address table of FIG. In the unit management method according to the present embodiment, since the information size of information (setting state information and sensor information to be changed) owned by the unit 1290 is relatively small, one unit 1290
Read / write information as a whole. Therefore, there is an effect that management / control / information collection is greatly simplified as compared with the existing file system.

  As the management information for managing the entire file or the entire unit 1290, file management information such as FAT (File Allocation Table) and UDF (Universal Disk Format) is supported in the existing file system. In the unit management method according to this embodiment, FIG. Corresponds to the address table. The read / change target information corresponds to the content (data) in the file in the existing file system, and the sensor information and various status information / (change target) setting status in the unit management method in the present embodiment. In addition, the unit management method in the present embodiment is not limited to this, and the exchange information (table) 1810 shown in FIG. 10B is also included in the read / change target information.

  However, there is a big difference between the existing file system and the unit management method in this embodiment in the presence or absence of a function for listing all contents. That is, in the existing file system, the “file name list” is known from the file management information described above, but there is no means for easily knowing the entire file contents. Therefore, when it is necessary to grasp the contents of all files, it is necessary to open all the files sequentially and total the contents contents, which is very troublesome. In contrast, the unit management method according to the present embodiment has the time-series information tracking table of FIG. 28, so that the contents of the entire unit 1290 can be grasped instantaneously. As described above, since the unit management method according to the present embodiment has a means for uniquely grasping the contents of the entire unit 1290, there is an effect that the management / control / information collection of all the units 1290 in the system α_1132 can be performed quickly and easily. .

Section 3.3 Specific Unit Management Examples and Display Examples In many cases, the system controller α_1126 (or the system controller β_1128) automatically collects and controls information from the unit 1290. However, there are cases where the user wants to manually control the specific unit 1290 and collect information from the specific unit 1290. In this case, a management screen display example of the unit 1290 displayed on the user I / F unit 1234 in the system controller α_1126 shown in FIG. 2 will be described below. However, the display screen example will be described below, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and a similar method may be used as a management method for each unit 1290 depending on the system controller α_1126 (or the system controller β_1128).

  As already described in Section 3.1, the present embodiment is characterized in that “only one drive, folder, or directory is assigned to one system α_1132”. The situation is shown in FIG. 21A. The plurality of units 1290 in the system α_1132 have various hierarchical structures (a hierarchical structure as a folder or a hierarchical structure as a directory structure) to facilitate management.

  FIG. 21A (a) shows an example of hierarchization (folder / directory division) for each content of the unit 1290, and FIG. 21 (b) shows hierarchization (folder / directory division) for each section 1142 divided in the same system α_1132. ) Example. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and hierarchization (folder / directory division) can be performed appropriately and appropriately in accordance with user convenience.

  Here, FIGS. 21B to 21D show display / management examples when moving to a lower layer in accordance with the hierarchy (folder / directory division) of FIG. 21A (a). In the display / management example of FIG. 21A (a), the list data folder 2610 and the unit 1290 in which the address table of FIG. 23, the estimation / judgment collation table of FIG. 27, and the time series information tracking table of FIG. The folders divided for each form are arranged in the “T drive” corresponding to the unit management pseudo drive. As already explained in section 1.2 with reference to FIG. 3A, there are “unit 1250 alone”, “combined module 1295 alone”, “mixed form of both”, and “others” as units 1290. Accordingly, in FIG. 21A (a), a device-corresponding folder 2612 and a composite module-corresponding folder 2614 are arranged.

  Next, an example of display contents (internal structure) in the composite module corresponding folder 2614 is shown in FIG. 21B. As already described in section 1.3, the composite module 1295 includes a sensor / communication module 1460, a drive / communication module 1470, a processor / communication module 1465, a memory / communication module 1475, a display / communication module 1478, and the like. Permissible. Accordingly, in FIG. 21B, there are a sensor / communication module correspondence folder 2622, a drive / communication module correspondence folder 2624, a processor / communication module correspondence folder 2626, a memory / communication module correspondence folder 2628, and another function / communication module correspondence folder 2630. Deployed and managed accordingly.

  Further, an example of display contents (internal structure) in the sensor / communication module correspondence folder 2622 is shown in FIG. 21C. As already described in Section 2.5, there are two types of sensor information detected and acquired by the sensor / communication module 1460: binary information and multi-value information. Accordingly, in FIG. 21C, a binary data correspondence folder 2634 and a multi-value data correspondence folder 2638 are arranged correspondingly and managed accordingly.

  In FIG. 21D (a), all sensors / communication modules 1460 belonging to the binary data correspondence folder 2634 are arranged as pseudo files. By displaying / managing in this way, there is an effect that management / control / information collection can be performed in a unit of 1290 by a very simple method. The sensor information content detected / acquired by the sensor / communication module 2_1460-2 can be displayed to the user as shown in FIG. 21D (b) by clicking, for example, to open a conventional file. When the drive / communication module 1470 is opened at the place, the current setting status is displayed. Then, another numerical value is pasted (inserted) in the display area of FIG. 21D (b) related to the unit 1290 capable of controlling (changing the setting state) such as the drive / communication module 1470, thereby easily controlling (changing the setting state). ) Can be performed. By adopting such a display method and management method, there is an effect that the control (setting state change) process for the user's specific unit 1290 can be performed very simply and quickly.

Chapter 4 Outline of Sections in the System of the Present Embodiment In this Chapter 4, the basic concept of “section” in the system of the present embodiment is first described. The information collection method and service provision method using the concept of the section will be explained. Finally, a method for detecting the position of the transmitting node using radio waves emitted from the transmitting node and a service using the method will be described.

Section 4.1 Positioning of Sections in the System of the Present Embodiment “Section” in the system of the present embodiment means “units related to integration or management of information collected in the system” and “providing services provided in the system” Defined as at least one of Therefore, the unit corresponding to the above section may be used both for the purpose of providing the service as well as for the purpose of integrating / managing the collected information. When both purposes are used in this way, a service may be provided to the user in cooperation with the integration / management result of collected information (or based on the information integration / management result).

  Further, the above unit may mean a group related to functions related to information collection and service provision in the same system. Further, the present invention is not limited to this, and as another form of the unit, it may mean a group on a predetermined spatial relationship in the same system. Then, as a specific content of the group on the spatial relationship, a group on a predetermined continuous space in the same system may be associated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a specific content of the above-described spatial association, for example, a predetermined aggregate of continuous spaces distributed discretely (stepping stone state) may be associated. In this case, the distribution distribution state between the different sections 1_1122-1 and 2_1122-2 in the same system α_1132 may be mixed.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the same system α_1132 is composed of one or more sections. Therefore, the entire system α_1132 may be completely overlapped with one section 1_1122-1 or may be divided into a plurality of sections 1_1122-1 to m_1122-m. In addition, the present invention is not limited to this, and a part between a plurality of different sections 1_1122-1 to m_1122-m may spatially overlap each other.

  First, the position of the section will be described using an example shown in FIG. FIG. 25 shows a situation where a single building is cut into two rooms. Spatial units of section 1_1122-1 (left room) and section 2_1122-2 (right room) are assigned to each room. Here, as shown in FIG. 25A, the luminaire is turned on in the left room (in section 1_1122-1), and the luminaire is turned off in the right room (in section 2_1122-2). ) Think about the state. A plurality of optical sensors (a sensor module 1260 having a light detection function may be incorporated in the device 1250 (FIG. 1) or a sensor / communication module 1460 may be configured as shown in FIG. 8B). -1 and 2_1122-2 are assumed to be arranged. Then, when the sensor information obtained from the optical sensors arranged in the section 1_1122-1 is integrated / managed (by the system controller α_1126), large light amount detection information is obtained from all the sensor information. On the other hand, only small light quantity detection information can be obtained from all the optical sensors arranged in the section 2_1122-2. Thus, commonality appears in the sensor information obtained from the sections 1_1122-1 and 2_1122-2. The system of this embodiment has a significant feature in that various sensor information obtained for each section 1_1122-1 and 2_1122-2 is integrated or managed to estimate / determine the state in each section 1_1122-1 and 2_1122-2. . Then, in estimating / determining the state in the same section 1122, an effect of improving the accuracy of the estimation / determination using a result of integrating or managing a plurality of pieces of information collected from the section 1122 is produced.

  Next, consider a case where the air conditioner is operated by moving only the air conditioner installed in the section 1_1122-1 as shown in FIG. 25B in a very cold outside air environment. In this case, since the air conditioning is not working in the section 2_1122-2, the “warmth service” is not provided to the user in the right room. However, a “warmth providing service” is provided to the user wherever they are in the left room. In this way, the same service can often be provided in common within the same section 1122. As described above, in the system according to the present embodiment, by “controlling the service provision for each section 1122” for the user, an effect of facilitating the service management for the user in the same system α_1132 is produced. Furthermore, by providing services in units of sections 1 to m — 1142-1 to m compared to services provided by the entire system α — 1132, it is possible to provide finer services for users and improve the end user satisfaction.

  Here, the example of “room” is used as the description of the section. However, the system according to the present embodiment is not limited to this, and any spatial unit that meets the above-described definition may correspond to the section.

  In the system according to the present embodiment, the system controller α_1126 that controls / manages / collects information in the network communication in the network system α_1132 may divide the system α_1132 into sections 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m. As described above, the system controller α_1126 automatically detects “a range that has been darkened at the same time”, “a range that has been brightened at the same time”, or “a range in which the temperature is simultaneously increased or decreased”. It can be divided into sections 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m. In addition, it may be classified based on the result of photographing with a camera or the like. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the section 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m may be classified by direct designation by the user.

Section 4.2 Method for Managing Locations of Various Modules and Various Devices in Sections As described in the above example, the system controller α_1126 collects information in the corresponding system α_1132 and collects information for each section 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m. In order to estimate / determine the state of each unit 1290 (device 1250 or combination module 1295, 1
460, 1470) must be known in advance in which section 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m. In order to make it possible, information on sections 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m arranged for each of one or more units 1290 (devices 1250 and composite modules 1295, 1460, 1470) existing in the same system α_1132 is managed. There is a big feature in the place. And another way to express this feature is as follows. That is, a plurality of units 1290 (FIG. 2) having a function of communicating (obtaining the communication module 1660 of FIG. 4A) that is obtained or created independently (corresponding to the function of the other function module 1440 of FIG. 4A) and that is obtained. And a system controller α_1126 (FIG. 1) that acquires and manages the information from the plurality of units 1290, and the system controller α_1126 is divided into sections 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m for each unit 1290 for management. The system controller α_1126 holds information about the sections 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m to which each unit 1290 belongs.

  On the other hand, from the viewpoint of the system α_1132 (client system), the characteristics as the client system can be expressed as follows. In other words, this client system (system α_1132) can be connected to an external cloud (server n_1116-n), and acquires or creates and transmits information provided to the system controller α_1126 for managing information and the system controller α_1126. The system controller α_1126 manages the unit 1290 by dividing the unit 1290 into sections 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m, and holds information about the section to which each unit 1290 belongs.

  The address table shown in FIG. 23, which will be described later, corresponds to the information related to the section belonging to each unit 1290.

  Therefore, this section 4.2 will focus on the management method for realizing the above features. In the following description, a system model in which the system controller α_1126 installed in the system α_1132 shown in FIG. 2 and FIG. 8A / B manages and operates or controls in the network communication system α_1132 will be described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the following explanation is based on the management and operation of the network communication system α_1132 in the network controller α_1132 via the router (gateware) 1300 by the system controller β_1128 or the server n_1116-n installed outside the system α_1132 in FIG. Or you may adapt to the system model which controls. In this case, the system controller α_1126 in the following description may be replaced with the system controller β_1128 or the server n_1116-n.

In order to manage the units 1290 (devices 1250 and composite modules 1295, 1460, 1470) arranged for each of the sections 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m, the address table in FIG. 23 described later is a memory in the system controller α_1126 shown in FIG. It is recorded in advance in the section 1232 (and in the system controller β_1128 in FIG. 1). Here, the description example in the address table of FIG. 23 shows that the sensors / communication modules 1460-1 to 1460-1 and driving / communication modules 1470-1 to 2 of FIG. 8B and the devices 1250-1 to 1250 of FIG. An example of mixed arrangement is shown. However, in the system of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. Each sensor module 1260-1, 2-2 obtains different types of sensor information. Therefore, in order to collect various types of information and estimate / determine the state of each section 1142, the location of the device 1250-1 to 3250-1 to 3 is not managed by the address table, but is stored in the device 1250-1 to 3250-1. It is desirable to manage information on the sections 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m in which the individual sensor modules 1260-1 to 1260-5 and the individual drive modules 1270-1 are installed.

  In the example shown in the address table of FIG. 23, the sensor module 1260-1, the drive module 1270-1, the drive / communication module 1470-2, and the sensor / communication module 1460-5 are arranged in a horizontal row related to “section information”. The section locations are listed together. From this, it can be seen that the sensor module 1260-1 is arranged in the section 2_1142-2. In the system according to the present embodiment, through the creation and maintenance of the address table, the various composite modules 1460 and 1470 arranged for each section 1142, the sensor modules 1260, and the drive modules 1270 are managed in real time. However, the system according to the present embodiment is not limited to the above method, and any arrangement location management method that can be managed by the system controller α_1126 may be performed.

  However, the system of the present embodiment is characterized in that a plurality of different systems (client systems) are allowed to coexist at the same time. Then, the following contents can be specified as newly generated characteristics by combining the above-described address table (FIG. 23) with the result including the characteristics and the contents described in FIG. That is, the client system (system α_1132) can be connected to an external cloud (server n — 1116-n), and has a unit 1290 having a function of communicating information acquired or created uniquely (the communication module 1660 in FIG. 4A is responsible) A composite client system (corresponding to domain 2_1122-2 in FIG. 1) including a plurality of client systems α_1132 (a plurality of client systems α_1126 and a client system β_1134) including a system controller α_1126 that acquires and manages the information from the unit 1290 The information acquired or created independently can be transmitted to the system controller α_1126, and the client included in the composite client system (domain 2_1122-2) The system controller α_1126 managing the ant system α_1132 manages the plurality of units 1295-1 to -7 divided into sections (section 1_1142-1, section 2_1142-1 and section m_1142-m in FIG. 2). It holds the information (address table in FIG. 23) related to the section to which it belongs.

Next, a method for creating and maintaining the address table is shown in FIG. First, as Step 101, sections 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m in the same system_1132 are defined. Here, the system of the present embodiment has a great feature in that section definition (Step 101) is first performed, and placement information setting or placement information management (Step 102 or Step 103) for each section 1142 is performed based on the section definition. As described above, by managing the arrangement locations of various modules and various devices in accordance with the section division state defined first, there is an effect that the state estimation and determination for each section in real time becomes easy. In addition to this, another effect that it is easy to manage the arrangement locations of various modules and various devices is produced.

  In particular, as will be described later in Section 5.2.3, there may be a plurality of different section definition methods in the same area in the social infrastructure field. That is, in the example of FIG. 35, instead of setting each section 1142 for each address of the address on the map, the section 1142 is divided along the method of dividing the section 1142 along the pipe of the water pipe or the wiring path of the distribution power line. There can be a plurality of definition methods such as a division method. Therefore, in the social infrastructure field, it is desirable to define the division method of the section 1142 for each purpose of use based on some reference information such as map information.

  On the other hand, in the consumer field, the section 1142 may be automatically defined according to the user's definition, for example, “room allocation in one house (one house)” as a method of defining the section 1142. For example, FIG. 24 shows a case where a user takes a video camera (or a smartphone or tablet with a built-in camera, or a mobile phone) having a GPS (Global Positioning System) function, and automatically analyzes the captured video. Such section 1142 can be automatically defined. In the above example, the user specifies how to define the section 1142. However, the present embodiment is not limited to this. For example, “section division by section 1142 may be defined by room allocation” by default. The default setting as described above has an effect of reducing the user burden at the step 101. Alternatively, after the section is automatically divided according to the default section division method, the user may partially correct the section division method using the user I / F unit 1234 in the system controller α_1126 in FIG. 8A. As another method, section definition may be automatically performed by inputting the center position information of each room using the GPS function and analyzing the input result. In the present embodiment, the physical spatial position information of the sections 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m may be obtained by any method without being limited to the above method. For example, in the above-described method, some user's manpower is required for this section definition. However, the physical spatial position information of the sections 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m may be obtained without any user intervention. As an example of the specific method, the room allocation and position information of each room may be measured while cleaning across a room (section 1142) in a predetermined house with a robot cleaner incorporating a camera and a GPS function. By using this method, there is an effect that the physical spatial position information of the sections 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m can be obtained very easily without imposing any burden on the user.

  As another application example of the present embodiment, the section definition (Step 101) is not performed first, and the section obtained automatically from the information obtained from the various units 1290 (composite modules 1295, 1460, 1470 and the device 1250) is automatically used. Definition may be made. In other words, at least a part of the various composite modules 1460 and 1470 and the various devices 1250 arranged in the system α_1132 are operated first, and after the operation, the section 1142 is divided. Thereby, since the user is not conscious of the section definition (Step 101) in the same system, there is an effect that the psychological burden on the user can be reduced. The specific contents of the above method will be described below. As will be described later, the system controller α_1126 can grasp the arrangement information of the various composite modules 1460 and 1470 and the various devices 1250 in real time by the initial setting (Step 102) and the automatic tracking of the moving position (Step 103). Also, as described in Section 4.1 with reference to FIG. 25A, when the user acts and the state in the section 2_1142-2 changes, synchronization is performed from the combination modules 1460 and 1470 and the device 1250 arranged therein. Thus, state change related information can be obtained. Therefore, various composite modules can be obtained by observing the synchronism with respect to changes in information (sense information, status setting control information, etc.) obtained from the unit 1290 (composite modules 1295, 1460, 1470 and equipment 1250) arranged in the system α_1132. The relevance of 1460 and 1470 and various equipment 1250 arrangement | positioning places can be estimated. By repeating this synchronization detection a plurality of times as time elapses, it is possible to estimate / determine the positional relationship between the units 1290 (combined modules 1295, 1460, 1470 and the device 1250) arranged in the same section 1142 with high accuracy. Then, the system controller α_1126 enters the estimation / judgment result in the section information column in the address table of FIG.

  Next, an initial setting method (Check-in method) of various units 1290 (composite modules 1295, 1460, 1470 and devices 1250) corresponding to Step 102 in FIG. 22 will be described. In the internal structure of the sensor / communication module 1460 of FIG. 5, for example, a near field communication module 1560 corresponding to near field radio such as TransferJet of near field wireless transfer technology and FeliCa (non-contact IC card standard FeliCa (a combination of Felicity and Card)). May be built in. Although not shown, a similar near field communication module 1560 may be incorporated in the drive / communication module 1670 and the device 1250. When the composite module 1460, 1470 or the device 1250 in the example of the system of the present embodiment is newly installed, a portable external device (GPS (Global Positioning System) function built-in) is initially set in the system α_1132. Communication with the near-field communication module 1560 may be performed by approaching (not shown). The portable external device, together with the near-field communication module 1560 compatible with the near-field wireless communication, is connected to the system controller α_1126 via the network line 1782 in the same system (see the explanation in section 2.1 using FIG. 10A). A communication module 1202 capable of information communication between the two is also incorporated. At the time of the initial setting, the system controller α_1126 receives the new (initial setting target) composite module 1460, 1470 or the IP address information IPADRS of the device 1250 (for details, refer to the description in section 2.4 using FIG. 13). Register automatically. In this near field communication, the system controller α_1126 sends (1) the newly registered IP address information IPADRS to the new composite module 1460, 1470 or device 1250, and (2) the IP address information IPADRS on the system controller α_1126 side ( 3) PAN-specific identification information PANID (refer to the description in section 2.3 using FIG. 12A) of the location where the current portable external device exists, (4) PAN corresponding to the location where the system controller α_1126 is installed Unique identification information PANID, (5) Information of IEEE extended address EXADRS owned by system controller α_1126 is transmitted. Further, by using this near field communication, (6) the information of the IEEE extended address EXADRS owned by itself is transmitted from the new (initial setting target) composite module 1460, 1470 or the device 1250 to the system controller α_1126. . Thus, by exchanging information between the two using means such as near field communication at the stage of initial setting (Step 102), preparation for information communication using the network line 1782 in the same system is completed. Here, a method using the near field communication has been described as an example of an information exchange method at the time of initial setting. However, the system of the present embodiment is not limited to this, and information exchange at the time of initial setting may be performed by other means. Or, as will be described later as an initial setting method by other methods, first, provisional communication may be performed on the network line 1782 in the same system using a provisional address to perform regular address exchange. Therefore, instead of performing such near field communication, the portable external device with the GPS function may be simply brought closer. At this time, the system controller α_1126 automatically recognizes the GPS position information obtained from the portable external device as the arrangement location information of the corresponding unit 1290 (composite module 1295, 1460, 1470 or device 1250). On the other hand, the system controller α_1126 compares the above GPS information with the GPS range information for each section 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m obtained in advance in the section definition of Step 101. Based on the comparison result, it is automatically estimated / determined in which section 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m the newly arranged unit 1290 (composite module 1295, 1460, 1470 or device 1250) is arranged. The result is registered in the corresponding place in the address table of FIG. Further, the result is displayed on the user I / F unit 1234 in FIG. 8A and notified to the user, and the user is asked to confirm whether the correctness is correct and to make a correction registration as necessary.

  In the above-described embodiment, a user operation is necessary for the initial setting (Step 102) of the unit 1290 (device 1250 or composite module 1295). However, the present embodiment is not limited to this, and the initial setting (Step 102) may be automatically performed. An example of the specific implementation will be described. In the present embodiment, it is assumed that the user moves the placement location of the unit 1290 (composite modules 1295, 1460, 1470 and equipment 1250) on the way, and the unit 1290 (composite modules 1295, 1460, 1470 and equipment 1250) of Step 1103 is assumed. Automatic tracking is possible. Here, for this automatic tracking, the method described later in Section 4.4 is used. Therefore, the system controller α_1126 monitors the position of the initial setting target unit 1290 (the combination module 1295, 1460, 1470 or the device 1250) using the automatic tracking technique at the time of initial setting. Then, the arrangement location information obtained as a result is compared with the above-described GPS range information for each of the sections 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m, and the newly set target unit 1290 (combined module 1295, 1460, 1470 or device 1250) corresponds. The section 1142 to be automatically estimated / determined is registered in the corresponding location in the address table of FIG.

  When the initial setting target unit 1290 (combination module 1295, 1460, 1470 or device 1250) first performs provisional communication on the network line 1782 in the same system, in FIG. 12A (e) (details are 2 (See Section 3))) PAN-specific identification information SPANID on the transmission side, β) PAN-specific identification information DPANID on the reception side, γ) IEEE extended address DEXADRS on the reception side, and (2) in FIG. (4) δ) Sending side IP address information SIPADRS, ε) Receiving side IP address information DIPADRS, each information storage area is blanked, or a predetermined default in Z-format (see Section 2.1) A value may be stored. When the initial provisional communication from the initial setting target unit 1290 (composite module 1295, 1460, 1470 or device 1250) is received, the default value (or blank state) is used to start from the system control α_1126. Information communication with the setting target unit 1290 (combination module 1295, 1460, 1470 or device 1250) can be started. Then, in the communication information transmitted from the system control α_1126, the above-mentioned α) identification information SPAN ID unique to the PAN on the initialization target side and δ) IP address information SIPADRS on the initialization target side are communication middleware data. The data may be stored and transmitted in the APLDT storage area (see the description in section 2.2 using FIG. 11). Even in this case, since it is known that the unit 1290 (combination module 1295, 1460, 1470 or device 1250) to be initialized is arranged in the system α_1132, there is a risk that the unit 1290 is erroneously initialized in another domain 1122. There is no sex. In the above method, since the user is not involved at the time of initial setting, there is an effect that the initial setting operation can be automatically performed without placing a burden on the user.

  As described above, the major feature of this embodiment is that “the position of the initial setting object is detected at the time of initial setting”. As a result, it can be confirmed that the system controller α_1126 is placed in the corresponding system α_1132 and in the related domain 2_1122-2. There is no risk of initial setting (registration). Furthermore, since the initial setting method does not require any user work, not only can the user's mental burden be reduced, but also the effect of improving the reliability of the initial setting process can be achieved because human errors can be prevented. Furthermore, the present embodiment has the following feature in the place of “prescribe the section belonging state of the initial setting object at the time of initial setting”. As a result, even immediately after the initial setting, there is an effect that the service can be provided in section units using the initial setting object.

  Here, the process of making the newly purchased unit 1290 (composite module 1295, 1460, 1470 or device 1250) usable in the domain 2 — 1122-2 is defined as “initial setting”, and in particular, “Check-in”. You may call it. On the other hand, after the initial setting unit 1290 (combination module 1295, 1460, 1470 or device 1250) once goes out of domain 2_1142-2, it enters the same domain 2_1142-2 again, and enters system α_1132 or system β_1134. The process of restoring to a state where network communication can be performed with a “plug-in” may be defined.

  Such plug-in target unit 1290 (composite module 1295, 1460, 1470 or device 1250) belongs to “δ) plug-in side IP address information SIPADRS” set in advance and belongs to the same domain 2 — 1122-2. It knows the information of “ε) IP address information DIPADRS set in the other system controller related to any system controller α_1126 or β_1128. Therefore, as described in section 2.1 with reference to FIG. 10A, as long as Internet Protocol Version 6 Layer IPv6 is used for network communication, this plug-in target unit 1290 (composite module 1295, 1460, 1470 or device 1250 is used. ) In principle, network communication is possible anywhere in the world.

  Therefore, in the system according to the present embodiment, the plug-in target unit 1290 (composite module 1295, 1460, 1470 or device 1250) is arranged in a physical area defined by any system α_1132, β_1134 belonging to the same domain 2_1122-2. Depending on whether or not, automatic plug-in processing may be performed. Specifically, the systems α_1132 and β_1134 check the arrangement location of the unit 1290 (combination module 1295, 1460, 1470 or device 1250) to be plugged in by the same method as the initial setting described above. That is, the system controllers α_1132 and β_1134 always monitor the information communication status on the network line 1782 in the same system (refer to the description in section 2.1 using FIG. 10A and FIG. 16), and are registered in the address table of FIG. The unit 1290 (the device 1250 (the sensor module 1260 and the drive module 1270 therein) and the composite modules 1295, 1460, and 1470) always confirms that there is no information communication. 23. When information communication from a unit other than the unit 1290 registered in the address table of FIG. 23 (the device 1250 (the sensor module 1260 or the drive module 1270) or the composite module 1295, 1460, 1470) is found, The contents of the address information SIPADRS are confirmed. If the content of the IP address information SIPADRS on the transmission side is information used in the systems α_1132 and β_1134 in the past, plug-in processing is started. For other information, the initial setting process is started. That is, the system controllers α_1126 and β_1128 always manage the arrangement locations of the units 1290 (device 1250 (the sensor module 1260 and drive module 1270 therein) and the combined modules 1295, 1460, and 1470) in the systems α_1132 and β_1134. Then, it automatically detects that the plug-in target unit 1290 (composite module 1295, 1460, 1470 or device 1250) enters the physical area defined by any of the systems α_1132, β_1134 belonging to the same domain 2_1122-2, Perform plug-in processing automatically. In the middle of this plug-in process, the user I / F unit 1234 may be used to confirm whether or not plug-in is possible. Then, at the final stage of the plug-in process, information related to the unit 1290 (combination module 1295, 1460, 1470 or device 1250) that has performed the plug-in process is added to the address table of FIG. As described above, since the system controllers α_1126 and β_1128 automatically start the plug-in process in accordance with the position of the plug-in target, no user manual work is required. As a result, the “plug-in” process can be executed very easily without burdening the user.

  From the viewpoint of the system α_1126 (client system) described in Chapter 1, the plug-in processing described above can exhibit the following characteristics. That is, the client system (system α_1126) in the system of the present embodiment includes a unit 1290 having a function of acquiring or creating information and communicating, and a system controller α_1126 that acquires and manages the information from the unit, and the system controller α_1126. Manages each of the plurality of units 1290 by dividing them into sections 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m and holds information (address table in FIG. 23) regarding the sections 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m to which each unit 1290 belongs, Information related to the unit (FIG. 21D) is held, and information related to the sections 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m to which the units 1290 belong (address table in FIG. 23). When registering a new unit different from the unit 1290 that has already been registered, (1) the new unit that requires new registration is already registered in the above-described information (address table in FIG. 23). (2) Confirm that the new unit is not registered in the above information (address table in FIG. 23), and (3) In the above information (address table in FIG. 23) (4) Check which section 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m the new unit belongs to, and (5) the new unit in the above-described information (address table in FIG. 23). Information on the section to which the unit belongs is given.

  In particular, as the above address table, information on the first section (that is, information on the unit 1290 belonging to the first section) and information on the second section (that is, the unit 1290 belonging to the second section) with respect to the plurality of units 1290. It has a feature in the place including information.

  Further, the above-mentioned address table has the following characteristics in the place where the information is recorded as time series information.

  As the characteristics are clarified as described above, the present embodiment is particularly characterized in that “a plug-in by detecting the position of an object” can be performed. In addition, there is the following feature in the section “Define the section attribution status of the object at the time of plug-in”. And the effect by those characteristics corresponds with the effect at the time of the above-mentioned initial setting.

  Whether or not the plug-in processing corresponding to the present embodiment has been performed is managed by the system controller α_1126 (stored in the memory unit 1232 in the system controller α_1126 shown in FIG. 2) (see FIG. 23). It is possible to easily judge by deciphering the changes in the description in ().

  As another confirmation method, the new registration target unit 1290 (composite module 1295, 1460, 1470 or device 1250) is transmitted from the new registration target unit 1290 when moved from outside the system α_1132 to the inside. Changes in communication information content may be examined. That is, for example, the unit 1290 (combination module 1295, 1460, 1470 or device 1250) is first placed in another domain 1_1122-1. Then, the reception-side IP address information DIPADRS (section (b) /2.4 in FIG. 13) in the communication information transmitted from the new registration target unit 1290 arranged in the domain 1_1122-1 is received corresponding to the system α_1132. An address different from the side IP address information DIPADRS is stored. Similarly, information different from that of the system α_1132 is also stored in the receiving side addresses (sections 10A, 16 and 11 / 2.2 in FIGS. 10A, 16 and 11) set in the media access layers MAC02 and MAC06. Thereafter, the new registration target unit 1290 (composite module 1295, 1460, 1470 or device 1250) is moved into the system α_1132, and the corresponding address after the plug-in processing is completed is confirmed. The receiving side IP address information DIPADRS in the communication information transmitted from the new registration target unit 1290 (composite module 1295, 1460, 1470 or device 1250) after the plug-in processing is completed is the system α_1132 (or in the system of FIG. 9). This matches the system controller β_1128). Also, the receiving side addresses set in the media access layers MAC02 and MAC06 (for example, the PAN-specific identification information DPANID on the receiving side and the IEEE extended address DEXADRS on the receiving side in FIG. 12A (e) related to section 2.3). , Corresponding to the system α_1132 (or the system controller β_1128 in the system of FIG. 9).

  For reference, a change in address information in the communication information during the plug-in process will be described below. First, the description starts immediately after the location of a new registration target unit 1290 (combination module 1295, 1460, 1470 or device 1250) previously connected to the network in another domain 1_1122-1 is moved. If the new registration target unit 1290 is the device 1250-1, the GPS function is mounted in the new registration target unit 1290, so that the device 1250 itself can recognize the movement of the placement location. If there is experience in the system α_1132 (before the current plug-in processing), the IP address information IPADRS and media access of the system controller α are stored in the memory unit 1242 in the corresponding device 1250-1. Addresses set in the layers MAC02 and MAC06 are stored. Therefore, the corresponding device 1250-1 uses this information to perform information communication with the system controller α. In the future, when the transmission side IP address information SIPADRS and the reception side IP address information DIPADRS shown in FIG. 13B are generically referred to, they are simply expressed as IP address information IPADRS. Similarly, when the IEEE extended address DEXADRS on the receiving side and the IEEE extended address SEXADRS on the transmitting side shown in FIG. 12A (e) are collectively referred to, they are described as the IEEE extended address EXADRS.

  On the other hand, if the corresponding device 1250-1 has not previously been placed in the system α_1132, the media access layers MAC02 and MAC06 such as the transmission side IP address information SIPADRS and the IEEE extended address SEXADRS on the transmission side The address area to be set is blanked, or predetermined dummy information is stored and information is communicated in the system α_1132 to prompt the system controller α_ to perform an initial setting process (Step 102 in FIG. 22).

  However, when the new registration target unit 1290 is the combination module 1295, 1460, 1470, it basically has no GPS function. Accordingly, the new registration target unit 1290 (combination modules 1295, 1460, 1470) in this case does not know that the arrangement location has been moved. Therefore, the new registration target unit 1290 (combined modules 1295, 1460, 1470) transmits the same communication information in the system α_1132 after the placement location movement as in the case where the new registration target unit 1290 is placed in another domain 1_1122-1.

  The system controller α_1126 (or β_1128) always monitors communication information in the system α_1132. Accordingly, media access layers such as unexpected IP address information IPADRS and IEEE extended address EXADRS in the physical layer frame PPDU (FIG. 11 (f)) communicated on the same system network line 1782 (FIG. 10A, FIG. 16). When it is found that the address information set in MAC02 and MAC06 is stored, the location of the transmission source of the corresponding physical layer frame PPDU is determined by the method described later in section 4.4 (and FIGS. 31 to 34). Check. If the target transmission source location is within the area of step α_1126 (based on the section definition result of Step 101 in FIG. 22), the initial setting process (Step 102) or the plug-in process is started.

  Both the initial setting and the plug-in processing use the address on the transmission side (IEEE extension address SEXADRS on the transmission side, etc.) set in the media access layers MAC02 and MAC06 and stored in the physical layer frame PPDU. Then, information communication (transmission) is performed from the system controller α_1126 (or β_1128) toward the new registration target unit 1290 (composite modules 1295, 1460, 1470). By receiving this information, the new registration target unit 1290 (composite module 1295, 1460, 1470) on the receiving side receives the IP address IPADRS of the system controller α_1126 (or β_1128), the address in the media access layer MAC02, MAC06, ( And IP address IPADRS set on the receiving side at the time of initial setting.

  Then, as the next step, the new registration target (initial setting / plug-in target) unit 1290 (composite module 1295, 1460, 1470 or device 1250-1) uses the above-mentioned received information to set the system controller α_1126 (or to β_1128). As a result, the initial setting / plug-in target unit 1290 (composite module 1295, 1460, 1470 or device 1250-1) can confirm that correct address information has been acquired. Then, the system controller α_1126 (or β_1128) confirms the description content in the communication information transmitted from the unit 1290 (composite module 1295, 1460, 1470 or device 1250-1) to be newly registered (initial setting / plug-in target). After confirming that initial setting or plug-in processing has been performed correctly, regular registration processing in the address table of FIG. 23 is performed.

  In this embodiment, as described in Section 1.8 with reference to FIG. 8B, a composite module 1295 such as the sensor / communication module 1460-5 can exist alone. Alternatively, it may exist in a form inserted or mixed in a specific product or part. Therefore, the composite module 1295 can be carried by the user and moved. Therefore, the specific combination modules 1295, 1460, and 1470 (or the device 1250) carried by the user can also be moved between the different sections 1142 after the initial setting. That is, the compound modules 1295, 1460, and 1470 (or the device 1250) that can be moved together with the user in the form of being present alone or inserted or mixed in a product or part are moved as shown in Step 103 of FIG. As shown in Step 104 of FIG. 22, the section to which the existing location after the movement belongs can be repeatedly determined. By collecting sense information and status information from the composite modules 1460 and 1470 and the devices 1250 for each of the base sections 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m based on the latest arrangement information, the service is provided to the user (Step 105). The state grasping accuracy for each of 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m is improved, and the user satisfaction is improved.

  Next, a detailed description will be given of a method for automatically tracking the movement position of the unit 1290 (device 1250 or combination module 1295, 1460, 1470) described in Step 103 of FIG. In step 103, as described later in section 4.4, a technique for detecting the position of the transmission source of the radio wave transmitted from the target unit 1290 (device 1250 or composite module 1295, 1460, 1470) may be used. . That is, when wireless is used as a physical medium (communication medium) of the network line 1782 (FIG. 10A or FIG. 16) in the system α_1132, the unit 1290 (the device 1250 or the combined modules 1295, 1460, 1470) is used. ) Transmits radio waves to perform information communication with the system controller α_1126. Then, the communication information is analyzed in the system controller α_1126 (for example, as described later, the transmission side IP address information in FIG. 13B and the IEEE extended address SEXADRS on the transmission side are extracted and the address table in FIG. 23 is referred to). Thus, it is possible to determine in real time from which unit 1290 (device 1250 or combination module 1295, 1460, 1470) in the system α_1132 is transmitted for each physical layer frame PPDU (FIG. 11). At the same time, if the position detection technique of the radio wave transmission source described later in Section 4.4 is used, the physical position information of the radio wave transmission source can be obtained in real time for each physical layer frame PPDU. When both pieces of information are matched for each physical layer frame PPDU, physical position information for each unit 1290 (for each device 1250 or each of the combination modules 1295, 1460, and 1470) is determined.

  In this way, each time the system controller α_1126 receives the physical layer frame PPDU, each unit 1290 (device 1250 or combination module 1295, 1460, 1470) belongs (in the same manner as the above-described initial setting). Sections 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m (inside) are determined. Then, the result of determination is sequentially compared with the contents described in the address table of FIG. If there is no difference in the comparison result, it is assumed that “the corresponding device 1250 and the combination modules 1460 and 1470 have not moved beyond the section 1142”, and the address table is not rewritten. On the other hand, if a difference is found in the comparison result, the address table may be rewritten assuming that the specific device 1250 or the specific combination module 1460, 1470 has moved beyond the section 1142, and the process may proceed to the next Step 104. As described above, this embodiment has a great feature in that “owns information (such as an address table) related to the section 1142”. Then, in the movement position automatic tracking step (Step 103) of the unit 1290 (device or combination module), the presence / absence of movement beyond the section 1142 is determined using the information related to the section 1142. In Step 103, the arrangement location management for each unit 1290 (device 1250 or combination module 1295, 1460, 1470) is performed in section 1142, so for example, unit 1290 (device 1250 or combination module 1295, 1460, 1470) is in the same section 1142. Even if it moves slightly, it is regarded that “the movement beyond the section 1142 has not been made”, and the predetermined processing such as rewriting of the address table is not performed. This has the effect of efficiently collecting information and providing services to users. In order to explain this effect, a comparison is made with a method in which feedback is performed sequentially with respect to slight movement of the unit 1290 (device or composite module). For example, if a user wears a particular portable composite module, the opportunity for the user to move within the same section 1142 frequently occurs. If a feedback process (such as an address table update or a transition process to the next step 104) is performed each time the user moves slightly, the process in the system controller α_1126 becomes very complicated. On the other hand, as described with reference to FIG. 25A in section 4.1, even if the unit 1290 (device or composite module) slightly moves in the same section 1142, the content of the obtained sensor information changes. Often not. Further, as described with reference to FIG. 25B, a service is often provided to the user in section 1142 units. Therefore, even if feedback is provided every time the user moves slightly, the efficiency of improving the quality of service provided to the user is not significantly increased.

  When the unit 1290 (device 1250 or combination module 1295, 1460, 1470) moved beyond the section 1142 is generated as a result of the automatic tracking of the movement position of the unit 1290 (device or combination module) in Step 103 of FIG. Proceed to the next Step 104. Therefore, when there is no movement beyond the section 1142, this Step 104 may be skipped and it may progress to Step 105. In step 104, the specific “determination processing of the section to which the existing position of the unit 1290 (device or composite module) whose placement location has moved” belongs to the section performed in the address table correction processing and the system controller α_1126. This means recombination processing of units 1290 (device 1250 and combination modules 1295, 1460, 1470) arranged for each of 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m.

  Here, when the address table is corrected, only the change within the predetermined frame (in the cell) is performed, and the rearrangement is not performed in units of vertical columns. Then, in order to increase the efficiency of state management and sensor information collection in section 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m units, the above address table is copied to a temporary storage area in the processor 1230 of the system controller α_1126, and sections 1_1142-1 to m_1142- The unit 1290 (device 1250 or combination module 1295, 1460, 1470) arranged every m is recombined (rearranged in units of vertical columns).

  Also, in FIG. 22 Step 105, “collection of sensor / status information from the target unit 1290 (device or composite module) or provision of service to the user” is performed for each of the sections 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m. As the specific contents, the method described in section 4.2 with reference to FIGS. 26A to 30 is used.

  Thereafter, automatic tracking (Step 103) of the movement position of the unit 1290 (device or composite module) is performed as appropriate, and the above series of processing is repeated.

  However, in the system of the present embodiment, the “plug-out” process may be automatically performed for a specific unit 1290 (device 1250 or combination module 1295, 1460, 1470) using automatic tracking of the movement position. That is, when a unit 1290 (device 1250 or combination module 1295, 1460, 1470) that is outside the physical area range of each section 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m defined in Step 101 is found, “corresponding network communication” It is assumed that the system α_1132 is not managed, and the corresponding item (the entire corresponding vertical column) is temporarily deleted from the address table. However, the information of the IP address IPADRS and the IEEE extended address EXADRS of the temporarily deleted unit 1290 (device 1250 or composite module 1295, 1460, 1470) is stored in the memory unit 1232 so that it can flexibly cope with future “re-plug-in” processing. (It is recorded in the system controller α_1126 in FIG. 8A). Here, immediately before performing the “plug-out” process, the user I / F unit 1234 (in the system controller α_1126 in FIG. 8A) may be displayed to inquire the user whether plug-out is possible.

  The characteristics of the above plug-out process will be described from the viewpoint of the system α_1132 (client system). That is, the client system which is the system of this embodiment includes a unit 1290 having a function of acquiring or creating information and communicating, and a system controller α_1126 that acquires and manages the information from the unit 1290, and the system controller α_1126 includes a plurality of system controllers α_1126. The unit 1290 is divided into sections 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m and managed, and holds information about the section to which each unit belongs (address table in FIG. 23) and information about the unit (FIG. 21D). To do. When the information from the unit cannot be reacquired, the system controller α_1126 is temporarily removed from the management target of the information (address table in FIG. 23) related to the section to which each unit belongs.

  On the other hand, in the re-plug-in process described above, when the information from the unit can be re-acquired in addition to the above as a further feature of the client system, the system controller α_1126 determines the information on the section to which each unit belongs. This is the management target of the (address table in FIG. 23).

  Also for the plug-out processing described above, information relating to the first section (that is, information of the unit 1290 belonging to the first section) and information relating to the second section (ie, the second section) as the address table as the plurality of units 1290. It is characterized in that it includes information on the unit 1290 belonging to the section.

  Further, there is the following feature where the information is recorded as time-series information in the address table in relation to the plug-out processing.

  The communication history from the system controller α_1126 (or β_1128) after the unit 1290 (the combination module 1295, 1460, 1470 or the device 1250) previously arranged in the system α_1132 is moved outside the system α_1132 is checked. Thus, it can be determined whether or not this “plug-out” process can be executed. That is, when the “plug-out” process is performed, the unit 1290 (composite modules 1295, 1460, 1470 or the device 1250) is moved outside the system α_1132 after a predetermined period. 1470 or device 1250) is a communication history in which there is no information communication from the system controller α_1126 (or β_1128).

  That is, the system controller α_1126 (or β_1128) that performs management, operation, and control in the network communication system α_1132 transmits the communication information on the network line 1782 in the same system in units of physical layer frames PPDU in FIG. The placement position of is monitored. When the physical layer frame PPDU is transmitted from outside the system α_1132, the corresponding unit 1290 (composite module 1295, 1460, 1470 or device 1250) is deleted from the address table of FIG. 23 immediately after (confirmed by the user). The plug-out process is complete. Once the plug-out process is completed, there is no information communication from the system controller α_1126 (or β_1128) to the corresponding unit 1290 (composite module 1295, 1460, 1470 or device 1250) until the plug-in process is performed again.

  On the other hand, there is a case where the system controller α_1126 (or β_1128) temporarily does not recognize the fact that a specific unit 1290 (combination module 1295, 1460, 1470 or device 1250) has moved outside the system α_1126 due to timing. . In this case, information communication is performed from the system controller α_1126 (or β_1128) to the corresponding unit 1290 (combination module 1295, 1460, 1470 or device 1250). However, in this case, there is no answer to the system controller α_1126 (or β_1128). If no response is received, information communication is performed again. If no response is received twice, the corresponding part in the address table in FIG. 23 is deleted and the plug-out process is completed. In the middle of the plug-out process, the user may be inquired via the user I / F unit 1234 (FIGS. 8A and 8B) in the system controller α_1126.

  However, if it takes too long to move the specific unit 1290 (combination module 1295, 1460, 1470 or device 1250) out of the system α_1126 and complete the plug-out, it will be described later in section 4.3. The accuracy of the estimation / judgment of the system α_1132 and the user's behavior / request decreases. Here, as a delay time until the service provision corresponding to the state change, a general user allows a delay of about 5 minutes or 10 minutes. For users who are long minded, a delay of about 15 minutes is allowed. However, most users feel frustrated when the delay exceeds one hour. Therefore, in the system of this embodiment, the time required for completing plug-out after moving a specific unit 1290 (combination module 1295, 1460, 1470 or device 1250) outside the system α_1126 is preferably 15 minutes or less. 5 minutes or less. For the above reasons, the worst case is 1 hour or less.

  In this way, there is a great feature in “plug out unit 1290 (combination module 1295, 1460, 1470 or device 1250) that has gone out of the physical range of system α_1132”. Thus, by using the location of the unit 1290 (composite module 1295, 1460, 1470 or device 1250) for plug-out determination, a plug-in operation can be easily performed while maintaining high reliability without burdening the user. There is an effect. That is, when wireless is used as the physical communication medium (communication media) of the same system network line 1782 (FIG. 16), the personal information protection function is erroneously mixed with the network communication line in another adjacent domain 1122 There was a risk of falling. In order to avoid the above risk, complicated initial setting processing and plug-in / plug-out processing by the user are necessary. On the other hand, if the initial setting process and the plug-in / plug-out process can be performed without placing a burden on the user by using the arrangement position information that is automatically detected as described above, it is possible to prevent cross-connection with another adjacent network communication line. In addition, another effect that security and personal information protection functions can be ensured is produced.

  So far, the system controller α_1126 arranged in the system α_1132 has been described so as to perform a series of processes shown in FIG. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the system controller β_1128 and the server n_1116-n arranged outside the spatial arrangement of the system α_1132 are used as shown in FIG. May be performed.

Section 4.3 Processing method from information collection to service provision for each section In this section 4.3, concrete processing contents from “collection of sensor / status information to service provision to user” related to Step 105 in FIG. Will be explained. In particular, the features described in section 4.3 from the viewpoint of the system α_1132 (client system) are as follows. That is, the client system as the system of the present embodiment includes a unit 1290 having a function of acquiring or creating information and communicating and a system controller α_1126 that acquires and manages the information from the unit, and the system controller α_1126 includes a plurality of units. Each 1290 is divided into sections 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m and managed, and information (address table in FIG. 23) regarding the section to which each unit belongs is held. In addition, there is a feature that state change information from one unit 1290 is communicated to the system controller α_1126, and other units 1290 units in the same section 1142 are controlled based on the state change information. Further, the system controller α_1126 has another feature in that control of other units in the same section is performed using a state change at a predetermined time from one unit 1290.

  In addition, when the above characteristics are viewed from the relationship with the server n_1116-n (cloud) shown in FIG. 1, the system controller α_1126 is connected to an external cloud (server n_1116-n) as a server client system, The system controller α_1126 communicates the state change from one unit 1290 to the system controller α_1126 and transmits it to the cloud (server n_1116-n). The other unit 1290 in the same section is controlled based on information from the cloud (server n — 1116-n).

  In other words, the contents described in this section 4.3 have a great feature in “providing services based on a plurality of collected information”. For example, there is a problem that it is difficult to provide a service that satisfies the user because only the collected single information reduces the accuracy of estimation / judgment of the current state or user behavior and request. However, as described here, the accuracy of estimation / judgment is improved by “using a plurality of information”, so that there is an effect of improving user satisfaction by the provided service.

  On the other hand, there is also a great feature in “a plurality of state change controls (change of setting state) are performed in cooperation during service provision”). If a plurality of state change controls (change of setting conditions) within the same system α_1132 is performed as a service providing form corresponding to user behavior and requests, the user can be provided with a finely changed state, so that the user satisfaction level is high. An improvement effect is born.

  FIG. 26A shows a processing process in the system controller α_1126 until various information is collected from the system α_1132 and the service is provided. Here, the process of FIG. 26A is based on the embodiment system shown in FIG. 2 or 8A / B. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the system controller β_1128 arranged outside the system α_1132 as shown in FIG. 9 may perform information collection / service provision. In this case, it is necessary to change the system controller α_1126 in the following description to the system controller β_1128.

  First, upon receiving a service execution request (Step 110) from the server n_1116-n or the system controller β_1128, the system controller α_1126 starts collecting information from the system α_1132 (Step 111). Here, the information to be collected is not limited to sensor information from the sensor / communication module 1460, but sensor information from the various sensor modules 1260 in the device 1250, current setting state information in the drive / communication module 1470, device Current setting status information for 1250 (mainly drive module 1270 within) is included. Furthermore, as shown in Step 112, the system controller α_1126 may collect information from the server n_1116-n or the system controller β_1128. When a series of information collection is completed in this way, all collected information is integrated and organized in the system controller α_1126, and necessary information is stored in the internal memory unit 1232 (Step 113).

  Then, as the next step, the state in the same system α_1132 is estimated and judged (Step 114). Further, based on the estimated / determined state, the user's current action content is estimated and determined (Step 115). Here, the estimation / determination of the state of Step 114 or the estimation / determination of the current behavior of the user of Step 115 includes, for example, Judgments are also made. As an example in which the estimation / determination result of the user state affects service provision to the user (Step 119), sensitivity setting of a touch pad or a capacitive button is raised. For example, a large adult with a thick finger can perform stable user input even if the sensitivity of the touch pad or the capacitive button is low. On the other hand, children and women with thin fingers may not be able to cope without increasing the sensitivity of the touchpad and capacitive buttons. Therefore, the estimation / determination result of the user state affects the service provision to the user. In order to change the sensitivity setting of the touch pad or the capacitive button after estimating / determining the thickness of the user's finger, the communication information described in section 2.5 is changed.

  Based on the state / judgment (Step 114) result in the system α_1132 and the user's current behavior estimation / judgment (Step 115), the user's future behavior prediction (Step 116) and the user request estimation / prediction (Step 117). I do.

  Thereafter, the series of estimation / prediction results are displayed on the user I / F unit 1234 (FIGS. 8A and 8B), and the user is inquired and confirmed (Step 118). If the series of estimation / prediction results are incorrect, the process is restarted from the estimation / prediction of the state in the system α_1132 in Step 114. If the confirmation content to the user is correct, a service to the user at Step 119 is provided. Then, a series of processing processes up to provision of service to this user are repeated as appropriate. In addition, at the necessary timing, the service provision is notified to the server n_1116-n or the system controller β_1128 (Step 109).

  The various estimation / judgment processes executed in Step 114 to Step 117 in FIG. 26A are characterized in that this embodiment uses a plurality of information collected in Step 111 or Step 112. In addition, the estimation / determination accuracy is improved by using a plurality of pieces of information rather than the estimation / determination using only single information. The situation will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 26B.

When the state changes in the system α_1132 or when the user acts,
○ The situation in which any of the units 1290 (device 1250 or combination module 1295, 1460, 1470) moves across the section 1142, or ○ various information obtained from the unit 1290 (device 1250 or combination module 1295, 1460, 1470) There are many situations where the content changes. Therefore, if only the section 1142 corresponding to the above is selected in the system α_1132 and the above-described series of estimation / judgment processing is performed only in the corresponding section 1142, the processing efficiency in the system controller α_1126 increases. The process of finding the section 1142 in which one of the two situations occurs corresponds to Step 120 in FIG. 26B. The operation of extracting the unit 1290 (device 1250 or combination module 1295, 1460, 1470) arranged in the section 1142 corresponds to Step 121. In this step 121, the address table of FIG. 23 is used.

  Information is collected for a plurality of modules arranged in the same section 1142 from among the sensor module 1260, the drive module 1270, the sensor / communication module 1460, and the drive / communication module 1470 described in the address table. As a specific example, as shown in case 2 of FIG. 10B, a response request (request) 1872 is transmitted to each of a plurality of target modules from the system controller α_1126, and a response (response) 1874 is obtained.

  In particular, as a service providing method to the user shown in FIG. 26B, a state that does not conform to the estimation / determination result performed for each section 1142 is automatically extracted, and state change control or setting state change is performed on the non-conforming portion. Follow the instructions to process the calibration. An example of this service providing method is shown below. For example, when “the user tried to leave the room and turn off the lighting and TV in the room where he was in the past”, the condition “the air conditioner in the turned off room is still in operation” is automatically set as a non-conforming state. A method of “automatically controlling the operation state of the air conditioner” is extracted as an adaptation process. Particularly important here is that it is difficult to predict what the user wants to do in the future from the single information that “the user has turned off the TV in the room where the user was present”. However, in addition to that, by collecting a plurality of pieces of information in the same section 1142 “turning off the room lights”, the accuracy of estimation / determination is improved. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, “extracting a state that does not match the estimated / determined result” as described above has an effect of providing an efficient service to the user.

  The above examples of “turning off the TV in the room where the user has been present” and “turning off the lighting in the room” are the units 1290 (device 1250 and combined modules 1295, 1460, 1470) corresponding to various sense information collection and current state information collection (Step 122). Then, after collecting a plurality of pieces of information in the same section 1142 (Step 122), state estimation / determination (Step 123) in the corresponding section, estimation / determination of user behavior (Step 125), and estimation / determination of user request (Step 127) are performed. . Then, information that is incompatible with each estimation / judgment result is extracted (Steps 124, 126, and 128), and a state change control method (setting state changing method) for adapting the extracted incompatibility information to the estimation / judgment result is presented to the user. An inquiry is made (Step 129). This inquiry to the user may use display on the user I / F unit 1234 in the system controller α_1126. Here, when the user denies, the estimation / judgment using the collected plural information (Steps 123, 125, 127) is performed again.

  At the stage of obtaining permission from the user as a result of the inquiry to the user, a command 1852 (Case 1 in FIG. 10B) is given to the drive module 1270 incorporated in the device or the drive module 1270 in the drive / communication module 1470. The state change in the section 1142 is controlled (the setting of the state is changed) to provide a service to the user (Step 130).

In connection with Step 120 of FIG. 26B,
○ Extraction of unit 1290 (device 1250 and combination module 1295, 1460, 1470) that moves across section 1142 ○ Information obtained from unit 1290 (device 1250 and combination module 1295, 1460, 1470) and the contents changed To extract
The left side of the time-series information tracking table in FIG. 27 / FIG. 28 (b) may be used. This time-series information tracking table is a record of the history of various information collected by the system controller α_1126 and the history of various estimations / judgments performed based on the history in the form of a list in time series along the elapsed time 2310. Information is added to the information in a timely manner and stored in the memory unit 1232 in the system controller α_1126. 27/28 (b), various sensor information obtained from the various sensor modules 1260-1 and 2260-1 in the device 1250-1 in FIG. 8A or the state (setting) set in the drive module 1270-1. Value) are all described in the form of state A or the like. Further, the number of the section in which the device 1250-1 is arranged is also described. On the other hand, the sense information of the sensor / communication module 1460-5 obtained as the sense information with binary values is also described on the left side of the time series information tracking table. In addition, a section number in which the sensor / communication module 1460-5 is arranged, which is obtained as a result of position detection by a method described later in section 4.4, is also described.

  For example, the sensor / communication module 1460-5 incorporates a light detection sensor module, and a user wearing this sensor / communication module 1460-5 has a section 2_1142-5 in which the illumination is turned off from the section 2_1142-2 in which the illumination is turned on. An example in the case of moving to will be described. In this case, when the elapsed time 2310 is “t3”, the sensor / communication module 1460-5 is arranged in the section 2_1142-2. Further, the optical information detected by the sensor / communication module 1460-5 is “present”. When the user moves between the elapsed time 2310 and “t3” to “t4”, the moved sensor / communication module 1460-5 is arranged in the section 5_1142-5. In addition, the optical information detected at this time changes to “none”. By using the time-series information tracking table in this way, it is possible to easily extract the movement of the device 1250 and the combined modules 1460 and 1470 across the section 1142 and the change in the collected information content.

  In the estimation / judgment processing performed at Steps 114 to 117 in FIG. 26A and Steps 123, 125, and 127 in FIG. First, candidates for estimation / judgment results regarding the state item 2320 for each section 1142 such as “use in a predetermined section” are set in advance as state α, state β... Write sequentially in the row direction. On the other hand, for example, states collected as information from the device 1250-1 such as “air conditioner operation is in operation” and “air conditioner timer setting time” are state A, state B,... Are sequentially written in the column direction. Further, for example, sensor information such as sensor information detected from the sensor / communication module 1460-5 for detecting “light presence / absence” and a state setting value indicating the current state in the drive / communication module 1470-2 are also estimated / Write sequentially in the vertical column direction of the decision collation table. The correlation coefficient value between them is described in the corresponding cell in this estimation / judgment collation table. As this correlation coefficient value, for example, when there is a positive correlation between the state A in “air conditioner operation is active” and the state α in the state item 2320 such as “in a predetermined section is in use”, “80” is described in the corresponding cell as the correlation coefficient value. Further, there is a positive correlation between the “light” information in the same section 1142 obtained from the sensor / communication module 1460-5 and the state α in the state item 2320 such as “used state in a predetermined section”. Even if there is, “57” is described in the corresponding cell as the correlation coefficient value. On the other hand, when there is a negative correlation (inverse correlation), a negative value may be described in the corresponding cell as a correlation coefficient.

  At the time of state estimation / judgment in the section 1142, the sum of correlation coefficients in the same column is calculated for each state α, β,. Then, it is estimated / determined that the state α, β,... With the highest total value indicates the state in the corresponding section 1142. Thus, by calculating the total value of the correlation coefficients in the same column, a plurality of pieces of collection information in the same section 1142 can be used instead of the single collection information. By using a plurality of pieces of collected information in this way, not only multi-faceted estimation / determination can be performed, but also the accuracy of estimation / determination can be improved.

  Similarly, estimation / judgment result candidates related to the user's action item 2440 are set in advance as action α, action β,... Further, the estimation / judgment result candidates related to the user's request item 2360 are also set in advance as request α, request β,... Further, each correlation coefficient value is entered in the corresponding cell in the same manner as described above.

  Further, as the elapsed time 2310, the total value of the correlation coefficient is calculated for each column of the actions α and β and the columns of the requests α and β every t1, t2, t3,..., And the values of the action probability 2350 and the request probability 2370 are calculated. As shown in FIG. 27 / FIG. 28 (b), the corresponding information on the right side of the time-series information tracking table is sequentially entered.

  By using the time series information tracking table, the state in the section 1142, the user's action and the request can be estimated / determined in real time. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 27 / FIG. 28B, an example of a service providing method using this time series information tracking table will be described. For example, consider the case where the user moves from the illuminated section 2_1142-2 to the unlit section 5_1142-5 while carrying the sensor / communication module 1460-5. In this case, since the illumination in the section 2_1142-2 is kept on, there is not much change in the value of the state probability 2330 of the state α representing “used in the corresponding section” in the section 2_1142-2. In comparison, the action probability 2350 of action α corresponding to “user movement” has risen sharply from 4% to 87% between t3 and t4. As a result, it can be estimated / determined that “the user has moved between t3 and t4”. Further, the request probability of the request α corresponding to the request “I want to turn on the lighting of the section 5 — 1142-5” also increases rapidly from 4% to 98% between t3 and t4.

  Then, by utilizing this time series information tracking table, for example, the result of the estimation / determination of the user request shown in Step 127 of FIG. 26B that “I want to turn on the lighting of section 5 — 1142-5” is obtained. In this case, as information that is incompatible with the user request, information that “the section 5 — 1142-5 has no light” is obtained from the sensor / communication module 1460-5. As a response to this, a service is provided to the user of Step 130. Specifically, the setting / change command (command issuance) 1852 from the system controller α_1126 to the drive / communication module 1470-2 that operates to “turn on the illumination in the section 5 — 1142-5” (see FIG. 10B). Is issued.

  In the above description, state estimation / determination inside each section 1142, estimation / determination of user behavior based on information collected for each section 1142, and estimation / determination of user requests are mainly described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as another embodiment, for example, estimation or determination may be performed on the state of the entire system α_1132, or estimation / determination of user behavior or estimation / estimation of user request based on information collected from the entire system α_1132. Judgment may be made.

  Next, the service providing method to the user described in Step 119 of FIG. 26A or Step 130 of FIG. 26B will be described with reference to FIG. First, based on the extraction result of the nonconformity information performed in Steps 124, 126, and 128 of FIG. (Step 141) is performed. Thereafter, after making an inquiry to the user (Step 129), as shown in Step 142 to Step 143, the setting state is sequentially changed (state change control).

  Here, as an example described above, when the lighting is turned off in the section 5_1142-5 of the user movement destination, the air conditioner and the television may be stopped. Therefore, when non-conformance information is extracted in Steps 124, 126, and 128 of FIG. In this case, as shown in Step 142 to Step 143 of FIG. 29, the setting state is sequentially changed (state change control) for the plurality of items, or the setting state is changed for some of the items at the same time (state There is a big feature in the place where change control is performed. As a result, there is an effect that the time required for setting the optimum environment within the same section 5_1142-5 can be shortened.

  When the setting state is changed sequentially (simultaneously or simultaneously) for a plurality of items in this way, as shown in case 1 in FIG. 10B, a plurality of units 1290 (drive / communication modules) are connected from the same system controller α_1126. 1470 or device 1250), information communication corresponding to a plurality of commands (command issue) 1852 is performed sequentially or simultaneously. In each physical layer frame PPDU (FIG. 11 (f)) indicating communication information corresponding to a plurality of commands (command issuance) 1852, the contents of the transmission side IP address information SIPADRS (FIG. 13 (b)) are all included. The transmission side address information in the communication middleware layers APL02 and APL06 (for example, the PAN-specific identification information SPANID on the transmission side in FIG. 12A (e) and the content of the IEEE extended address SEXADRS on the transmission side) match. Furthermore, some information on the receiving side, such as PAN-specific identification information DPANID on the receiving side in FIG. 12A (e), may also coincide.

  Therefore, when the setting state is changed (state change control) sequentially or simultaneously for a plurality of items, the system controller α_1126 (or the system controller β_1128 in the system shown in FIG. 9) does not put another process in the middle and collects them. It is desirable to perform information communication corresponding to the command (command issue) 1852 corresponding to the above. When information communication is performed collectively as described above, a plurality of different pieces of communication information can be created by the common information copying process described above. Therefore, the use of the above method has an effect of improving the processing efficiency of the system controller α_1126 (or the system controller β_1128 in the system shown in FIG. 9).

  Already in Section 4.2, “General users can tolerate delays of up to about 5 or 10 minutes as a delay time until the provision of services in response to state changes. However, when the delay exceeds 1 hour, most users feel dissatisfied. Therefore, in the system according to the present embodiment, when the service for a plurality of items is sequentially performed, the service to be provided continuously The time difference between them is 15 minutes or less, preferably 5 minutes or less, and within one hour at the worst. This has the effect of minimizing the stress on the user.

  The above description has mainly focused on providing services for each section 1142. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the entire system α_1132 may be provided as a service.

  Already in the above description, “The user has moved from the illuminated section 2_1142-2 to the unlit section 5_1142-5 while carrying the sensor / communication module 1460-5”, and attached to the service providing method. Explained. In this regard, a supplementary explanation regarding a processing method when a specific unit 1290 (device 1250 or combination module 1295, 1460, 1470) moves between different sections 1142 will be given.

  In this case, as shown in Step of FIG. 30, it is necessary to extract section information before and after the movement of the unit 1290 (device 1250 or combination module 1295, 1460, 1470). For this extraction, the time-series information tracking table of FIG. 27 / FIG. 28B described above is useful. Here, in the section row of the sensor / communication module 1460-5 in FIG. 27/28 (b), it changes from “2” to “5” between the elapsed times 2310t3 and t3. By searching for this change place, section information before and after movement can be easily extracted. In this case, there are many cases where services are provided particularly for sections before and after movement. Therefore, the system of this embodiment is provided in a place where a specific unit 1290 (device 1250 or combination module 1295, 1460, 1470) provides services to both of the sections 2 — 1122-2 and 5 — 1122-5 before and after moving. There are features. As described above, the system controller α_1126 (or the system controller β_1128 corresponding to the system of FIG. 9) provides services to the user efficiently by intensively providing the sections 2_1122-2 and 5_1122-5 before and after the movement. Yes. Here, a series of processing processes from Step 155 to Step 158 in FIG. 30 coincide with the processing processes in FIG. 26B. Further, as shown in Step 151 of FIG. 30, the unit 1290 (device 1250 and combination modules 1295, 1460, 1470) arranged in the pre-movement section 2_1122-2 is extracted. Then, through the same processing process, the service is provided to the user in the pre-movement section 2_1122-2 (Step 130). Further, as already described above, the setting state change (state change control) may be performed sequentially or simultaneously with respect to a plurality of items in the pre-movement section 2_1122-2.

  In addition, when providing services to both the front and rear sections 2_1122-2 and 5_1122-5 simultaneously or sequentially, as described above, the system controller α_1126 (or the system controller β_1128 in the system shown in FIG. 9) It is desirable to perform information communication corresponding to the command (command issue) 1852 corresponding to the above without putting another process. When information communication is performed collectively as described above, a plurality of different pieces of communication information can be created by the common information copying process described above. Therefore, the use of the above method has an effect of improving the processing efficiency of the system controller α_1126 (or the system controller β_1128 in the system shown in FIG. 9).

Section 4.4 Method for Tracking Movement between Sections of Various Modules and Various Devices In this section 4.4, a method of detecting the position where the communication module 1202 built in the device 1250 and the communication module 1660 built in the composite module are arranged. Will be described.

  When wireless is used as a physical communication medium (communication media) used on the same system network line 1782 in FIG. 10A, there is a time when radio waves are emitted from the communication modules 1202 and 1660. To do. Using this timing, the feature of this embodiment is that “the positions of the communication modules 1202 and 1660 or the devices and composite modules in which they are incorporated are detected from the emission position of the radio wave”. GPS technology is known as a conventional method for detecting a device position. However, as long as this technology is adopted, only GPS-related parts mounted on the device are expensive. On the other hand, the above method does not require any additional parts necessary for position detection, so that the communication modules 1202 and 1660 (or devices and composite modules incorporating them) can be reduced in price and size. Yes.

  In addition to the above-described GPS technology for knowing position information, a technology called beacon is known. The GPS technology uses radio waves emitted from artificial satellites. In contrast, the beacon technology described above uses terrestrial radio waves used in the near field wireless standard called Bluetooth, for example. That is, a plurality of devices that transmit the above-described short-range radio waves are installed at a plurality of locations on the ground, and the short-range radio waves transmitted from each device are received to calculate the relative reception location. However, this method also requires a circuit for determining the position on the receiving side, which increases the circuit scale of the receiver, increasing the size and price of the receiver. In contrast, the system of the present embodiment does not require voluntary position detection in the composite module 1295 (or unit 1290) that requires position detection, and thus the price of the target composite module 1295 (or unit 1290) is reduced. And miniaturization becomes possible.

  FIG. 31 shows the position detection principle in this embodiment. Here, the system controller α_1126 and the devices 1250-1 and 4250 that receive the wireless radio wave and detect the position of the transmission source each have a built-in GPS function. Therefore, the installation locations of the system controller α_1126 and the devices 1250-1 and 4 are known in advance. Then, the radio wave emission position is measured using the radio wave characteristics when these system controller α_1126 and the devices 1250-1 and 4 receive.

  And, there is the following characteristic in that “the reception timing (reception timing) of the radio wave is used for position detection” on the receiving side (system controller α_1126 or device 1250-1, 4) involved in position detection. Then, “in a network communication system having a plurality of wireless radio wave transmission sources, the transmission source is identified using the reception timing (reception timing) of the radio wave”. Alternatively, it may be said that “in a network communication system having a plurality of wireless radio wave transmission sources, the transmission source is identified using communication information contents”. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 31, the sensor / communication module 1460-5 and the drive / communication module 1470-3 have different timings for emitting radio waves. Therefore, it is possible to identify the radio wave emitted from either the sensor / communication module 1460-5 or the drive / communication module 1470-3 based on the reception timing. Thus, by using the reception timing of the radio wave for position detection, a plurality of different positions can be detected at the same time, and there is an effect of improving the efficiency of position detection. On the other hand, the position detection method in the present embodiment is not limited to the above, and a signal from a beacon (compliant with the Bluetooth Smart standard) may be used as another method.

  A specific method for identifying a radio wave transmission source will be described. On the same system network line 1782, information communication is performed in units of chunks of the physical layer frame PPDU shown in FIG. Here, the system controller α_1126 controls or manages the system network line 1782 so that physical layer frames PPDU transmitted from a plurality of different transmission sources do not overlap at the same time.

  Further, address information indicating a transmission source is stored in the one physical layer frame PPDU. As a specific example, the transmission side IP address information SIPADRS of FIG. 13B described in section 2.4 can be used for transmission source identification. In addition, the information stored in the MAC layer header MACHD (FIG. 11A) is not limited to this, and the IEEE extension address SEXADRS on the transmission side in FIG. May be used. Therefore, the radio wave characteristic at the time of reception is measured on the radio wave receiving side, and the source address information described in the corresponding physical layer frame PPDU is decoded. Thereby, the radio wave characteristic for every radio wave transmission source can be acquired.

  Further, there is a further feature in that “positional information of a transmission source is calculated by comparing radio wave characteristics at a plurality of locations received simultaneously”. Thus, by using the radio wave characteristics at a plurality of locations, there is an effect of improving the position detection accuracy. Here, as a radio wave characteristic used for detecting the position of the transmission source, there is a method of using “radio wave intensity”. That is, in an ideal state, the radio field intensity at the reception location is inversely proportional to the square of the distance to the transmission source. Therefore, by comparing the received radio wave intensity for each of the system controller α_1126 and the devices 1250-1 and 4, the relative position information of the sensor / communication module 1460-5 and the drive / communication module 1470-3 can be estimated.

  Further, “radio wave phase” may be used as another radio wave characteristic used for detecting the position of the transmission source. That is, since the phase of the radio wave at the time of reception differs according to the distance between the transmission source and the reception partner, this phenomenon is used for position detection. The relative position information of the sensor / communication module 1460-5 and the drive / communication module 1470-3 can be estimated by comparing the phases of the radio waves when the system controller α_1126 and the devices 1250-1, 4 are simultaneously received.

  However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and “radio wave traveling direction” may be used as another wireless radio wave characteristic used for detecting the position of the transmission source. As a method of detecting the traveling direction of this radio wave, this implementation is performed in a place where "detection signals obtained from multiple receivers with different detection sensitivities relative to the traveling direction of the radio wave are compared to measure the traveling direction of the radio wave". There are features of form. Furthermore, there is the following feature in the “location detection using trigonometry” from the traveling direction of the radio wave emitted from the transmission source obtained here. If this embodiment is used, there is an effect that the position of the transmission source can be detected with high accuracy by a very inexpensive facility. Further, the radio wave characteristics used for position detection in the present embodiment are not limited to “radio wave traveling direction”, but may be combined with reception intensity, reception phase, or other radio wave characteristics.

  For example, if the system controller α_1126 and the device 1250-1 in FIG. 31 can individually detect the traveling direction of the radio wave transmitted from the sensor / communication module 1460-5, the transmission source can be easily and accurately used using “trigonometry”. Can be detected. As long as the trigonometry is used here, the position can be detected if there are at least two reception points of the radio wave. (1) The system controller α_1126 performs management / operation / control of information communication on the system network line 1782, (2) the system controller α_1126 always analyzes information in the physical layer frame PPDU, and (3) radio wave The system controller α_1126 preferably serves as one of the above radio wave reception points because it is more efficient if the characteristic detection location and the transmission source location calculation location are physically close. Then, a general device 1250 with a built-in GPS function may be used as another radio wave reception point, or a transmission source position detection dedicated device may be installed.

  Next, a fundamental method of measuring the traveling direction of radio waves will be described with reference to FIG. As an example, the detection sensitivity of the polaroid antenna 2760 used for terrestrial reception or the like has direction dependency of received radio waves. For example, the polaroid antenna 2760 from which the detection signal α is obtained has the highest detection sensitivity when the received radio wave comes from the direction A, and the detection sensitivity to the received radio wave coming from the B or C direction is low. In this way, the polaroid antenna 2760 has a characteristic that “the detection sensitivity differs with respect to the traveling direction of the radio wave”. On the other hand, the polara antenna 2760 from which the detection signal β is obtained has the highest detection sensitivity when the received radio wave comes from the direction B. High sensitivity. Therefore, in principle, the traveling direction of the received radio wave can be predicted by simultaneously receiving the received radio waves arriving from an arbitrary direction by the three polara antennas 2760 and comparing the intensities among the detection signals α, β, and γ. . The process of predicting the traveling direction of the received radio wave corresponds to a method of “measuring the traveling direction of the radio wave by comparing each detection signal obtained from a plurality of receiving units”.

FIG. 32A shows a direction detecting antenna structure with higher direction accuracy. This basic structure includes a stealth plate 2730 configured in a substantially triangular pyramid shape or a substantially quadrangular pyramid shape. An antenna 2710-1 is arranged in a cross shape on the side surface of the substantially triangular pyramid or substantially quadrangular pyramid. This antenna 2710-1 is composed of a pair of antennas orthogonal to each other. Here, as indicated by a solid line in FIG. 32A, only one set of antennas 2710-1 orthogonal to a cross shape may be arranged on one side surface of the stealth plate 2730. Further, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of sets of antennas 2710-1 to 2710-1 orthogonal to a cross shape may be arranged on one side surface of the stealth plate 2730 as indicated by a broken line in FIG. Here, the antennas 2710-2 and 3 shown by broken lines in FIG. 32B are attached to the antenna 2710-1 orthogonal to the cross shape by rotating by 30 degrees. Using the antenna 2710-1 arranged in a cross shape, A) reception of communication information on the intra-system network line 1782 and B) position detection of the transmission source
Do both. Here, an amplifier and a signal processing circuit 2720 are arranged between the antennas 2710-1 to 2710-3 arranged in a cross shape. In addition, detection signals α, β, γ, and δ are obtained from each amplifier and signal processing circuit 2720 individually. It does not have to be in the shape of a triangular pyramid or a quadrangular pyramid, and the side surfaces of the plurality of stealth plates 2730 need only be in different directions.

  However, the detection sensitivity of the cross-shaped antenna 2710 arranged on the side surface of the stealth plate 2730 in FIG. Accordingly, the pair of cross-shaped antennas 2710 corresponds to the above-described “receiving unit having different detection sensitivity with respect to the traveling direction of the radio wave”. The comparison between the individual detection signals α, β, γ, and δ obtained from each amplifier and the signal processing circuit 2720 corresponds to the “comparison of each detection signal” described above.

  FIG. 33A shows an enlarged view of one side surface of FIG. The stealth plate 2730 arranged on the back side of the cross-shaped antenna 2710 serves to (1) prevent radio waves from entering the cross-shaped antenna 2710 from the back side and (2) absorb radio waves that have passed through the cross-shaped antenna 2710. Fulfill. Thus, by arranging the stealth plate 2730 on the back side of the “antenna 2710 for detecting the traveling direction of the radio wave”, the effect of improving the position detection accuracy of the transmission source by suppressing the reflection of unnecessary radio waves that lower the detection accuracy is obtained. Yes. In order to exert this effect, the stealth plate 2730 has a two-layer structure as shown in FIG. This inner layer is composed of a metal plate layer 2734 having a fine concavo-convex structure on the surface. Thus, by arranging the metal plate layer on the back side, the transmission of radio waves is firmly prevented, and the penetration of radio waves from the back side to the cross-shaped antenna 2710 is prevented.

  However, radio waves are reflected on the surface of the metal plate layer 2734. Accordingly, various measures are taken so that the radio waves reflected here do not enter the cross-shaped antenna 2710. As one of the devices, as shown in FIG. 33C, the side surface of the substantially triangular pyramid or the substantially quadrangular pyramid is curved. By making the curved surface in this way, the traveling direction of the incident radio wave 2800 incident substantially in parallel is changed at the incident position. Further, the surface of the metal plate layer 2734 has a fine uneven structure, and the incident radio wave 2800 incident substantially in parallel is diffusely reflected.

  The original purpose (2) of the stealth plate 2730 is not to reflect the radio waves but to absorb the radio waves. In order to realize this function (2), a weakly conductive organic layer 2738 having a fine concavo-convex structure on both the front and back surfaces is disposed on the metal plate layer 2734 having a fine concavo-convex structure on the surface inside the stealth plate 2730. . As a detailed structure of the weakly conductive organic layer 2738 having a fine concavo-convex structure on both the front and back surfaces, a structure in which metal powder is solidified with an organic layer may be used, or the whole may be formed of a weakly conductive organic substance. The incident radio wave 2800 is absorbed in the weakly conductive organic layer 2738. However, since the incident radio wave 2800 cannot be completely absorbed only within the weakly conductive organic layer 2738, the incident radio wave 2800 is irregularly reflected on the uneven surface. Further, the irregular reflection efficiency is increased between the weakly conductive organic layer 2738 having a fine concavo-convex structure on both the front and back surfaces and the metal plate layer 2734 having a fine concavo-convex structure on the surface, and the radio waves diffused here are weakly conductive organic layers. 2738 is prevented from reaching the cross-shaped antenna 2710 by being absorbed in 2738.

  The detailed structure of the cross-shaped antenna 2710-1 shown in FIG. 32A and the principle relating to the detection signal characteristics will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 34 (a), the cross antenna 2710 has an internal structure in which two antennas 2710 arranged in the horizontal direction (X direction) are connected by a resistor 2920 and in the vertical direction (Y direction). Are combined from a structure in which two antennas 2710 arranged in FIG. In this connection, not only the resistor 2920 but also a capacitor and an inductance may be appropriately arranged for the connection between the two antennas 2710 in order to improve the frequency characteristic of signal detection. The amplifier and signal processing circuit 2720 includes voltage difference units 2940-1 and 2940-1 and 2 that detect a voltage difference generated between the resistors 2920 and an adder 2960 that adds signals obtained from the respective units. .

For example, as shown in FIG. 32B, when a radio wave having a polarization plane inclined by θ with respect to the horizontal axis (X axis) and having an electric field amplitude A passes through the cross antenna 2710 in the vertical direction, From the voltage differencer 2940-1
A ² e ^i2ωt cos ² θ (1)
Is obtained from the voltage differencer 2940-2.
A ² e ^i2ωt sin ² θ (2)
Is obtained. In the equations (1) and (2), the phase term of the detection signal is represented by a complex number. Therefore, the output signal from the adder 2960 obtained by adding the above signals is
A ² e ^i2ωt (3)
It becomes. This equation (3) has a great feature in that the tilt angle θ of the polarization plane does not appear. That is, it can be seen that, as long as the radio wave passes through the cross antenna 2710 in the vertical direction, the obtained detection signal has a constant characteristic without depending on the tilt angle θ of the polarization plane.

Further, as shown in FIG. 34 (c), an output signal from the adder 2960 when a radio wave passes at an angle inclined by ξ from the vertical direction of the cross antenna 2710 is
A ² e ^i2ωt sin ² ξ (4)
Given in. The above equation (4) shows that the output signal of the adder 2960 changes depending on the traveling direction of the radio wave with respect to the cruciform antenna 2710 (inclination angle from the vertical direction of the cruciform antenna 2710). Yes. Therefore, the output signals α, β, γ, and δ (from the adder 2960) obtained from the cross-shaped antennas 2710 arranged on the stealth plates 2710 facing different directions as shown in FIG. By applying the above equation (4), the traveling direction of the radio wave can be calculated.

  When the inclination angle ξ is particularly small in FIG. 34 (c), the output signal amount is likely to be greatly dependent on the vibration plane of radio waves. In order to alleviate the adverse effects, a plurality of sets of cruciform antennas 2710-2 and 3 having rotation angles with each other as indicated by broken lines in FIG. Then, among the output signals obtained by the individual cruciform antennas 2710-1 to 2710-1, only the output signal greatly different from the other output signals is discarded, and the average of the remaining two output signals is taken, so that the inclination angle ξ is small. In this case, the detection signal error can be reduced.

  As shown in the above equation (3), when the antennas 2710 are arranged at right angles (without being affected by the plane of polarization), the traveling direction of the radio wave can be measured efficiently. However, the present invention is not limited thereto (if any correction is made when calculating the traveling direction of the radio wave), the antennas 2710 may be arranged at an arbitrary angle. Furthermore, the shape of the antenna 2710 is not limited to the linear shape described above, and other shapes such as a “leaf shape” as shown in FIG.

  In the method of detecting the position of the transmission source from the traveling direction of the radio wave, the detection accuracy may be reduced due to reflection in the middle of the traveling path of the radio wave such as a wall or ceiling. As a countermeasure, radio waves in a plurality of different frequency bands may be used for position detection. For example, 2.4 GHz and 915 MHz, 950 MHz, and 868 MHz frequency bands can be used depending on the region as reference frequencies used for short-range wireless communication. Accordingly, for example, wireless communication at the different reference frequencies may be performed in parallel. The reflection characteristics in the middle of the traveling path of radio waves such as walls and ceilings vary depending on the reference frequency used. Therefore, if the respective position detection results using wireless communication at different reference frequencies are compared, the position detection accuracy of the transmission source is improved.

  In addition, as described above, when the trigonometry is used for position detection, it is possible to detect the position of the transmission source basically by measuring the traveling direction of the radio wave at two locations. However, the traveling direction of the radio wave may be measured at three or more reception points in consideration of prevention of position detection accuracy deterioration due to reflection in the course of the radio wave traveling path. In this way, the measurement results at three or more reception points are compared to improve the position detection accuracy and reliability of the transmission source. Further, not only one of the above, but also a method of increasing the number of reception points for position detection and increasing the reference frequency to be used may be combined. As described above, the above-described device has an effect of improving the position detection accuracy of the transmission source.

Section 4.5 Compatibility of Units (Composite Modules and Devices) between Different Systems The system α_1132 in the system of this embodiment is a system applied to the social infrastructure field from a system applied to the consumer field or a system applied to the healthcare field. There is a feature that can be applied to a wide range of network communication systems. Furthermore, in the system of this embodiment, as described in section 4.2, the initial setting (Check-in), plug-in, and plug-out of the unit 1290 (device 1250 and composite module 1295, 1460, 1470) in the system α_1132 are not performed. There are features that make it very easy. When the above features are combined, the system of the present embodiment creates a new feature of “unit 1290 (device 1250 or composite module 1295, 1460, 1470) that can be easily incorporated and used in a plurality of different types of systems”. . Further, “the same unit 1290 (device 1250 or combination module 1295, 1460, 1470) can be diverted (divided) across a plurality of different systems”).

  Therefore, by using the system of this embodiment, an effect that the versatility of the unit 1290 (device 1250 or composite module 1295, 1460, 1470) for a very wide range of application fields can be ensured is produced. In particular, when the composite modules 1295, 1460, and 1470 have versatility in a very wide range of application fields, it is easy to reduce the price of the composite modules 1295, 1460, and 1470 due to mass production effects. Further, since the low-priced combination modules 1295, 1460, and 1470 can be used across a plurality of different systems, the usability of the combination modules 1295, 1460, and 1470 is greatly improved.

  The relationship between a plurality of systems α_1132 and system β_1134 used across the same unit 1290 (device 1250 or combination module 1295, 1460, 1470) is included in the same domain 2_1122-2 as shown in FIG. Also good. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the system α_1132 and the system β_1134 may belong to different domains 1_1122-1 and 2_1122-2, respectively.

  In Section 4.5, the initial setting (Check-in), plug-in, and plug-out methods of the unit 1290 (device 1250 and composite modules 1295, 1460, 1470) between a plurality of different systems α_1132 and β_1134 are described. explain.

  First, the case where the functions of the system α_1132 and the system β_1134 are different will be described. In this case, the system controller α_1126 in the system α_1132 and the system controller β_1128 in the system β_1134 individually perform system suitability / nonconformity identification processing for the unit 1290 (device 1250 and composite modules 1295, 1460, 1470). If the system conformity / non-conformance identification target is the device 1250, the exchange information 1810 (see FIG. 10B) is stored in the communication middleware layer APL06 as described in section 2.1 using FIG. 16 or FIG. 17B. Identify by exchanging. On the other hand, when the identification target of the system conformity / non-conformance is the composite module 1295, 1460, 1470, the communication information in the media access layer MAC02 is used as described in section 2.1 using FIG. 10A. Identify. For example, as described in Section 2.3 with reference to FIG. 12A (e), the IEEE extended address SEXADRS on the transmission side included in the communication information transmitted from the composite modules 1295, 1460, and 1470 may be used. In this case, the server n_1116-n is accessed via the Internet from the obtained information of the IEEE extended address SEXADRS to obtain the feature information of the composite modules 1295, 1460, and 1470, and the system suitability / non-fitness is identified. Also good.

  As a result of the above processing, if the corresponding unit 1290 (device 1250 or combination module 1295, 1460, 1470) is determined to be compatible with the system, the user I / F unit 1234 (FIG. 2, FIG. 9 or FIG. 8A / B) is Confirm whether it can be incorporated into the corresponding system by the end user.

  When the functions of the system α_1132 and the system β_1134 coincide with each other, as described in section 4.2, the location information where the unit 1290 (the device 1250 or the combination module 1295, 1460, 1470) is arranged is used. To identify whether the system is compatible or not.

  Next, a situation that occurs when the same unit 1290 (device 1250 or combination module 1295, 1460, 1470) is used across a plurality of systems α_1132, systems β_1134, and the like, and a coping method will be described. As an example of the unit 1290, a C-format as shown in FIG. 17A may be used as the communication middleware layer APL02 used when the composite module 1295 performs information communication with the system controller β_1128. In addition, other formats may be used for information communication with the composite module 1295 as the communication middleware layer APL02. On the other hand, as another example of the unit 1290, the communication middleware layer APL06 used when the device 1250 performs information communication with the system controller β_1128 includes an A-format, an E-format, and a W-format as shown in FIG. Or the extended application layer EXL06 may be used. As described above, the formats used in the communication middleware layers APL02 and APL06 are allowed to be different depending on the unit 1290 (device 1250 or combination module 1295 or 3583) used.

  FIG. 36A shows a configuration example of a system controller 3581 capable of mutual communication with various units 1290 (composite module 3583). In FIG. 36A, various processing execution units are shown in a hardware form for ease of explanation. As described above, the structure in the system controller 3581 may be configured by a connection in hardware form. In addition, as shown in FIG. 2, when the system controller α_1126 is composed of a processor 1230 and a memory unit 1232 as shown in FIG. Corresponds to the processing flow to be executed.

  There are a plurality of composite modules 3583 developed by different manufacturers as the unit or an example of the composite module 3583. Furthermore, use of a different format (standard) on the communication middleware layer APL02 is permitted for each composite module 3583. For this purpose, it is necessary to support a plurality of different formats (first communication standard to nth communication standard) on the communication middleware layer APL02 so that the same system controller 3581 can communicate with various composite modules. There are features that are possible. In order to make this possible, different communication standards are identified in the communication standard recognition unit 3581c in the system controller 3581, and appropriate processing according to the communication standard is performed according to the identification result. Accordingly, the versatility of the system controller 3581 is improved, and an effect of enabling information communication with a plurality of different composite modules 3583 developed by different manufacturers is produced.

The various formats used in the communication middleware layer APL02 and APL06 described in section 2.1
○ A-format is “description in a broad text format”
○ C-format is a “command / request / response / status” format ○ E-format is a format that “stores the setting code in a predetermined area” ○ W-format is a “fill in the designated field” Or, there is a feature that “HTML / HTML5-specific“ tag ”is described”. Therefore, by analyzing the information (information described in the communication middleware data APLDT in FIG. 11) described in the communication middleware layers APL02 and APL06, the corresponding communication standard is identified by determining which of the above characteristics is applicable. it can.

  As shown in the example of FIG. 17A, the combined module 3583 is connected to the Internet 3585 via an access point 3484a and / or a base station 3588b. Here, the Internet 3585 in FIG. 36A corresponds to the non-system network line 1788 in FIG. 17A. Although not shown in FIG. 37A, a router (gateway) 1300 with a built-in battery in FIG. 17A is installed between the Internet 3585 and the Internet connection unit 3581a in the system controller 3581.

  In this regard, the composite module 3583 has a sensor module 1260 as shown in FIG. 4B (a) or (b), for example, and may transmit a detection signal from the sensor module 1260. Alternatively, identification data is stored in the self-attribute data storage area 1793 (FIG. 7B) in the communication module 1660 in the composite module 3583, and this information (or the address of the composite module 3583 itself (for example, IP addresses SIPADRS and DIPADRS in FIG. 13)). ) May be accessed from the outside via the Internet 3584 and the base station 3584b.

  As described in section 1.6, the communication module 1660 having the structure of FIG. 7A or 7B is also used as a part of the communication module 1202-3 (FIG. 2) in the system controller 3581 and α_1126. Therefore, the Internet connection unit 3581a in FIG. 36A corresponds to the information communication execution unit 3016 in FIG. 7A. Similarly, the protocol recognition unit 3581b in FIG. 36A corresponds to the physical layer frame analysis unit 1918 in FIG. 7A, and the data detection unit 3581d in FIG. 36A corresponds to the content extraction unit 1938 in FIG. 7A. Furthermore, the Internet matching data output unit 3581g in FIG. 36A corresponds to the physical layer frame generation unit 1914 in FIG. 7A. Also, the communication standard recognition unit 3581c and the communication standard matching format setting unit 3581f in FIG. 36A correspond to the combination unit of the signal processing unit 1780 and the processor 1736 in FIG. 7B. The processing performed in the data processing unit 3581e in FIG. 36A is executed in the processor 1230 in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 17A, the combination modules 3583 and 1295 can be connected to a system controller 3581 (system controller β_1128) via the Internet 3585. The communication information used at this time has a structure shown in FIG. In addition, as shown in FIG. 13, transmission side IP address information SIPADRS and reception side IP address information DIPADRS are stored therein.

  The received signal received by the Internet connection unit 3581a is analyzed by the protocol recognition unit 3581b. In the protocol recognition unit 3581b, the IPv6 header IPv6HD and the communication middleware data APLDT (and extension data EXDT) in FIG. 11 are extracted individually. Thereafter, the extracted communication middleware data APLDT (and extension data EXDT) is analyzed in the communication standard recognition unit 3581c.

  The communication standard recognition unit 3581c includes a data processing routine for analyzing the formats of various communication standards in advance. Therefore, the communication standard recognition unit 3581c easily determines which of the A / E / W-formats (FIG. 17B) the composite module adopts or the C-format (FIG. 17A). can do. Then, after the corresponding communication standard is recognized, the content (for example, sensor detection data) extracted by the data detection unit 3581d is input to the data processing unit 3581e.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, after automatically determining a communication standard that the communication middleware data APLDT (and extension data EXDT) in the received communication information is compliant with, the communication middleware data APLDT (and extension data in a format compliant with the communication standard). (EXDT) contents are generated and a response is transmitted to the transmission destination unit 1290 has the following characteristics. Specifically, the communication middleware data APLDT (and the extension data) are set in the communication standard consistent format setting unit 3581f based on the information of the communication standard (the format of the communication middleware layers APL02 and APL06) identified in the communication standard recognition unit 3581c. EXDT). As a result, the system controller 3581 can stably perform information communication with a plurality of different units 1290 (or composite modules 1295) developed by different manufacturers.

That is, as described above, the communication middleware layers APL02 and APL0 used by the corresponding unit 1290 (or the composite module 3583) in the communication standard recognition unit 3581c.
The communication standard on 6 (and extended application layer EXL06) is already recognized. Therefore, based on this information, the communication standard consistent format setting unit 3581f converts the transmission data from the data processing unit 3581e into communication middleware data APLDT (FIG. 11) and, if necessary, extended data EXDT. As a result, the transmission (reply) partner unit 1290 (or the composite module 3583) can recognize the communication middleware data APLDT (and the extension data EXDT). Transmission data in a predetermined data format is input to the Internet matching data output unit 3581g.

  FIG. 36B shows an example in which the above-described combination module 3583 (or unit 1290) moves to various different areas. Here, different network systems α_1132 and β_1134 are configured for each area. Accordingly, system controllers 3581-1, 3581-2, and 3581-3 for controlling / managing / collecting information in the network system are installed for each area. Here, the system controller 3581-1, the system controller 3581-2, and the system controller 3583-1 arranged in each area have the same configuration as the system controller 3581 in FIG. 36A.

  As described above, all the system controllers 3581-1, 3581-2, and 3581-3 flexibly support different formats (communication standards) on the communication middleware layers APL02 and APL06 (and the extended application layer EXL06). Therefore, the composite module 3583 (or the unit 1290) can communicate with the system controllers 3581-1, 3581-2, and 3581-3 regardless of the area.

Chapter 5 Application Examples by Application Field Section 5.1 Application Examples to the Consumer Field Section 5.1.1 Application Example of the Wide Area Network System to the Consumer Area Consumer area of the wide area network system shown in Fig. 1 (Consumer Electronics Technology ) May be associated with “distributed information” as a product distributed between the wholesaler B1 — 1104-1, the service provider B — 111-2-2, and the system α — 1132. For example, service provider B_1112-2 collects wide-area weather information, accident information, or traffic congestion information as materials from wholesalers B1_1104-1, such as the Japan Meteorological Agency, police stations, and road traffic corporations, and processes them for each region. Publish useful information on the Internet. A general end user may receive this information browsing service by operating a personal computer (system controller α_1126).

  In addition, as an example of application in the civilian field, one domain 1 to 3_1122-1 to 3 shown in FIG. 1 is related to a family (in the case of a single person, it is considered to constitute one family alone), business or hobby / region. You may make it correspond to the predetermined activity area | region on the network of the member (a single individual is also included) which comprises the specified group. Moreover, the specific member on SNS (Social Network Service) may form one specific domain 1-3_1122-1-3 as said specific group.

  As another specific example, when the system α_1132 in FIG. 1 is made to correspond to a PAN configured in the home of an individual user, the system β_1134 can be used as a network environment (a specific PAN environment or a LAN environment) where the same user is away from home. You can make it correspond. In this case, a portable terminal such as a smart phone or a tablet owned by the user at the outside location corresponds to the system controller β_1128. However, the system β_1134 is not only compatible with a single mobile terminal, but the entire network space (built in a specific area physically or geographically close) connected to the system controller β_1128 is connected to the system β_1134. You may make it correspond to the whole. As an example showing the relationship between the system α_1132 and the system β_1134 in the domain 2_1122-2, the user operates the portable terminal (system controller β_1128) from the system β_1134 on the go, and identifies domain-specific identification information ID (Identification Information) and a unique password to enter the domain 2_1122-2 and control a specific device in the system α_1132 built in the home, or based on information from a predetermined sensor module in the home (system α_1132) There is a method for receiving an original service (for example, obtaining a dinner recipe proposal on the go from ingredients information stored in a refrigerator at home).

Section 5.1.2 Example of application of composite module to consumer field As an example of application to the consumer field, the sensor / communication module 1460 and the drive / communication module 1470 are attached to existing small appliances such as alarm clocks, flashlights, toothbrushes, and hair dryers. The function of the small home appliance can be dramatically improved at a low cost. Here, as a method of attaching the sensor / communication module 1460 and the driving / communication module 1470 to an existing small household appliance, it is not always necessary to fix them with screws or the like. For example, the sensor / communication module 1460 or the driving / communication module 1470 may be temporarily attached using a double-sided tape or an adhesive. good. For example, by attaching (attaching) various sensors / communication modules 1460 to these small household appliances, various sensor functions can be added to these small household appliances very easily. Various information detected by the sensor / communication module 1460 is collected in the system controller α_1126. Furthermore, by simply attaching (attaching) a driving / communication module 1470 that generates sound or light to these small home appliances, a new additional function can be added to these small home appliances very easily. Here, these additional functions are integrally controlled by the system controller α_1126. A small household appliance with a new additional function can provide an optimal service according to the user's behavior and state. For example, a service can be provided in which the alarm clock strongly warns with a human voice when the user is awake in the morning. Alternatively, when a user forgets to place a specific small household appliance or loses it in the house, the small household appliance itself can provide a service for notifying the user of the location.

  Other application examples will be described below. For example, a sensor / communication module 1460 having functions such as a temperature sensor, a wind sensor, a sound sensor, a light sensor, or a short-distance human sensor is installed everywhere in the section 2_1142-2 (room), and the system controller α_1126 Enables communication within the system α_1132. At the same time, a drive / communication module 1470 is built in a remote controller for controlling devices such as an air conditioner, a TV, and a lighting fixture, and devices such as an air conditioner, a TV, and a lighting fixture can be controlled from the system controller α_1126 via the remote controller. To do. Accordingly, the system controller α_1126 can grasp in detail the temperature, wind power, sound, light luminance (illuminance), and human motion distribution characteristics in detail in the section 2_1142-2. Based on the grasp result, the device is controlled under optimum conditions for the user. Especially in a large room, there is a large bias in the cooling and heating effect, so there is a tendency for the temperature and wind power to vary greatly depending on the location. On the other hand, by applying the service method, the satisfaction level of users living in a large room is greatly improved. When this method is used, it is efficient to replace only the existing remote controller with the drive / communication module 1470 built-in remote controller without having to replace the existing installed main unit (such as an air conditioner, a TV, or a lighting fixture). The effect of improving the satisfaction of many users is born.

  The communication when the remote controller with built-in drive / communication module 1470 is used as the drive / communication module 1470-2 built-in device 1450-4 in FIG. 8B is very simple as described in Chapter 2 with reference to FIG. A C-format that enables communication of the converted communication information may be used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the remote controller structure may be improved to the level of the device 1250-1 in which the drive module 1270-1, the communication module 1202-4, and the device controller 1240-1 are incorporated as shown in FIG. 8A. In this case, an A-format or E-format described later may be used for communication within the system α_1132 with the system controller α_1126.

  Next, still another application example will be shown. FIG. 37B shows a state where milk 3506 purchased by the purchaser is stored in the refrigerator 3521. A composite module 3523 is attached to the container of milk 3506. The composite module 3523 is covered with a seal and fixed to the outside of the milk container. On the other hand, a system controller 3522 is installed inside the refrigerator 3521, and the system controller 3522 can communicate with the composite module 3523.

In the composite module 3523, there is a communication module 1666 with a built-in antenna (FIG. 4A (b)), and the self-attribute data 1793 can be stored in the communication module 1666. The system controller 3522 can request the composite module 3523 to return the content of the self-attribute data 1793. As a result, the system controller 3522 can check the “best-before period data” included in the self-attribute data. Since the system controller 3522 has the current date data, it can measure the extent to which the end of the milk taste period is approaching by comparing the acquired taste period data with the date data. That is, for example, the system controller 3522 can detect when the expiration date is within one week, within four days, within two days, within one day, or when the expiration date has passed.

  In addition, the system controller 3522 can receive the respective self-attribute data 1793 from the composite module 3523 provided in the product, the food, or the like in the refrigerator 3521. Accordingly, the system controller 3522 can display list data such as foods and products stored in the refrigerator on the display 3525 provided in the refrigerator 3521 using a communication line in the network. Then, the user of the refrigerator 3521 who sees the display 3525 can check the status of the shelf life of the milk 3506. Based on the control from the system controller 3522, the color of the milk 3506 can be displayed on the display 3525 by changing the color. For example, when the shelf life of the milk 3506 is within 1 week, it is “green”, when it is within 4 days, “blue”, when it is within 2 days, “yellow”, when it is within 1 day, “pink”, When the time limit has passed, “red” may be displayed. As this display method, various display methods such as bar display and warning character display may be used instead of changing the color. Further, when the self-attribute data 1793 includes product purchase date data or purchased store identification data, these data may be displayed on the display 3525.

  An example in which the composite module 3531 is embedded in the heel portion of the shoe 3505 is shown in FIG. 37C. This composite module 3531 incorporates a pressure sensor, a humidity sensor, and the like. When the user returns home, the composite module 3531 and the home system controller 3532 communicate with each other, and the system controller 3532 can read the step count data and humidity data recorded in advance in the composite module 3531. As a result, the system controller 3532 can calculate the number of steps of the user per day. In addition, the humidity information in the current shoe 3505 can also be obtained. Then, using the result, for example, the number of steps per day of the user and the humidity of the shoes can be displayed on the smart phone 3533.

Section 5.1.3 Application example of section division method to consumer field This section 5.1.3 describes an application example of section division method to the consumer field. In the example of FIG. 24, an example of division of the sections 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m when the entire residential land of one house is associated with the system α_1132 is illustrated. In FIG. 25, the sections 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m are described in association with each room. In comparison, FIG. 24 corresponds to a slightly broader concept, and the garden in the residential land corresponds to one section 10_1142-10. Similarly to FIGS. 8A to 8B, in FIG. 24, the vehicle interior space corresponds to one section 1_1142-1. 8A to 8B, the arrangement location of the smart meter 1124 is excluded from the section target in FIG. 24 as well, but the arrangement location of the smart meter 1124 may be defined as a specific independent section. In addition, sections 3_1142-3 to 8_1142-8 are allocated to each room including a toilet and a bathroom. However, in the system according to the present embodiment, it is not always necessary to divide the section into rooms. For example, “the whole separation” in which the interior is cut into a plurality of rooms may be assigned to one section 2_1142-2. Moreover, you may make it correspond to section 9_1142-9 the space area | region where a user's residence frequency, such as a storeroom, is few.

  Further, as an example of utilizing the result of integration and management of information collected for each section 1142, the system controller α_1126 (the processor 1230 in the system controller) indicates the presence / absence of the end user and the action / status (whether the end user is awake or is sleeping?) , Whether the end user is an adult or a child, etc.) may be estimated or determined in units of sections 1 to m_1142-1 to m. Further, as a unit of integration and management of collected information, the unit is not limited to the units of sections 1 to m_1142-1 to m as described above. May be estimated / determined).

  As an example of a service providing method to the user, section 1 to m — 1141 to 1-m unit air conditioner temperature setting, lighting on / off control, lighting brightness control, output volume of TV / radio / audio deck, etc. Adjustments may be made. Further, providing finely-tuned services in units of sections 1142, there is also an effect that power consumption can be saved (energy saving correspondence) in the systems α to β_1132-1134.

Section 5.2 Application Example to the Social Infrastructure Field Section 5.2.1 Application Example of the Wide Area Network System to the Social Infrastructure Field When the wide area network system shown in Fig. 1 is applied to the social infrastructure field (Social Infrastructure Technology) The public institutions such as the national and local governments, public corporations and public interest corporations also correspond to the wholesalers A_1102 and B1 / 2_1104-1 / 2. And as the information (product) handled by the wholesalers A_1102 and B1 / 2_1104-1 / 2, personal information regarding citizens, citizens of the prefecture, citizens of the prefecture, citizens of the prefecture, citizens of the prefecture, and citizens, such as a resident register / resident's card and tax payment history, may be associated. Alternatively, as information (products) handled by the road corporation or the housing corporation, road traffic congestion information, accident occurrence information, land charges (land prices) or housing information for each region may be handled. In particular, when applied to the social infrastructure field, wholesalers A_1102, B1 / 2_1104-1 / 2 own proprietary infrastructure (such as transmission lines, water and sewage piping, city gas piping, etc.) There is a feature that a delivery system (a delivery means using a train or a truck) can be used.

  First, examples of services related to railways and transportation infrastructure will be presented as examples of services provided based on commissions from public organizations such as the national government, local governments, public corporations, and public interest corporations. The system controller α_1126 periodically notifies deterioration information for each region such as roads, iron bridges, tunnels, and tracks to the server n_1116-n. Then, the information of all servers 1 to n_116-1 to n is integrated in the service provider B_1112-2, and a future repair plan or an abnormal warning is issued, and the consigning country, local government, public organization (wholesale) To the dealer A / B — 1102/1104). As another example, an example of integrated management of systems such as railway, transportation, postal service, transportation, and air traffic control will be explained. Various operation statuses and accident occurrence information that are periodically notified from the system controller α_1126 to the server n_1116-n are managed in an integrated manner, and an operation change instruction according to need is sent from the service provider B_1112-2 to the system controller α_1126 and system controller β_1128. Notify to Specifically, the service provider B_1112-2 providing these services corresponds to a specific social infrastructure management organization or social system management organization (for-profit company or public interest corporation). In addition to the above, for example, an NPO corporation or an NPO organization may be associated with the service provider B_1112-2.

  In the above service provision example, the service method provided only by the single service provider 1112 has been described. However, the system example of the present embodiment is not limited thereto, and a plurality of service providers A / B — 1112/1114 may provide services in cooperation with each other. That is, in the description of Section 1.7 using FIG. 1, information sharing or resource cooperation between service provider A_1112-1 and service provider B_1112-2 or between service provider B_1112-2 and service provider C_1112-3 1114 showed that service efficiency and sophistication can be improved. Combining this mechanism with the information obtained from the smart meter 1124 produces an effect that enables new effective use and effective diversion of public consumption materials. As an example, the power supply is received using the infrastructure and distribution system of the wholesaler A_1102, the amount of power is paid to the service provider A_1111-1 of the power retailer, and the infrastructure and distribution system of the wholesaler B1_1104-1 is used. Consider a case in which water supply is received, sewage treatment is performed using the infrastructure and distribution system of wholesaler B2_1104-2, and the amount of water and sewage used is paid to service provider B_1111-2 of the water and sewage retailer. In the database 1118-n corresponding to the server n_1116-n in the service provider B, the real-time stored water amount (the amount of water supplied via the water supply system and the sewerage system is stored as information obtained from the smart meter 1124). (Difference from the amount of water discharged via the water) and water pressure information of clean water. Upon receiving “instantaneous rapid increase in power usage fee” and “request for restriction on use of electric power” from the service provider A_1111-1, which is a power retailer, in the service provider B_1111-2, which is a water and sewage retailer. The server n_1116-n reads stored information in the database 1118-n, and determines whether or not hydroelectric power generation is possible based on the current amount of stored water in the target system α_1132 and the water pressure of clean water. As a result of the determination, if hydroelectric power generation in the target system α_1132 is possible, the server n_1116-n makes a “switch to hydroelectric power generation” proposal in the system α_1132 to the system controller α_1126. As a result, not only can the price of the electric power charge in the system α_1132 be reduced, but also the effect of avoiding the danger of exceeding the amount of power used in the region is produced.

  Next, another service providing form different from the above-described content will be described. In the system of the present embodiment, there are a plurality of merchandise supply paths from the wholesaler A_1102 to the smart meter 1124 serving as a window for supplying predetermined merchandise in the domain 2_1122-2 or the system α_1132 (from the wholesaler A_1102 in FIG. 1). It has been described in Section 1.7 that there is a “broken line” direct route to the smart meter 1124 and a route via the service provider A — 1112-1. A specific example of the service providing method performed by the service provider A_1112-1 for the domain 2_1122-2 or the system α_1132 by utilizing this feature, and unique effects resulting therefrom will be described below. Here, as an example of products related to services, public consumption materials such as electric power, gas, water, and gasoline whose charges change depending on the region of use and the date and time of use are given. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and other services and products (for example, buying and selling using a network of general consumer materials, current assets, fixed assets, and distribution of specific information) may be applied. For example, when public consumption materials are used in the domain 2 — 1122-2 or the system α — 1132 when the usage fee is high such as summer / winter and daytime, an amount equivalent to the amount used by the wholesaler A — 1102 measured by the smart meter 1124 is stored for a predetermined amount of goods. Return to wholesaler A — 1102 from unit 1154 (eg, storage battery or water / gas tank). Conversely, public consumption materials are purchased from the wholesaler A1102 and stored in the predetermined product storage unit 1154 when the usage fee is low, such as when it is not necessary to use the air conditioning equipment or at night. Thereby, the usage fee paid by the end user (the user in the domain 2 — 1122-2 or the system α — 1132) for the substantial public consumption material can be reduced. At the same time, the service provider A_1111-1 can receive a part of the price reduction (margin) of the public consumption material usage fee as a reward. Furthermore, the above method smooths the amount of public consumption material consumption (the amount of merchandise (public consumption material supplied by wholesaler A — 1102)) when viewed over a wide area (temporary use of public consumption material according to season and time). A new effect that reduces the amount of increase / decrease) is born.

  And when returning the amount equivalent to the usage amount of the public consumption material weighed with the smart meter 1124 from the predetermined product storage unit 1154 to the wholesaler A_1102 as described above, the charge / discharge amount control unit or the storage / release amount control unit High control accuracy is required. In order to achieve the high control accuracy, in the system according to the present embodiment, the charge / discharge amount monitoring unit or the storage / discharge amount monitoring unit (not shown in FIG. 1 but present in the predetermined product storage unit 1154, FIG. 8A , A charge / discharge amount control unit or a storage / discharge amount control unit (based on detection information (detection signal) from an inflow amount monitor unit 1218 and a discharge amount monitor unit 1216 described later with reference to FIG. 9). Similarly, real-time feedback of the charge / discharge amount or the storage / discharge amount in the inflow amount control unit 1214 and the discharge amount control unit 1212 is performed. In addition to that, if necessary, the accumulated amount of charge / discharge amount or storage / discharge amount for each predetermined period is appropriately calculated and compared with a predetermined target value, and the difference value between the target value Depending on the amount, the charge / discharge amount or the storage / release amount in the next predetermined period may be fed back. By implementing the above control method, the control accuracy of the cumulative accumulation amount for each predetermined period is improved, and there is an effect that a loss (a deviation in trading profit due to a lack of control amount) in public consumer goods trading can be minimized.

  When a wide area network system is applied to the social infrastructure field, one domain 1 to 3_1122-1 to 3 shown in FIG. 1 may correspond to the entire specific social infrastructure or the entire specific social system. . For example, operation of railways, transportation, postal administration, air traffic control, transportation business, public consumption material production business, state observation units, etc. for every predetermined group (specified corporation or specified corporation group), or any other social infrastructure or social system The units for state observation may be associated with the domains 1 to 3_1122-1 to 3. Furthermore, a large group of operations and state observations relating to activities of a specific community, a predetermined organization, or a predetermined corporation in which distributed activities for each region are integrated through a network may be associated with each of the domains 1 to 3-1122-1 to 3.

  On the other hand, one system α / β_1132 / 1134 shown in FIG. 1 may correspond to one building or region. That is, it is called HEMS (Home Energy Management System), BEMS (Building Energy Management System), or CEMS (Community Energy Management System) for each scale size as a target of the energy saving system (Energy Management System). The system α / β_1132 / 1134 may be associated with one management unit of the HEMS, BEMS, or CEMS.

  Further, an example of the relationship between the domain 1122 and the system α / β_1132 / 1134 as a specific countermeasure method other than the above will be described. For example, when the domain 1122 corresponds to the operation management and state observation of a specific railway company, an automatic ticket gate system, ticketing system, commuter pass issuing system, operation status management system for each train, track damage status automatic management system, Damage status management system, platform degradation management system, power supply status management system for each train, on-train / platform abnormal warning system, in-car molester arrest system, crew / station staff duty management / payment payment system, salary A payment / accounting system or the like may be associated with each system 1132-4. In addition, when the domain 1122 corresponds to the operation and state management of traffic and transportation business, damage to roads, railway bridges, tunnel deterioration management systems, road accident occurrence information management systems, traffic congestion management systems, transportation means (trucks, etc.) A situation management system, a gate management system (including an ETC management system) (including an ETC management system), an employee attendance management system, a payroll accounting system, and the like may be associated with each system 1132-4.

  On the other hand, when one system α_1132 is associated with a specific area physically or geographically close in Section 1.7, one domain 2_1122-2 is an area on the network that transcends the physical or geographical space. It was explained that it was made to correspond. Accordingly, when the entire deterioration management system for roads, iron bridges, and tunnels is associated with one domain 2_1122-2, the deterioration management units for roads, iron bridges, and tunnels set for each region are set to individual systems α / β — 1132/1134. You may make it correspond.

Section 5.2.2 Example of application of composite module to social infrastructure field When the system of this embodiment is applied to a social system or social infrastructure, the sensor / communication module 1460 may be used as a gate for traffic lights, roads, highways, etc. The bulletin board (including the electronic bulletin board) or a part of the bulletin board may be arranged so that the system controller α_1126 can grasp the traffic situation and traffic situation of people and vehicles, and notify only necessary information to the server n_1116-n. . In this case, the device 1450 may correspond to a traffic light, an electronic gate, an electronic bulletin board, or the like. In this case, the section described later in Chapter 4 may correspond to the traffic signal, the electronic gate, a predetermined area around the electronic bulletin board, or a road within a specific range.

  In particular, the sensor / communication module 1460 described above has a feature that can easily cope with light weight / small size / power saving (no external power supply is required). Therefore, using this merit, various sensors / communication modules 1460 are installed in roads, bridge girders, tunnels or pipes (such as water and sewage systems), and long-term monitoring of degradation points in roads, bridge girders, tunnels or pipes Becomes easy. Since various sense information obtained here can be extracted only in the system controller α_1126, for example, only necessary information such as detection of change components, analysis and data processing on the server n_1116-n side are facilitated. .

  As another example of applying the sensor / communication module 1460 to the social infrastructure field, the sensor / communication module 1460 is attached to a cart in a store such as a supermarket, a convenience store, or a department store, and behavior history information of customers in the store is collected. May be. And, for example, “sales where customers stay longer” and “the order in which customers visit” are extracted from the collected customer behavior history and reflected in marketing (market research) such as product display in the store to improve store sales. An effect that can contribute is born.

  On the other hand, for example, in a large room such as an office, a hospital, a large store, etc., there is a large bias in the air conditioning effect. Therefore, as in section 5.1.2, a sensor / communication module 1460 having functions such as a temperature sensor, a wind sensor, a sound sensor, an optical sensor, or a short-distance human sensor is provided throughout the office, hospital, large store, and the like. By installing the, the bias of the air conditioning effect in a large room is greatly reduced, and the satisfaction of many customers is improved.

Another application embodiment in which the composite module 1295 is specifically used will be described. As FIG. 4A (a) or (b) shows, every composite module 1295 includes a communication module 1660. As described with reference to FIG. 7B in section 1.6, the communication module 1660 has a self-attribute data storage area 1793. The content of the self-attribute data 1793 is changed or switched for a product, a product, a part, or the like equipped with the composite module 1295 according to the use situation. The usage situation referred to here is a change in the existence area of the product, product, or part (that is, a change in the system in which the composite module 1295 is arranged as shown in FIG. 37B), a change in elapsed time, or a change in conditions. Etc. When the composite module 1295 is used as the sensor / communication module 1460, ambient conditions in various usage environments depending on the combination with the sensor can be monitored.

  FIG. 37A schematically shows, for example, a supermarket store area 3501, a cash register area 3502, and a supermarket exit area 3503. Here, the inside of the supermarket corresponds to one independent system α_1132 (see FIG. 1). Then, the cash registers 3511a and 2511b in FIG. 37A operate as the system controller α_1126. In the system α_1132, shoes 3505, milk 3506, and a bag 3507 are sold as products.

  Here, a sensor / communication module 1460 is mounted as a composite module 1295 in each of shoes 3505, milk 3506, and bag 3507. As a specific mounting method, a sheet-like sensor / communication module 1460 (composite module 1295) is individually attached with an adhesive. Further, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the shoe 3505, milk 3506, or bag 3507 may be inserted (or mixed). A part of the self-attribute data 1793 has an anti-theft flag (for example, “1”). When the purchaser finishes the payment, the information on the anti-theft flag is erased based on the control from the cash register 3511a or 2511b in the cash register area 3502. Specifically, for example, when the cash register 3511a reads a barcode indicating the price of a product, a reading completion signal is transmitted to the combined module 1295 (or sensor / communication module 1460 or unit 1290) in the product. Then, the corresponding composite module 1295 (or sensor / communication module 1460 or unit 1290) determines that the settlement has been completed upon reception of the read completion signal, and erases the anti-theft flag to “0”. Furthermore, the cash registers 3511a and 2511b can add supermarket identification data and date data for which settlement has been performed in the self-attribute data storage area 1793.

  Here, if the commodity passes through the exit area 3503 of the supermarket without the anti-theft flag being erased (without being settled), an alarm is automatically output. That is, a monitoring device 3512 capable of outputting an alarm is installed in the exit area 3503 of the supermarket. As described in Section 4.4, in the system according to the present embodiment, the positions of all the composite modules 1295 (or the sensor / communication module 1460) can be detected in real time. Therefore, when the composite module 1295 (or sensor / communication module 1460) passes through the supermarket exit area 3503, information communication is automatically performed with the system controller α_1126 (cache registers 3511a and 2511b). When the anti-theft flag is “1”, an alarm is output from the monitoring device. On the other hand, when the anti-theft flag is “0”, no warning is output from the monitoring device 3512.

  In the system example of the above embodiment, an example in which a store clerk is arranged in the cash registers 3511a and 3511b and the anti-theft flag is stored in the self attribute data storage area 1793 has been shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the selling price of the target product may be recorded in advance in the self-attribute data storage area 1793. Then, when the combined module 1295 (or the sensor / communication module 1460 or the unit 1290) in which the selling price is recorded in advance passes through the supermarket exit area 3503, the total amount of payment paid by the buyer is automatically displayed. On the other hand, the composite module 1295 (or the sensor / communication module 1460 or the unit 1290) is similarly mounted in the wearing goods (tie pin, necklace, etc.) worn by the purchaser, and the cash register 3511a where the purchaser is unattended. , 3511b, the total amount of payment is automatically withdrawn from the buyer's bank account. In order to make this possible, the buyer's bank account number and password are stored in the self-attribute data storage area 1793 in the composite module 1295 (or sensor / communication module 1460 or unit 1290) installed in the purchaser's attachment. Pre-recorded.

  The composite module 1295 (or the sensor / communication module 1460 or the unit 1290) in which the billing information for the purchaser is recorded is not mounted in the mounted product as described above, but will be described later in Section 5.3.2. It may be present in the purchaser's body by a method such as swallowing.

  As described above, the combination module 1295 (or the sensor / communication module 1460) is used not only to prevent theft, but also enables automatic billing without a store clerk. As a result, labor costs can be greatly reduced, and this has the effect of improving the profits of the supermarket.

  For example, FIG. 37D shows an example in which a composite module is used in a system for inspecting the corrosion status of steel frames that support building walls, tunnel walls, bridges, and the like. For example, steel frames 3541a, 3541b, 3541c,... Support the back side of an inspection target wall 3540 such as a tunnel. Composite modules 3542 and 3543 are attached to the surfaces of the steel frames 3541a, 3541b and 3541c, respectively. In FIG. 37D, the communication modules 3542 and 3543 attached to the steel frame 3541a appear on the drawing. If the wall 3540 to be inspected has a shielding effect against radio waves, an antenna 1480 is installed externally to the communication module 1660 in the composite module 1295 (FIG. 4A (a)). This external antenna 1480 is arranged at a position where radio waves can be transmitted and received. That is, in the example of FIG. 37D, the antennas 3542a and 3543b of the composite modules 3542 and 3543 are led to the outer surface of the wall 3540 to be inspected through lead wires penetrating the wall 3540 to be inspected.

  The sensor modules 1260 (FIG. 4B (a)) in the composite modules (sensor / communication modules) 3542 and 3543 are in close contact with the surfaces of the steel frames 3541a, 3541b and 3541c via an insulating film. If the surfaces of the steel frames 3541a, 3541b, and 3541c rust and rise, the adhesive film is broken and the sensor module 1260 comes into direct contact with rust. And if the sensor module 1260 contacts rust, the resistance value in the sensor module 1260 will fall. Therefore, by knowing the resistance value in the sensor module 1260, the rusted state of the surfaces of the steel frames 3541a, 3541b, and 3541c can be known.

  In many of the system examples of the embodiments described so far, the system controllers 1126 and 3546 are installed in a fixed system, and the unit 1290 (or the combined module 1295) is often movable. On the other hand, the embodiment system example of FIG. 37D (and FIG. 37E described later) is characterized in that the unit 1290 (or combination module 1295) side is fixed and the system controllers 1126 and 3546 are movable. For example, there are cases where it is desired to obtain sensor information of a very wide area at one time, or installation of the system controller α_1126 is difficult due to system circumstances. In this case, as described above, the unit 1290 (or the composite module 1295) is installed in the fixed system, and the system controllers 1126 and 3546 are moved to collect sensor information of each unit 1290 (or the composite module 1295). This has the effect of making it easy to obtain sensor information in a very wide area.

  In the system of this embodiment, as described in Section 4.5, the same unit 1290 (or combination module 1295) can be adapted to a plurality of different systems. Accordingly, even in this case, each time a plurality of different system controllers 1126 and 3546 used in different applications are moved, the fixed unit 1290 (or the combined module 1295) can be appropriately operated for each application.

  In the embodiment system example of FIG. 37D, a system controller 3546 is installed in a part of the inspection vehicle 3545 (the roof portion of the inspection vehicle 3545 in the view of FIG. 37D) and passes near the antennas 3542a and 3543b of the composite module. Then, every time it passes through the vicinity of the antennas 3542a and 3543b of the composite module, the system controller 3546 transmits a command request “resistance value answer in the sensor module 1260” to each composite module (unit) 3542 and 3543. Then, in response to the request command, the “resistance value in the sensor module 1260” is appropriately answered from each of the composite modules (units) 3542 and 3543 to the system controller 3546. Thereby, the system controller 3546 can inspect the rust state for all the steel frames 3541a, 3541b, and 3541c. In this way, periodic rust inspection can be performed easily and accurately. The above rust detection method is merely an example, and rust may be detected using other detection means.

When a decrease in resistance value in the sensor module 1260 outside the allowable range is detected as a result of the rust inspection as described above, the system controller 3546, 1126 has deteriorated rust to the server n_1116-n in FIG. 1 via the Internet. Information on the predetermined steel frame 3541 is notified. In this case, the wholesaler B1_1104-1 in FIG. 1 corresponds to the government or the road corporation. The wall maintenance company entrusted by the government or the road corporation corresponds to the service provider B_1112-2. Then, based on the information on the rust-degraded steel frame 3541 stored in the server n_1116-n, the wall maintenance company formulates a repair plan, and repairs the road public corporation (wholesaler B1_1104-1) with a repair budget. Apply for.

  FIG. 37E shows an application example of the embodiment system in which the composite module 1295 or the unit 1290 is used for leak detection of, for example, a gas pipe, a water pipe, a fire hydrant pipe, and the like. Gas pipes, water pipes, fire hydrant pipes, etc. are often placed underground along the road. Therefore, a composite module (unit) 3549 is attached on the surface of a pipe 3548 such as a gas pipe, a water pipe, or a fire hydrant pipe. Here, as a sensor module 1260 built in the composite module (unit) 3549 and used for detecting leakage of a gas pipe, a water pipe, a fire hydrant pipe, etc., a gas sensor, a moisture (water) sensor, a sound sensor, a vibration sensor, etc. are combined. The combined sensor may be incorporated.

  Similarly to FIG. 37D, in FIG. 37E, the system controller 3546 is mounted in the inspection vehicle 3545 (in FIG. 37E, the system controller 3546 is mounted on the bottom surface of the inspection vehicle 3545), and leakage inspection is periodically performed. Similarly to FIG. 37D, detection data from the sensor module 1260 is returned to the system controller 3546 in response to a request command from the system controller 3546. The system controller 3546 collects and analyzes sensor information from each composite module (unit) 3549, thereby determining a location such as a gas leak or a water leak. Also, the embodiment system of FIG. 37E has an effect of finding a wide range of abnormal parts by a very easy method, as in FIG. 37D. The system controller 3546 may be fixedly installed along the pipe installation line instead of being mounted on the inspection vehicle 3545.

  An example in which the composite module (unit) is applied to the greenhouse cultivation apparatus is shown in FIG. 37F. The greenhouse cultivating apparatus is sometimes referred to as, for example, a greenhouse house or a plastic house. In the greenhouse house 3550, for example, a system controller 3551 and a monitoring camera 3552 are installed. And this monitoring camera 3552 can image the state of the plant in the greenhouse 3550, and can transmit the imaged video signal to the monitor which a grower (owner) owns.

  In the greenhouse house 2550, for example, vegetables such as carrots, radishes or burdock are cultivated. In the case of such vegetables, it is not possible to determine how the ground grows from the outside. 37F, bar-shaped monitoring devices 3553a, 3553b, 3553c,... Incorporating a plurality of composite modules (units) are arranged in the ground.

  The right side of FIG. 37F shows an enlarged view of a bar-shaped monitoring device 3553c as a representative. Here, a portion indicated by a pentagon in the bar-shaped monitoring device 3553c is a mounting plate of the monitoring device 3553c, and has a shape with a pointed tip that is easily inserted into the ground. A plurality of composite modules (units) FC1 to FC5 and FD1 to FD5 are provided in the longitudinal direction of the mounting plate. In addition, in the composite modules (units) FC1 to FC5, for example, a sensor module 1260 capable of measuring the size of a nearby substance based on transmission / reception of ultrasonic waves is mounted. In addition, the composite modules (units) FD1 to FD5 are equipped with a sensor module 1260 including a humidity sensor capable of measuring humidity, for example. Then, with the measurement results obtained from the composite modules (units) FC1 to FC5, the growth (length) information of adjacent vegetables (carrots or radishes) is collected. The method of collecting the growth (length) information of vegetables (carrots or radishes) that are close to each other is not limited to ultrasound, and for example, even if imaging is performed using near infrared light having a wavelength in the range of 700 nm to 2500 nm good. Moreover, the humidity measurement data obtained from the composite modules (units) FD1 to FD5 are effective for monitoring the state of moisture in the ground. Measurement data that can be obtained from the composite modules (units) FC1 to FC5 and FD1 to FD5 are transmitted to the system controller 3551 via the antenna ANT.

  The output data of the above composite modules (units) FC1 to FC5 and FD1 to FD5 are totaled by the system controller 3551. And since this total result is displayed on a monitor suitably, the supervisor can judge the harvest time easily. In addition, the monitor can monitor the total measurement result of the humidity measurement data obtained from the composite modules (units) FD1 to FD5, so that the supervisor can know the appropriate watering time. In this way, good growth of vegetables can be monitored.

  Further, inside the greenhouse house 3550, for example, a composite module (unit) 3554 incorporating an infrared sensor and / or a high-frequency high-sensitivity microphone is disposed. The composite module (unit) 3554 is periodically operated, so that, for example, the presence of pests and insects attached to vegetables can be monitored.

  As an application example showing another embodiment system, FIGS. 37G and 37H show an example in which a plurality of different types of composite modules (units) are combined and monitored. In particular, FIG. 37G is characterized by “detecting a combination that is not possible normally”. As a result, an effect of accurately and efficiently detecting an abnormality is produced. FIG. 37H is characterized by “detecting an association between a plurality of different identification data”. As a result, the effect of improving the state detection accuracy is produced. By obtaining sensor information from a plurality of different types of composite modules (units) at the same time as described above, there is an effect of improving the state change detection accuracy.

  First, a method of “detecting a combination that cannot be performed normally” will be described with reference to FIG. 37G. For example, if a weapon is present in a hospital or school (elementary school, junior high school, high school, university), police station, or around the Imperial Palace (specifically, metal reaction detection using a metal detector), the system computer is an impossible object. Can be detected as a combination. As a specific example, FIG. 37G shows a room in a hospital. In this room, for example, a patient bed 3560 and a medical instrument box 3561 are provided. Here, a composite module (unit) 3560 a is attached in the patient bed 3560. Similarly, a composite module (unit) 3561a is attached to the medical device box 3561. The identification data of the bed 3560 is stored as the self-attribute data 1793 (FIG. 7B) in the composite module (unit) 3560a. The identification data of the bed 3560 can be appropriately transmitted in response to a request from the system controller 3562 installed outside. On the other hand, identification data of a medical device box 3561 is stored as self-attribute data 1793 (FIG. 7B) in the composite module (unit) 3561a. In response to a request from the system controller 3562 installed outside, the identification data of the medical instrument box 3561 can be transmitted as a reply. Based on this, the system controller 3562 can always grasp the combination of products present in the hospital room. In this manner, the system controller 3562 includes a database of various products that are allowed to exist in the hospital room.

  Here, it is assumed that a weapon 3565 such as a knife is brought into the hospital room. A compound module (unit) 3565a is also built in the weapon 3565 such as a blade. Then, when this composite module (unit) 3565a transmits self-attribute data 1793 (product identification data) stored in advance, the system controller 3562 recognizes that a product that does not permit the presence of a patient room has appeared. As a result, the system controller 3562 can quickly report the abnormal state to the security room, the monitoring quality, or the security company.

  The above example shows an example of a hospital room, but not limited to this, various areas such as the Imperial Palace, Presidential Palace, guard range around the Prime Minister's Palace, schools (elementary, junior high school, high school, university, etc.), police stations, etc. And can be applied within the facility.

  FIG. 37H shows another example in which a plurality of types of sense information obtained from a plurality of different combination modules 1295 (or units 1290) are monitored in combination. Here, an example is shown in which a passenger 3570 moves from an airport 3567 to an airport 3568 by an airplane 3569. Here, for example, a composite module (unit) 3570a is built in the passenger's belongings such as a passport, bag, hat, and shoes, and the self-attribute data storage area 1793 in the composite module (unit) 3570a (see FIG. 7B). Identification data corresponding to is previously recorded. Similarly, a composite module (unit) 3573a is bonded to the carry bag 3573 owned by the passenger. Also, carry bag identification data is recorded in advance in the self-attribute data storage area 1793 in the composite module (unit) 3573a.

When the passenger 3570 gets on the plane 3569, the system controller 3571 collects identification data of the passenger's belongings (baggage) 3572 and the carry bag 3573. The plurality of identification data (identification data of the passenger's belongings 3572 and identification data of the carry bag 3573) are associated with each other and recognized by the system controller 3571 as essential combination identification data of the passenger 3570.

  On the other hand, another system controller 3572 is installed in advance at the airport 3568 to which the passenger 3570 moves. When the passenger 3570 arrives at the destination airport 3568, a plurality of identification data (identification data of the passenger's belongings 3572 and identification data of the carry bag 3573) associated with the passenger 3570 are transferred to the source system via the Internet. The data is automatically transferred from the controller 3571 to the system controller 3572 installed at the destination. Then, the system controller 3572 independently accesses the composite module (unit) 3570a incorporated in the passenger's belongings such as a passport, bag, hat, shoes, and the composite module (unit) 3573a incorporated in the carry bag 3573, Each identification data (identification data of passenger's belongings 3572 and identification data of carry bag 3573) is acquired.

  Next, the plurality of identification data acquired from the combination modules (units) 3570a and 3573a and the plurality of identification data acquired from the system controller 3571 of the movement source (identification data of passenger belongings 3572 and identification data of the carry bag 3573) are collated. To do. As a result, the destination system controller 3572 can determine whether the belongings of the passenger 3570 have been normally transported from the airport 3567 to the airport 3568.

Section 5.2.3 Application example of the section division method to the social infrastructure field This section 5.2.3 describes an example of section division when section division in the social infrastructure field is adapted. The section division unit in the social infrastructure field tends to be larger than the scale described in Section 5.1.3.

  For example, when each section 1142 is associated with each cutout (room) or floor in the building, the average size of the cutout area in the building is larger than the average size of the room in the private house. Each section 1142 may be assigned to each house in the apartment house.

  When section division is applied to the social infrastructure field, the section structure to be divided may have a hierarchy. For example, when the above apartment is taken as an example, the upper section division may correspond to the first upper layer, and the lower section division may correspond to the room allocation in each door. Similarly, sections hierarchized for each division scale corresponding to a predetermined area may be made to correspond. For example, in Japan, Japan is divided into units of capitals, prefectures, and prefectures (the upper sections are made to correspond to the above units), and Tokyo is divided into a plurality of wards and cities. Some prefectures are divided into multiple cities and counties. In accordance with this division, the middle section may be associated, and the lower section may be associated with each address.

  FIG. 35 is a diagram schematically showing a map of a specific area. As described above, each section 1142 may correspond to each address. The section 1142 may be divided in accordance with a predetermined function. One example will be described. In Japan, there are cases where a water pipe or a wired communication line (such as a telephone line or an optical fiber) is installed directly below the main trunk road. In some cases, power supply lines are installed above the main trunk roads. As described above, the division 1900 of the sections 1_1142-1 to 4_1142-4 may be performed for each region or at predetermined intervals along main trunk roads, water and sewage pipes, distribution power lines, and wired communication lines. In the system of this embodiment, a plurality of sensor modules 1260 or sensor / communication modules 1460 are arranged in the section 1142, and sensor information obtained therefrom is integrated or managed for each section 1142. It is possible to extract the above deteriorated place, search for a water leak location in the water and sewage system, or search for a disconnection location of a distribution power line or a wired communication line. As a result, it becomes easy to extract a more detailed degradation location on the road, search for a water leak location in the water and sewage system, and / or search for a disconnection location of a distribution power line or a wired communication line.

  Further, regarding the grasping of the congestion state of main arterial roads such as highways, the division 1900 of sections 1_1142-1 to 4_1142-4 may be performed for each region or every predetermined interval along the main arterial road as described above. If the traffic situation for each section 1142 is displayed, it is easy to accurately grasp the traffic situation. As content relatively similar to that, the division method of section 1142 may be used for grasping the congestion situation in a predetermined area. In other words, when an event such as a soccer or baseball game or a concert is held, the area around the event venue is divided into multiple sections 1142, and it is more efficient to guide passers-by and to arrange police officers by grasping the crowded state of traffic in each section. Can be done.

  As described above, the system according to the present embodiment not only facilitates the understanding of the situation of the entire wide area by integrating and managing the information collection results in units of section 1142, but also improves the convenience of the maintenance processing of the social infrastructure system. to be born.

  As an application example in the social infrastructure field, which is slightly similar to the above-described main traffic congestion, it is possible to handle logistics management. For example, there is an air transportation method that shortens the transportation time in order to transport the fish and shellfish to a remote place while maintaining the freshness of the seafood. However, from the viewpoint of reducing transportation costs, a method of ensuring freshness for a long period of time by remote transportation by vehicle is also being studied. As a result of the investigation, it is known that temperature control during transportation is important for ensuring the freshness of seafood, vegetables and fruits.

  That is, since the oxidation reaction rate and corrosion rate inside the seafood, vegetables and fruits depend on the ambient temperature, it is desirable to set the storage temperature of the seafood, vegetables and fruits low from this viewpoint. On the other hand, when a fish is placed in a sub-freezing environment, the blood in the body freezes and expands, so a clear decrease in freshness occurs. Similarly, in the case of vegetables and fruits, the volume expansion due to freezing of moisture adhering to the surface and moisture contained inside causes a clear decrease in freshness. Therefore, in remote transportation by vehicle, it is necessary to keep the temperature of seafood, vegetables and fruits in the refrigerated vehicle within the range of “0 ± 1 ° C.”.

  Therefore, it is possible to control the air conditioning in the refrigerator car based on the temperature information obtained from the individual packaging containers by installing temperature sensors in the packaging containers for seafood, vegetables and fruits. The temperature sensor in this case corresponds to the sensor / communication module 1460. The section 1142 is made to correspond to “the environment in each refrigerated vehicle”.

  However, the system of the present embodiment is not limited to the above, and other section division methods may be adopted. In the system of this embodiment, as described in section 4.4, the position of the emission source of the radio wave transmitted from each sensor / communication module 1460 can be detected. Therefore, by using the position detection technology for the sensor / communication module 1460 for detecting the temperature, it is possible to track the transportation location of each seafood, vegetable and fruit packaging container in real time. Furthermore, it is possible to identify each packing container by using the IEEE extended address SEXADRS on the transmission side in FIG. 12A (e) (or the transmission side IP address information SIPADRS described in section 2.4) from the description in section 2.3. Become. Therefore, when the above technologies are combined, not only can the transportation route and required transportation time for each packaging container for seafood, vegetables and fruits be managed, but also transportation delays due to traffic congestion in the middle of the transportation route of the refrigerator truck storing this packaging container. Can be managed in real time. As a result, the refrigerated vehicle may be instructed whether or not to avoid traffic congestion in consideration of the pre-storage time of the packaging container before vehicle transportation.

  When the present embodiment system is applied to the physical distribution management described above, a method for selecting a physical communication medium (communication media) used for the network line 1782 in the same system in FIG. For example, in the IEEE (Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers) 802.11n standard corresponding to the mid-range radio, the effective cell radius is said to be several hundred meters. Therefore, when the mid-range radio is adopted as this physical communication medium, it is necessary to set the physical size of each system α_1132, β_1134 to 1 km or less. On the other hand, the cell radius of IEEE 802.16e-2005 corresponding to long-distance radio is 1 to 3 km. Therefore, when medium-range radio is adopted as this physical communication medium, it is desirable to set the physical size of each system α_1132, β_1134 to around 3 km.

  Then, sections 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m may be defined by spatially dividing the systems α_1132 and β_1134 of the above sizes along the transportation route (for example, the main trunk road in FIG. 35). In this way, when the transport locations for each seafood, vegetable and fruit packaging container are managed for each section 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m, for example, there is an effect that the location causing the delivery delay due to traffic congestion in the middle of the transport route can be grasped in detail. . Then, if the result is notified to other delivery vehicles to instruct avoidance of a traffic jam location, the other delivery vehicles can be smoothly transported.

  Another application example related to the method of applying the system of the present embodiment to the above physical distribution management will be described below. In this application example, the “simple plug-in / plug-out method using composite module position detection” described in section 4.2 is used. In this case, short-range radio is adopted as the physical communication medium of the same system network line 1782 (FIG. 10A).

  Here, the system α_1132 is made to correspond to the inside of the large refrigerator which stores the seafood, vegetables and fruit packaging containers incorporating the sensor / communication module 1460 for detecting temperature. Moreover, since the inside of this space is divided finely and sections 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m are defined, the storage location in the large refrigerator of this packing container is automatically managed. And when this packaging container is shipped, it is taken out of the said large refrigerator. Thus, automatic plug-out processing from the system α_1132 is performed, and the shipping date and time is managed in the system controller α_1126.

  Next, the inside of the cargo bed space in the refrigerator car that transports the packing container is made to correspond to the system β_1134. Further, a section 1142 is defined in detail in the space in this space. The system controller β_1128 installed therein collects temperature information from the sensor / communication module 1460 and controls the air conditioner in the refrigerator car.

  In the method of section 4.4, only the location of the communication module 1202 corresponding to wireless communication is detected, and the position of the sensor module 1260 in the sensor / communication module 1460 and the drive in the drive / communication module 1470 are detected. The position of the module 1270 is not detected. Therefore, when the temperature management accuracy in the refrigerated vehicle is high and the temperature management for each packing container is not always necessary, the communication module 1202 supporting short-range wireless communication can be used instead of the sensor / communication module 1460. good.

  Then, the inside of the warehouse (large refrigerator) to which the refrigerator is delivered is made to correspond to the system γ. Since the system controller γ mounted in the system γ shares information with the system controllers α_1126 and β_1128 described above, information such as delivery delay information, time required for pre-storage in the warehouse before shipment, internal temperature during transportation, etc. The freshness of seafood, vegetables and fruits in the packaging container can be predicted from the information. Since the freshness after delivery can be predicted in this way, the effect of improving the ease of pricing the corresponding seafood, vegetables and fruits and the subsequent ease of selecting the delivery destination are produced.

  Further, as another application example using the “simple plug-in / plug-out method using the position detection of the composite module”, it may be used for “automatic settlement at the time of passing a gate or purchasing a product”. In addition, as a composite module used in this application example, a sensor / communication module 1460 corresponding to voice input may be used. In Japan, near-field radio such as FeliCa (a coined word combining Felicity and Card), which is a contactless IC card standard, is used for entrance / exit management at the entrance / exit of a designated room and when passing through a railway-related ticket gate (gate). It is used for ticket gate processing or automatic payment when purchasing products. However, since near-field wireless communication is used for communication of the non-contact type IC card, it takes time to take out the non-contact type IC card from a storage place when it is carried every time a user uses it.

  On the other hand, if the near field wireless communication is changed to the near field wireless communication (or medium distance wireless communication), the user can save the trouble of taking out from a portable (storage) place such as a bag, a bag, and a pocket at the time of use. Here, the physical shape of the package on which the sensor / communication module 1460-5 is mounted is not necessarily a card, and a free shape that is easy to carry, such as a necklace or a tie pin, is allowed. Then, the system α_1132 region is set only in the vicinity of the entrance door of the predetermined room, in the vicinity of the entrance of the railway-related ticket gate (gate), or in the vicinity of the vending machine or the purchase window of the store. In the method of section 4.4, only the location of the communication module 1202 corresponding to wireless communication is detected, and the position of the sensor module 1260 in the sensor / communication module 1460 and the drive in the drive / communication module 1470 are detected. The position of the module 1270 is not detected. Accordingly, for the traffic management of the entrance door of the predetermined room and the ticket gate (gate) related to the railway, the single communication module 1202 corresponding to wireless communication may be used instead of the sensor / communication module 1460-5.

  Then, when the user comes in front of the predetermined entrance door or just before the ticket gate (gate) passage, or when the user approaches the vending machine or the purchase window of the store, “plug-in processing” (Section 4.2) ) Is performed. After that, when the user leaves the place, “plug-out processing” is automatically performed. However, the system controller α_1126 manages the passage history and purchase settlement history of the user's gate (gateway door and ticket gate). Further, by using the position detection of the sensor / communication module 1460-5 (see section 4.2), it is possible to automatically recognize an emergency such as an abnormal drop from the user platform onto the track.

  In particular, in front of a predetermined entrance door or a passport of a ticket gate (gate), a passing user may hold his / her hand to a predetermined place for personal verification or may place a finger. In this case, the personal verification method is not limited to palm verification or fingerprint verification, and personal verification may be performed by imaging a vein pattern using near infrared light reflected near the palm or finger surface. Further, the person verification may be performed by face recognition without using a hand or a finger. Here, prior to the user's personal verification, the above plug-in processing is performed when the user comes in front of the predetermined entrance door or just before the entrance of the ticket gate (gate). Immediately after the plug-in, the system controller α_1126 (see FIG. 8A or FIG. 8B) is used by using the unique identification information of the sensor / communication module 1460-5 or the communication module 1202 (for example, the IEEE extended address EXADRS in FIG. 12A (e)). ) Accesses the server n_1116-n and obtains information for personal collation (authentication) (eg, palm / fingerprint / vein pattern / face pattern) in advance. Then, the personal verification (authentication) information obtained in advance is collated with information obtained in front of the predetermined entrance door or at the entrance of the ticket gate (gate). Here, only the user who matches the verification information is allowed to pass through the entrance door or the ticket gate (gate), and the verification information is discarded. As described above, since the system controller α_1126 obtains personal verification (authentication) information in advance immediately after plug-in, there is an effect that quick personal verification (authentication) can be performed.

  In addition, when the user needs to confirm the electronic payment, the user is asked to give a sound indicating permission (such as a permission word). When the voice (or generated word) information from the sensor / communication module 1460-5 is received by the system controller α_1126 in FIG. 8B, “user voiceprint matching” is performed using the information from the server n — 1116-n. Then, personal authentication is performed by collation confirmation between the voiceprint and the IP address information (FIG. 13B) owned by the sensor / communication module 1460-5 or information corresponding to the IEEE extended address EXADRS. Next, the system controller α_1126 may estimate / determine whether or not a word issued by the user by voice recognition technology indicates “willingness to agree to electronic payment”. When all the above confirmations are completed, communication between the system controller α_1126 and the server n_1116-n related to the user's bank account management is performed, and the electronic payment is completed.

  If this portable system is applied to any of the above-described “distribution management” / “gate passage management” / “electronic payment at the time of product purchase”, the corresponding sensor / communication module 1460-5 can be manufactured at a very low cost. And has the effect of being distributed in large quantities. Conventionally, GPS (Global Positioning System) related parts used for position detection are very expensive, and it has been difficult to distribute them in large quantities. On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the position detection is performed using the radio wave normally emitted by the sensor / communication module 1460-5, there is no additional cost for detecting the position of the sensor / communication module 1460-5. Therefore, the sensor / communication module 1460-5 can be manufactured at a very low cost.

  As an example of application in the social infrastructure field so far, the description has mainly focused on the use of the sensor / communication module 1460. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the drive / communication module 1470 may be used for remote operation of a mobile robot having a built-in movement control unit. For example, sections 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m are defined for each room in a hotel or a housing complex. The system controller α_1126 uses the position detection technology of the drive / communication module 1470 to control the mobile robot to move to the entrance of a predetermined room. The mobile robot may be cleaned in a predetermined room, or a predetermined load may be transported.

  In addition to the above application examples, the present invention can also be applied to agriculture. That is, in the plant factory, for example, the systems α_1132 and β_1134 that are different for each type of plant to be grown are grown under different growth conditions. Furthermore, it is possible to divide into sections 1142 for each growing place of the same kind of plants, and to manage the amount of light illumination, the amount of water supply / replenishment, temperature and humidity for each section, and the state of growth of the plants.

Section 5.3 Application Examples to the Healthcare Field Section 5.3.1 Application Examples of the Wide Area Network System to the Healthcare Field Examples of the application of the wide area network system shown in FIG. Under the commission of the corresponding wholesaler B1_1104-1, the service provider B_1112-2 corresponding to a specific public institution obtains the patient's disease name and symptom and the genetic information of each patient from the system α_1132 corresponding to a hospital or a local medical institution. A method for collecting and organizing information on diseases nationwide can be envisioned. In this case, the public institution (service provider B_1112-2) accesses the system controller α_1126 managing the database in the hospital or the local medical institution (system α_1132) via the network, and automatically collects necessary information. . The analysis result obtained as a result is reported to the state (wholesaler B1 — 1104-1) and is disclosed to the public via the Internet or by means of news reports such as newspapers / magazines.

Section 5.3.2 Application example of composite module to healthcare field Sensor / communication module 1460 having the structure shown in FIG. 5 is light, small, power-saving (no external power supply required), and low cost It has the merit of Therefore, taking advantage of these merits, the sensor / communication module 1460 can be directly attached to the moving human body. As a specific mounting method, the sensor / communication module 1460 may be mounted directly on the human body using a mounting member such as a wristwatch, glasses, or a tie pin, or may be fixed to clothes. . The sensor / communication module 1460 combined with a temperature sensor, a pulse sensor, a respiration sensor (acceleration sensor), an oxygen concentration sensor in the bloodstream, etc. is attached to a patient or a healthy person, and the health condition can be traced in real time. Yes. In addition, the system controller α_1126 installed in the unit of a hospital room or individual room analyzes the detection results in real time and notifies the doctor or nurse only when there is an abnormality. This has the effect of realizing efficient care for patients and healthy people. . Furthermore, since only necessary information can be selected and communicated to the server n_1116-n (FIG. 1) installed for each hospital, there is an effect that the efficiency of data management and data processing in the server n_1116-n is increased.

  In the method described above, the method of directly attaching the composite module to the human body has been described. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and a composite module (for example, composite module 7_1295-7 in FIG. 2) may be directly inserted / invaded or embedded in the human body. In this case, the composite module 7_1295-7 is incorporated in the human body (specific user) and moves together with the human body (specific user) instead of being installed alone in the network system α_1132. However, in the method of mounting the above-described composite module on the human body, a mental burden is placed on the user when the composite module is detached (the user feels troublesome). In contrast, as described later, by inserting / intruding / embedding (incorporating) the composite module into the human body in advance, user-related information can be appropriately obtained on the system controller α_1126 side without placing a burden on the user to remove the composite module. There is.

  First, a method for embedding the composite module in the human body will be described. There is a method of embedding the composite module 1295 shown in FIG. 4A (b) in the vicinity of a suture site immediately after an incision operation for a patient. Here, as the progress after the operation, there is a risk that the incision site or the removal (cutting) site of the affected part may be suppurated or internal bleeding may occur. Therefore, it is important as a post-surgery treatment to detect and improve the occurrence of suppuration or internal bleeding at the site of removal (cutting) of the affected part as soon as possible. When bacillus is mixed into the incision site or the affected part extraction (cutting) site and suppuration occurs, the pH value (hydrogen ion index) of the suppuration site changes. Accordingly, a sensor / communication module 1460 in which a pH sensor module for detecting a pH value or a blood sensor module is incorporated may be used as the composite module 1295 embedded in the stitched portion.

  In this case, the period of follow-up after surgery need not be so long. Therefore, as described in section 1.6, even if control is performed so that the sensor / communication module 1460 operates only during the postoperative follow-up observation period using the life management data 1794 or the operation period management data 1795 in FIG. 7B. good. In addition, the lifetime (battery life) of the power storage module (battery) 1554 in the sensor / communication module 1460 shown in FIG. 5 is set to be short in advance, and the sensor / The communication module 1460 may be disabled. As a result, unnecessary wireless radio wave transmission from the composite module 1295 (sensor / communication module 1460) after the post-surgical follow-up period can be prevented, and the burden on the system controller α_1126 that controls / manages network communication in the network system α_1132 can be reduced. An effect is born.

  Next, a method for inserting or intruding the composite module into the human body will be described. In this case, a composite module 1295 taking the form of FIG. 4A (b) is enclosed in a capsule, and the user swallows the capsule together with water or soft drinks. For example, by reducing the selling price of the soft drink mixed with the capsule, the composite module 1295 can be intruded into the body while reducing the mental burden on the user. The present invention is not limited to this. For example, when a user with sickness regularly drinks a medicine, the capsule may be swallowed together. The capsule built in the composite module 1295 stays in the user's body until it is excreted in a toilet or the like, and can continue to transmit user information. In addition, as described above, the life management data 1794, the operation period management data 1795, or the battery life of the power storage module (battery) 1554 can be used to prevent unnecessary wireless radio wave transmission from the composite module 1295 after excretion.

  Examples of using this method include user's health management, early detection of disease / onset, or user's daily exercise state management. First, an application example to user health management and early detection of disease onset / onset will be described. In this case, the sensor module 1260 of FIG. 4B (b) is used as the other function module 1440 having functions other than the communication of FIG. 4A (b). As an example of the sensor module 1260, a temperature sensor module that measures body temperature inside the body may be used.

  Conventionally, as a method for early detection of a patient suffering from influenza, for example, there is a method of installing a sensor for measuring a user's body surface temperature using infrared rays at an airport gate or the like. However, if the user passes a temperature sensor installed before the body temperature rises due to the onset of influenza (that is, immediately before the onset), there is a risk of missing an influenza patient. In comparison, tracking the body temperature change over time using the capsule with the built-in temperature sensor module 1260 has the effect of improving the detection accuracy of influenza patients.

  As another example of the sensor module 1260 incorporated in the capsule, a sensor module capable of measuring a blood glucose level may be used. This method measures the sugar content in blood from a near-infrared light spectrum pattern obtained from blood. Diabetic patients tend to have higher blood sugar levels (sugar content in the blood) than healthy individuals. When the blood glucose level of a diabetic patient exceeds an allowable range, a quick response such as medication is required. Therefore, the capsule containing the blood glucose sensor module constantly monitors the blood glucose level in the patient's body, so that it is possible to quickly detect an abnormal blood glucose level and increase the therapeutic effect of diabetic patients.

  Conventionally, in hospitals and facilities, nurses regularly measure the temperature and blood glucose level of inpatients. Compared to that, by having the inpatient regularly take capsules with built-in composite module 1295, not only can immediate treatment be performed for sudden changes in the patient's medical condition, but also hospital management that saves labor costs related to body temperature and blood glucose measurement And the efficiency of facility operation. Furthermore, by combining the position detection of the composite module 1295 with the method described in Section 4.4 using FIGS. 31 to 34, there is an effect that it is possible to detect wrinkles of dementia patients in hospitals and facilities.

  Further, “name of person who took medicine” may be recorded together with “name of medicine” as a part of the self-attribute data 1793 in the composite module 1295 (refer to the corresponding section in section 1.6). Here, the camera is constantly monitored with a camera installed in a hospital or facility, and the timing when the inpatient or resident takes the specified medicine is managed. When the inpatient or resident takes the specified medicine, the system controller α_1126 records the above information in the composite module 1295. As a result, the medication status of hospitalized patients and residents can be managed at all times.

  Next, an example of utilization for daily exercise state management of users will be described. In this case, an acceleration sensor may be used as the sensor module 1260 incorporated in the capsule. By combining the acceleration sensor output incorporated in the body and the position detection information of the composite module 1295 described above, the user's motion state can be monitored sequentially in real time. If the daily exercise amount of the managed user does not reach the predetermined target value, the user proposes a countermeasure from the user I / F unit 1234 in the system controller α_1126 or the display unit in the system controller β_1128. Presented to.

  An example of an embodiment system that uses the “detection of a combination that cannot be normally performed” described with reference to FIG. In general, a combination of multiple drugs is often prescribed to patients. In this case, it is possible to automatically determine whether different medicines can be taken together. For example, the compound module 1295 (unit 1290) is mixed in each medicine tablet. As described above, the composite module 1295 (unit 1290) is enclosed in a capsule made of a material harmless to the human body. If the capsule is removed from the body simultaneously with excretion in the patient's toilet, the combined module 1295 (unit 1290) does not affect the human body. The composite module 1295 (unit 1290) built-in capsule mixed in the medicine tablet in this way also stops the radio wave emission when it goes out of the body by the same method as described above.

  Where the combined module 1295 (unit 1290) includes a communication module 1660 as shown in FIG. 4A. Further, as shown in FIG. 7B, self-attribute data 1793 is recorded in advance in the communication module 1660. In this embodiment system example, medicine identification data is stored in the self-attribute data 1793.

  As shown in FIG. 2, in the memory unit 1232 in the system controller α_1126 for exclusive use for testing a plurality of prescribed medicines, a data table of medicines that can be combined in advance and medicines that are health problems A data table showing the combinations is recorded. Then, at the moment when the patient or the dispensed pharmacist passes a plurality of prescribed medicines and passes in front of the above-described medicine inspection system controller α_1126, whether or not the medicines can be combined can be easily determined.

  In the system of this embodiment, as described in section 4.4, the arrangement locations of all the units 1290 or the combination modules 1295 can be detected in real time. Therefore, when the combined module 1295 (unit 1290) mixed in the medicine passes through a predetermined location, the medicine test system controller α_1126 appropriately detects the situation. The drug test system controller α_1126 is prescribed by requesting the self-attribute data 1793 (drug identification data) response to the compound module 1295 (unit 1290) mixed in the drug from the drug test system controller α_1126. The contents of multiple drugs can be monitored as appropriate. By referencing the drug information collected by the drug testing system controller α_1126 with the above-described data table, it is possible to easily extract a combination of drugs that are incompatible. When an inappropriate combination of drugs is found, a warning is issued as appropriate to the user or pharmacist by display or voice.

  Conventionally, a data table indicating combinations of drugs that cause health problems is managed for each dispensing pharmacy or for each medical station in a hospital. In Japan, there is a “medicine notebook” dedicated to each patient, which is a system that shows the history of medication taken by the patient in the past. Therefore, by using the medicine notebook, it is easy for a pharmacist to determine whether to drink an inappropriate medicine. Therefore, by referring to the data table and the medicine notebook, it is possible to easily confirm the incompatible medicine. However, when the dispensing pharmacy or hospital medical office is so crowded that there are many patients waiting for drugs, the pharmacist has no time to refer to the data table each time. In that case, there are many opportunities to make an inappropriate medicine swallowing determination depending on the memory of the pharmacist. As a result, it can be said that there is no risk of prescribing a combination of drugs that are reluctantly inappropriate due to the difference in memory among pharmacists.

  When the above-described system application example of the present embodiment is used, a manual data table reference by a pharmacist becomes unnecessary. As a result, not only the dispensing efficiency of the dispensing pharmacy is greatly improved, but also the effect of automatically checking the ingestion of the medicine at a very high speed and with high accuracy is produced. In addition, since pharmacies and medical offices in hospitals dispense manually (pharmacists), there is a risk of dispensing errors. On the other hand, by using the system application example of the present embodiment, it is possible to detect dispensing mistakes with high accuracy. As a result, the patient's level of safety with respect to medication is greatly improved.

  In this section 5.3.2, as a method of putting the composite module 1295 (or unit 1290) into the body, the method of incorporating the composite module 1295 (or unit 1290) in the capsule has been described. However, not limited to this, any means may be used. For example, a composite module 1295 (or unit 1290) configured of one chip (or a hybrid chip) may be laminated (or coated) with a material harmless to the human body instead of being put in a capsule.

5.3.3 Example of application of section division method to health care field As an example of application of section division method to health care field, section 1142 is applied to the floor unit of the ward and the room unit as in section 5.2.3. Division may be performed, or section 1142 may be divided by medical unit of the ward. In the system of the present embodiment, various sensor information obtained from the information may be integrated / managed for each section 1142. As a result, for example, it is possible to grasp, for example, the frequency of nurse call and the occurrence frequency of patients whose symptoms suddenly worsen as the situation grasp for each section according to hierarchy. Reflecting the grasped result in a staffing plan such as a nurse has the effect of improving the quality of patient care services in the hospital.

  On the other hand, as an application example in the health care field, each part in an integrated human body may be divided into sections 1_1142-1 to m_1142-m. Here, as sense information about the human body, there are a wide variety of sense information such as local body temperature, local sweat volume, local skeletal muscle tension ratio, local vascular oxygen concentration change, and local pulse state. can get. By integrating / managing these various pieces of sense information for each section 1142, it is easy to grasp the abnormal part in real time, and therefore, there is an effect that it is easy to extract a suddenly worsening part of a symptom and grasp a patient's medical condition.

Although several embodiments of the present invention have been described, these embodiments are presented as examples and are not intended to limit the scope of the invention. These novel embodiments can be implemented in various other forms, and various omissions, replacements, and changes can be made without departing from the scope of the invention. These embodiments and modifications thereof are included in the scope and gist of the invention, and are included in the invention described in the claims and the equivalents thereof.

Chapter 6 Smart home appliance automatic control method Section 6.1 Relationship between automatic home appliances that support automatic control and smart home appliance-related devices FIG. 38 shows an example of a smart home appliance automatic control system in this embodiment system. The home gateway system 10 (corresponding to the system α_1132 in FIG. 2) exists in the home network system 1 (corresponding to the system α_1132 in FIG. 2), and is connected to various devices via the network line 1782 in the same system. . The home gateway 10 is connected to a server n_1116-n via a broadband router 12 (corresponding to the battery built-in router (gateway) 1300 in FIG. 9).

  Here, the server n_1116-n and the broadband router 12 are connected by a network line 1788 outside the system. As a specific communication medium that carries the network line 1788 outside the system, an optical cable, a wired cable, or a cellular communication such as 2G / 3G / 4G (a long distance wireless method) or a medium distance wireless method such as Wi-Fi (Wireless Fidelity). Any of these may be used. On the other hand, as a specific communication medium for carrying the same system network line 1782, a short-range wireless system such as Bluetooth or ZigBee may be used. A medium distance wireless system such as Wi-Fi (Wireless Fidelity) may be used for the inter-router line 780 between the home gateway 10 and the broadband router 12.

  Therefore, in the communication module 1202-3 responsible for the communication function in the home gateway 10 (corresponding to the system α_1132 in FIG. 2), it corresponds to a plurality of different communication methods such as the inter-router line 780 and the same-system network line 1782, Communication protocol conversion is performed in the home gateway 10 (that is, in the communication module 1202-3).

  In the embodiment of FIG. 38 as a form of information communication through the same system network line 1782, the robot cleaner 16, the LED lighting 58, the camera unit 56 in the refrigerator, etc. (corresponding to various devices 1-5_1250-1 to 5 in FIG. 2). ) Are directly connected, and two types are allowed, which are connected via home automation (HA) adapters 1 to 4 — 14-1 to 4. However, although detailed description is omitted in FIG. 38, the communication module 202 connected to the network line 1782 in the same system is built in the LED lighting 58 and the camera unit 56 in the refrigerator as in the robot cleaner 16. .

  Here, the LED illumination 58 means an illumination device using an LED, and is used for illumination of an entire room or illumination of a local area such as a light stand or a flashlight (with a built-in communication function). Further, the portion responsible for the communication function in the LED illumination 58 corresponds to the communication module 1666 with a built-in antenna in FIG. In the system shown in FIG. 38, the camera unit 56 is built in the refrigerator, and the stored items in the refrigerator can be automatically managed in the home gateway 10.

  As already explained with reference to FIG. 6D in section 1.5, the conventional remote controller of the air conditioner 42 and the television 44 having no communication function is simply replaced with a composite module 1295 (drive / communication module 1470) having the communication function. Thus, the conventional air conditioner 42 and television 44 can be managed / controlled within the home network system 1 (corresponding to the system α_1132 in FIG. 2). In addition, in section 1.9, the function of the existing device 1250 is expanded by installing the composite module 1295 in the existing device 1250. As described above, the composite module 1295 installed as the function expansion or the communication function addition of the existing device 1250 corresponds to the home automation (HA) adapters 1 to 4_14-1 to 4 in FIG. 3A (c), the combination of the air conditioner 42 and the home automation (HA) adapter 1_14-1 or the television 44 so that the unit module 1295 and the device 1250 are combined to form one unit 1290. A set of home automation (HA) adapter 2_14-2, a set of laundry 46 and home automation (HA) adapter 3_14-3, a set of outlet or table tap 48 and home automation (HA) adapter 4_14-4, one each. Unit 1290 is formed.

  In the explanation after FIG. 38, the robot cleaner 16 is made to correspond as an example of the smart home appliance corresponding to automatic control, and the air conditioner 42 and the television 44 are made to correspond to examples of the smart home appliance related devices. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and any device that can be connected to a network at home and whose operation state is automatically switched based on a user's behavior or state estimation / judgment result may be made to correspond to a smart home appliance that supports automatic control. . In this case, other home network connection devices can correspond to smart home appliances.

  As shown in FIG. 38, a device controller 240 is built in the robot cleaner 16 which is an example of the smart home appliance for automatic control. The device controller 240 performs control corresponding to the operation mode of the smart home appliance that supports automatic control. As a specific function, the robot cleaner 16 can be automatically set to a non-operation state or a manner mode state as will be described later. Here, the device controller 240 may be referred to as a smart home appliance automatic control device. That is, the smart home appliance automatic control device (device controller 240) that automatically sets the automatic control-compatible smart home appliance (robot cleaner 16) to a non-operation state or a manner mode state includes the automatic control-compatible smart home appliance (robot cleaner 16). ) Included. As shown in FIG. 38, the robot cleaner 16 has a built-in memory unit 242, and information necessary for estimating / determining the user's behavior and state (Step 75 in FIG. 39) is recorded in the memory unit 242 in advance. ing.

  The cleaning function unit in the robot cleaner 16 corresponds to the drive module 270 shown in FIG. Further, a place that realizes an obstacle detection function using a built-in camera or the like in the robot cleaner 16 and a cleaning place automatic determination function corresponds to the sensor module 260 of FIG.

  On the other hand, the home gateway 10 (corresponding to the system α_1132 in FIG. 2) also includes a processor 1230, and here, control corresponding to the operation mode of the smart home appliance capable of automatic control can be performed. Similar to the device controller 240, the processor 1230 can automatically set the robot cleaner 16 to the non-operation state or the manner mode. Therefore, this processor 1230 can also be regarded as a kind of the smart home appliance automatic control apparatus described above. Therefore, when the processor 1230 in the home gateway 10 controls the robot cleaner 16, the smart home appliance automatic control device (processor 1230) is arranged outside the automatic control-compatible smart home appliance (robot cleaner 16). Yes. Similarly, a memory unit 1232 is built in the home gateway 10, and information necessary for estimating / determining a user's action and state (Step 75 in FIG. 39) is recorded in the memory unit 1232 in advance.

  When the home gateway 10 is specifically a personal computer, a display or a keyboard corresponds to the user I / F unit 1234. On the other hand, when the home gateway 10 specifically takes the form of a tablet or a smart phone, an input display screen corresponds to the user I / F unit 1234.

  Although omitted in FIG. 38, a number of composite modules 1295 that exist independently are installed in the home network system 1 (system α_1132). As a sensor / communication module 1460, which is a kind of the composite module 1295, a human sensor having a communication function, an optical sensor, and a wind sensor are installed individually (or in the form of an iris) and will be described later with reference to FIG. Human sensor information 602, optical sensor information 606, and wind sensor information 608 can be obtained.

6.2 Overview of control method for smart home appliances that support automatic control The system of this embodiment (smart home appliance automatic control system) integrates various sensors connected to the network and information obtained from smart home appliance-related devices to The state or request is estimated / determined, and the smart home appliance that supports automatic control (and the smart home appliance-related device as necessary) can be controlled to an optimum operating state based on the estimation / determination result. Thereby, it is possible to provide a high-quality service to the user. In addition, as a method, first of all, automatically select various sensors and related devices to collect information based on the basic functions of smart home appliances that support automatic control and their installation location (however, the installation location may always move). To do. Next, using the determination information (determination table) (described later with reference to FIG. 43) stored in advance in the memory unit 242 or the memory unit 1232 in FIG. 38, the user's action, state, or request is estimated / determined. . Then, based on the estimation / judgment result and information obtained from the smart home appliance-related device, the operation state of the smart home appliance-related device may be changed and controlled in advance. In that case, after the operation of the smart home appliance corresponding to automatic control is completed, the operation state of the changed smart home appliance-related device is restored.

  The specific detailed method will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the device controller 240 (FIG. 38) in the robot cleaner 16 or the processor 1230 (FIG. 38) in the home gateway 10 (system controller α_1126) may execute the processing sequentially according to the procedure of FIG. ) In addition, the device controller (not shown) in other smart home appliances may be assigned, and further, cooperative work (or role sharing) between the device controller 240 and the processor 1230 may be performed.

  Here, a control method of the robot cleaner 16 will be described as a specific example of the smart home appliance that supports automatic control. However, the present embodiment system (smart home appliance automatic control system) is not limited thereto, and the control shown in FIG. 39 may be performed on all smart home appliances connected to the network.

  First, as Step 71, the user presets the control conditions for the smart home appliance (robot cleaner 16) that supports automatic control from the user I / F unit 1234 in the home gateway 10. FIG. 40 shows a screen that the user sees at this time. Only when the user sets the “automatic cleaning setting” item to On, automatic control of the smart home appliance (robot cleaner) as shown in FIG. 39 is started. On the other hand, when the “automatic cleaning setting” item is set to Off, the user manually operates the smart home appliance (robot cleaner 16). In the system according to the present embodiment, the user can finely set conditions for estimating / determining the user's behavior and state and automatically controlling to the optimum operation state.

In this embodiment as the specific control conditions,
○ Is it compatible with cleaning (silent mode) when sleeping?
○ Is it compatible with cleaning (manner mode) during user's work?
○ Do you support cleaning while you are out?
Are set finely by specifying On / Off respectively. Here, the “manner mode” means an operation state in which the exhaust amount of the robot cleaner 16 is lowered to lower the wind force at the exit, or the rotation speed of the intake motor is lowered to lower the volume during operation. In addition, when the user sets “prohibit cleaning while going out (not supported)”, cleaning when the user goes out corresponds to a non-operational state. As described above, in the present embodiment, as a control method corresponding to the operation mode of the automatic home appliance capable of automatic control having a communication function, the automatic home appliance capable of automatic control can be automatically set to a non-operation state or a manner mode. As a result, the smart home appliance (such as the robot cleaner 16) that automatically supports automatic switching automatically switches to the optimum operating state according to the user's behavior and state. This has the effect of providing a comfortable living environment for the user. However, the information required for estimating / determining the user's behavior and state differs for each control condition.

  When the user instructs to start the operation of the smart home appliance for automatic control (robot cleaner 16) in Step 72 of FIG. 39, first, as shown in Step 73, the current status of the smart home appliance for automatic control (robot cleaner 16) is shown. Placement location confirmation is performed. Here, as a method of confirming the current location of the automatic home appliance (robot cleaner) that supports automatic control, the smart home appliance (robot cleaner 16) that supports automatic control may have a GPS (Global Positioning System) function. In addition, the method described in Section 4.4 using FIGS. 31 to 34 may be used.

  Then, as in Step 74, other smart home appliances related to automatic control compatible smart home appliances (robot cleaner 16) (network connection compatible devices other than the robot cleaner 16 such as the air conditioner 42 and the television 44 in FIG. 38). And necessary related sensors (combined modules such as the above-mentioned human sensor, optical sensor, wind sensor, etc.) are selected (selected), and necessary information collection from the smart home appliance related devices and information from the related sensors (composite modules) are selected. (The above-described human sensor information 602, optical sensor information 606, wind sensor information 608, etc.) is collected. Here, information described later with reference to FIGS. 41 and 42 is communicated from other smart home appliance-related devices and related sensors (composite modules) described above.

However, it takes time and effort to collect information from all the smart home appliances and sensors (composite modules) installed in the home at the processing stage of Step 74. In contrast, in the system of the present embodiment, only other smart home appliance-related devices and related sensors (composite modules) that are necessary for automatically setting the current operation state of the automatic home appliance (robot cleaner 16) that supports automatic control are used. Is characterized by automatically selecting (selecting) and collecting information only from the selected device or composite module. Based on this, it is possible to reduce the time and efficiency of collecting necessary information.

  In the system of the present embodiment, in particular, the automatic collected in Step 73 in advance for the selection (selection) of other smart home appliance related devices and related sensors (composite modules) related to the above-described automatic control-compatible smart home appliances (robot cleaner 16). The current location information of the control-compatible smart home appliance (robot cleaner 16) may be used. That is, a general household is often cut off at a plurality of sections 1142 (rooms), and it is more efficient to provide services for each section 1142 (room) as described in Chapter 4. Therefore, based on the information on the section 1142 (room) where the automatic control-compatible smart home appliance (robot cleaner 16) currently checked in Step 73 exists, other smart home appliances installed in the section 1142 (room) and sensors Only the (composite module) is defined as a smart home appliance-related device and a related sensor (composite module). Necessary information is collected only from the smart home appliances and related sensors (composite modules).

  After collecting necessary information from other smart home appliance-related devices and related sensors by the above method, as shown in Step 75, user behavior and user status are estimated / determined. At this time, the information (control table) in FIG. 43 in which the optimal operation state of the smart home appliance (robot cleaner 16) corresponding to automatic control for each control condition selected by the user is used is described. Then, based on the estimation / judgment result regarding the user's behavior and state obtained in Step 75, in Step 76, automatic determination of the optimum operation state of the smart home appliance for automatic control and related devices is performed. Note that instead of using the information of FIG. 43, an algorithm for automatically determining the optimum operating state from information obtained from the smart home appliance-related device and the related sensor may be created in advance as will be described later with reference to FIG.

The robot cleaner 16 has features such as “sound during operation” and “exhaust air blowing”. For this reason, when the robot cleaner 16 operates during playback of the television 44 or during playback of the audio player, the sound emitted from the television 44 or the audio player is drowned, causing a problem that the user feels uncomfortable. As countermeasures, when the user performs the manner mode setting for cleaning while the user is working (while watching the television 44 or the audio player), the cleaning is performed while the user is viewing. A) The volume generated from the robot cleaner 16 is increased. Lower,
b) An unpleasant feeling of the user can be reduced by performing an automatic service such as temporarily increasing the volume from the playback device being viewed. Similarly, when the air conditioner 42 is operating: a) Reduce the amount of exhaust from the robot cleaner,
b) Lowering the wind power of the air conditioner (preventing dust rising)
The unpleasant feeling of the user can be reduced by the automatic service. The operation (b) corresponds to the change control of the operation state of the smart home appliance-related device described in Step 78 of FIG. Further, the operation (a) corresponds to the operation control under the optimum operation condition of the smart home appliance for automatic control (robot cleaner 16) described in the first half of Step 79.

  On the other hand, another service providing mode when “cleaning permission while going out” is set as the user's preset mode will be described. For example, when the user's return home becomes very late, a state in which the smart home appliance for automatic control (robot cleaner 16) automatically operates (cleans) on the night when the outside becomes dark occurs. At this time, if the illumination of the room where the automatic control-compatible smart home appliance (robot cleaner 16) is operating (cleaning) is turned off, “automatic control-compatible smart home appliance (robot, even though the room illumination is off) The cleaner 16) makes a sound ". In this situation, there is a risk that neighbors and people in the next room will misunderstand that a thief is in the room. As a method for preventing such misunderstanding, the LED lighting 58 (FIG. 38) corresponding to the smart home appliance-related device may be automatically turned on during the operation of the smart home appliance (robot cleaner 16) supporting automatic control. .

  As another embodiment, a case where “sleeping permission during sleep (manner mode)” is set as the user's preset mode will be described. When the user goes to bed at night, the LED lighting 58 in the room is often turned off. Therefore, when the LED lighting 58 is turned off at night, the user may automatically determine that he is sleeping and automatically set the operation state of the smart home appliance (robot cleaner 16) for automatic control to the manner mode. .

  However, when “prohibit cleaning while sleeping” is set as the user's preset mode, if the LED lighting 58 is turned off at night, the user is automatically determined to be sleeping and automatically controlled smart home appliances ( The operation state of the robot cleaner 16) is set to a non-operation state.

As described above, in the system according to the present embodiment, the smart home appliance corresponding to automatic control corresponds to a robot cleaner, the smart home appliance related device corresponds to an air conditioner, a television, or a lighting device.
When the smart home appliance-related device is operating, the automatic control-compatible smart home appliance is automatically set to a non-operation state or a manner mode state. As described above, since the operation state of the smart home appliance (automatic control compatible smart home appliance (robot cleaner 16)) is switched according to the operation state of the smart home appliance-related device (air conditioner, television, or lighting device), this operation state is always the user's behavior or state. Ideal for. As a result, it is possible to provide a user with a comfortable living environment.

  Here, in accordance with the order described in Step 78 and Step 79 of FIG. 39, after changing the operating state of the smart home appliance-related equipment (TV 44 / audio player or air conditioner 42), the automatic control-compatible smart home appliance (robot cleaner 16) It is desirable to start operation. And the shift | offset | difference period of the time which the operation state change of this smart household appliance related apparatus was completed and the operation start time of a smart household appliance corresponding to automatic control becomes very important. Some people feel temporary crosstalk when they switch at the same time because there is an after-hearing effect (an effect in which sound reverberation remains in the brain) as a function in the human brain. After a sound generated from a smart home appliance related device such as a television 44 or an audio player enters the human ear, the time until the processing is completed in the brain after the sound signal is transmitted to the brain is 0.05 seconds. It is said that it takes about 1 second (about 0.2 to 3 seconds depending on the person). Therefore, in this embodiment, the time from the completion of Step 78 to the start of the next Step 79 is set to 0.05 seconds or more, preferably 0.2 seconds or more. Conversely, if there is too much time until Step 78 is completed and the next Step 79 is started, there is a risk that the user will feel uncomfortable. In the audio / video world, there is a word called “0.5 second rule”. According to this rule, it is said that a general person does not feel uncomfortable when the sound source switching period is within 0.5 seconds. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the time from the completion of Step 78 to the start of the next Step 79 is desirably set to 0.5 seconds or less. Further, depending on the person, there are people who can wait up to 2 seconds or 5 seconds, so the time in this embodiment needs to be set to 5 seconds or less at worst. And by setting the gap period between the time when the operation status change of the smart home appliance related device is completed and the operation start time of the smart home appliance supporting automatic control as described above, it is possible to temporarily mix the sound source and the time delay. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an unpleasant user's discomfort and provide a comfortable living environment for the user.

  On the other hand, when a smart home appliance (robot cleaner) that supports automatic control is in operation, the operation may stop due to battery exhaustion or in-device trouble. In the system of this embodiment as an abnormal process in this case (the second half of Step 79), the home gateway 10 (system controller α_1126) at home where the user preset the control conditions in Step 71 or a portable terminal such as a tablet or a smartphone on the go (This is also included in a kind of home gateway 10 (system controller β_1128)) to notify the abnormal state.

  As described above, since the robot cleaner 16 can move between different rooms (section 1142), the processing from Step 73 to Step 79 is performed while grasping the current position of the smart home appliance (robot cleaner 16) corresponding to this automatic control as appropriate. There is a need to repeat. When the operation of the smart home appliance for automatic control (robot cleaner 16) is completed, the operation state of the smart home appliance related device whose operation state was changed last time is returned to Step 80, and then the smart home appliance for automatic control (robot cleaner 16) is restored. ) Is notified to the user (Step 81).

Here, the robot cleaner 16 has been described as a specific example of the smart home appliance for automatic control that executes the process of FIG. However, the present embodiment system is not limited to this, and a smart home appliance having other communication functions such as an alarm clock and a flashlight may be applied as a specific example of the smart home appliance capable of automatic control. For example, when an alarm clock is used, the operation of the related device changed in STEP 78 may correspond to “increase the volume of the television 44 or audio device” or “activate the air conditioner 42”. In this case, in Step 80, instead of “returning the operation state of the related device (air conditioner 42 or television 44)”, “continue the operation state of the related device (air conditioner 42 or television 44)” or “related device ( The operation state may be continued or re-changed, such as “changing the set temperature of the air conditioner 42)”.

  On the other hand, the smart home appliance that supports automatic control and requires advanced operation for the robot cleaner 16 has a device controller 240 corresponding to a processor and a memory unit 242 inside, and this device controller 240 can perform the control shown in FIG. . However, in an automatic home appliance (for example, an alarm clock) that supports automatic control that has only a single function, it is expensive to incorporate the device controller 240 and the memory unit 242. As a method for solving this problem, in the system according to the present embodiment, only the drive / communication module 1470 (see FIG. 4C (a)) in which the drive module 1670 and the communication module 1666 that generate only the alarm sound in the alarm clock are integrated. The processor 1230 in the home gateway 10 (system controller α_1126) may be controlled as shown in FIG. In this case, the information (table) for estimating / determining the user's behavior and state as shown in FIG. 43, or the smart home appliance (robot cleaner 16) that supports automatic control for each control condition selected by the user or smart Information (control table) that prescribes the optimum operating state of the home appliance-related equipment (TV 44 / audio player and air conditioner 42) is stored in advance in the memory unit 1232 in the home gateway 10 (system controller α_1126). By adopting this method, an automatic control-compatible smart home appliance can be supplied to the user at a very low cost, so that the effect of easily spreading the system of the present embodiment is produced.

Section 6.3 Communication Information with Smart Appliance Related Device An example of communication information transmitted by the smart appliance related device at Step 74 of FIG. 39 will be described with reference to FIGS. 41 and 42. The data structures shown in FIGS. 41 and 42 show detailed information contents based on the E-format already described with reference to FIG. 15A. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and information collection from smart home appliance-related devices may be performed according to the A-format described in FIG. 15B or the G-format having a data structure similar to this.

  Here, an example of communication information from the television 44 and the air conditioner 42 arranged in the same room will be described as an example of a smart home appliance-related device. That is, as an example of communication information from the air conditioner 42 shown in FIG. 41, the air conditioner operation information 422, the sleep mode setting information 424, and the start / end timer reservation information 426/428 will be described. On the other hand, the communication information example from the television 44 shown in FIG. 42 describes screen display / audio output information 442 and volume setting value 444, recording availability information 446, and program information 448 being reproduced / displayed.

  Here, the program information 448 being reproduced / displayed means a number that is automatically and sequentially incremented and added to a program that the user views (reproduces / displays on the television) during a day. This number is added to the individual exchange information EDT in the program information 448 being reproduced / displayed in FIG. 42 (e) by adding one each time the user changes the television channel. In addition, program switching timing on the broadcast side can be automatically identified from program information obtained via the Internet. Each time the program changes, this number is automatically incremented by 1 and rewritten in the same place. In this way, the timing at the end of the predetermined program is known. In this embodiment, the program information 448 being reproduced / displayed is provided as communication information from the television 44, so that the timing at the end of a predetermined program (including channel switching by the user during program broadcast) is automatically determined. it can. As a scene showing the effect, consider a case where the user sets “prohibit cleaning only during a specific program display period” (cleaning is resumed immediately after the specific program display is completed) at Step 71 in FIG. Then, the moment when the value of the program information 448 being reproduced / displayed can be automatically recognized as the timing when the program display is terminated. As a result, it is possible to provide the user with a service for restarting cleaning immediately after the display of a specific program is completed.

In Step 74 of FIG. 39, in order to obtain necessary communication information from the smart home appliance-related equipment (the TV 44 and the air conditioner 42) or the composite module 1295 (which incorporates a human sensor, a light sensor, and a wind sensor) Detailed information communication steps are required. Specifically, first, 1) Information communication request to smart home appliance related devices and composite module 1295
As a response to the request, 2) response information communication from the smart home appliance-related device or the composite module 1295 is executed.

  First, an information communication request is issued (communication) to the air conditioner 42 and the television 44 of the smart home appliance-related device to be executed. In this case, unlike FIG. 41 (c) and FIG. 42 (c), 62h indicating “read request” as the set value of the communication access control information ESV (h means hexadecimal indicating hexadecimal notation, and 62h Information in which “01100010” is set in binary is transmitted from the robot cleaner 16 or the home gateway 10 (system controller α_1126) to the air conditioner 42 or the television 44.

  Then, information that is answered from the air conditioner 42 toward the issuing (communication) side of the request is shown in FIG. 41, and information that is answered from the television 44 is shown in FIG. In this case, since it becomes a “read request reply” in response to the “read request”, the set value of the communication access control information ESV is 72h (01110010 in binary).

  As shown in FIG. 41 (d), the information indicating the operation state of the air conditioner 42 that is initially replied is “air conditioner operation information 422”. Therefore, as shown in FIG. Is set. When the air conditioner 42 is in an operating state, 30h is described in the individual exchange information EDT, and 31h is described and answered when the air conditioner 42 is not operating.

  Since the information to be answered next is the sleeping mode setting information 424, 8Fh is set in the type identification information EPC of the exchange information. When the air conditioner 42 is in the sleeping mode, 41h is described in the individual exchange information EDT, and when the air conditioner 42 is in the non-sleeping mode, 42h is described and answered.

  Since the information to be answered thereafter is start / end timer reservation information 426/428 as shown in FIG. 41 (d), 90h and 94h are respectively set in the type identification information EPC of the corresponding exchange information. Here, when the start or end timer of the air conditioner 42 is reserved, 41h is described in the corresponding individual exchange information EDT. On the other hand, when there is no reservation, 42h is set and the answer is returned.

  Here, the ON / OFF setting value in the individual exchange information EDT differs only with respect to the air conditioner operation information 422 indicating the basic function, and for the information indicating other states, the ON / OFF setting value in the individual exchange information EDT. Are all in common. By making all ON / OFF setting values in the individual exchange information EDT common, there is an effect that the information reading speed on the smart home appliance (robot cleaner 16) side corresponding to automatic control can be increased.

  42D to 42F, “screen display / audio output information 442” (type identification of corresponding exchange information) from the television 44 toward the robot cleaner 16 or the home gateway 10 (system controller α_1126). Information EPC value 80h) and "volume setting value 444" (corresponding exchange information type identification information EPC value B8h), "recording availability information (corresponding exchange information type identification information EPC value C1h)" “Program information being reproduced / displayed” (the value of the corresponding exchange information type identification information EPC is BCh) is transmitted in this order. Here, the value described in the column of the individual exchange information EDT in the volume setting value 444 is set as a relative value when the maximum volume is 100% / the audio output zero is 0%, and the value when the maximum volume is 100%. Is set to 64h / 00h when there is no output sound. Then, the ON / OFF set value in the individual exchange information EDT regarding the screen display / audio output information 442 (indicating whether the television 44 is operating or turned off) indicating the basic function is 30h / 31h, which is the same as FIG. I'm doing it.

  In this way, the ON / OFF setting values related to the basic functions are matched regardless of the type of smart home appliance-related device, and the information reading speed on the smart home appliance (robot cleaner 16) side corresponding to automatic control is increased. Similarly, the ON / OFF setting value in other individual exchange information EDT (related to recording availability information) is matched with 41h / 42h irrespective of the type of smart home appliance-related device, and the smart home appliance that supports automatic control ( The information reading speed on the (robot cleaner) side has been increased.

Section 6.4 Method for Estimating / Determining User Behavior and State FIG. 43 shows an example of the relationship between information necessary for estimating / determining the above-described user behavior and state and the control conditions. Each control condition is divided in the column direction (vertical direction) of FIG. 43, and the operation state information of the smart home appliance-related device and the composite module (sensor) is described for each row on the left side.

  In addition, the degree to which each control condition and the state information intersect each other is described. Therefore, the blank (no description cell) portion from the center to the right side in FIG. 43 indicates that the operation state corresponding to the estimation / judgment material related to the control condition is not used. As specific examples, information relating to “human sensor information 602” and “start / end timer reservation information 426/428 in the air conditioner” is used for determining a control condition of “cleaning during user's work (manner mode)” do not do.

  What is important here is that the information required for estimating / determining the user's behavior and state differs for each control condition selected by the user, and the target of the smart home appliance-related device or the related composite module (sensor) that is the information collection partner Is where it changes. In addition, the basic functions of smart home appliances that support automatic control (for example, cleaning, frozen storage, air conditioning, information collection and entertainment?) Will change the target of smart home appliance-related devices and composite modules (sensors) that are the information gathering partner. To do.

  In particular, when the robot cleaner 16 is targeted as a smart home appliance capable of automatic control, attention should be paid to the location where the robot cleaner 16 is automatically changed. That is, the robot cleaner 16 can move across different rooms (sections 1 to m_1142-1 to m in FIG. 1) in the home or office. The location of the robot cleaner 16 that changes from moment to moment is important for estimation / determination of the user behavior / state. Therefore, in the system according to the present embodiment, when the robot cleaner 16 moves from an unmanned room to a room where the user is working (when the section 1142 is moved), it is automatically detected and another smart device installed in the next room. It is necessary to re-collect information from home appliance related devices and related composite modules (sensors). Therefore, in the present embodiment system, depending on the type (basic function and location) of the smart home appliance that supports automatic control or the control conditions selected by the user, other related smart home appliance-related composite modules (sensors) are added. Automatically reselect as appropriate.

  Up to now, it is attached to a method for obtaining information used for estimating / determining the sleeping / working / absent (vacant room) state, which is a control condition set by the user, from smart home appliances such as an air conditioner 42 and a television 44. Explained. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and human sensor information 602, optical sensor information 606, and wind sensor information 608 may be used as shown in FIG. For example, when a light sensor (composite module with built-in) detects light in a room at night, the user may be working. On the other hand, when “the inside of the room is dark” is indicated as the optical sensor information 606, there is a high possibility of being absent (in an empty room state) or sleeping. Furthermore, since the human sensor information 602 detects the movement of the user, there is a high possibility that the output from the human sensor is small during absence (in an empty room state) or at bedtime.

  When estimating / determining a user's action and state using the information (table) in FIG. 43 (Step 75 in FIG. 39), the correspondence between the control condition and the operation state of the smart home appliance-related device / composite module (sensor) is Converted to a number. For example, a relatively large positive value is assigned to “corresponding” described in the cell (corresponding column) in FIG. 43, a relatively small positive value is assigned to “possibility”, and a relatively large negative value is assigned to “not applicable”. Assign a value in advance. Individual information that matches the above “applicable”, “possible”, or “not applicable” in the information transmitted from the air conditioner 42, the television 44, the human sensor, the optical sensor, or the wind sensor (including the composite module). The exchange information EDT is converted into the numerical value assigned in advance as described above.

  Next, in FIG. 40, an added value of the assigned values is calculated for the column corresponding to On as the control condition selected by the user. In Step 75 of FIG. 39, it is determined whether or not the added value is included within a predetermined range, and the user's action and state are automatically estimated / determined. The table information shown in FIG. 43 is stored in advance in the memory unit 242 or the memory unit 1232 shown in FIG. 38, and the device controller 240 in the robot cleaner 16 or the processor 1230 in the home gateway 10 (system controller α_1126) stores the table information. Estimate / judge using.

  In the above description, the method of collectively estimating / determining each control condition selected by the user using the table information of FIG. 43 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, as will be described later with reference to FIG. 45, the corresponding control condition (the operation state of the smart home appliance for automatic control to be set) is determined from the information collected from the smart home appliance-related device and the composite module (sensor). An algorithm (determination rule) may be set in advance.

  As another application example, as described in Section 4.3, the estimation / judgment of the user status item 2320, the user action item 2340, and the user request item 2360 at a time using the estimation / judgment collation table of FIG. You may do it.

Section 6.5 Other Embodiments Related to Automatic Control Between Smart Home Appliances Regarding a series of processing procedures in the smart home appliance automatic control system, FIG. 39 shows a general form (not limited to a robot cleaner as an automatic control-compatible smart home appliance) It can also be applied to smart home appliances that support automatic control. On the other hand, another embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 44 regarding the detailed operation when the smart home appliance corresponding to automatic control is limited to the robot cleaner.

  The process of “automatic cleaning setting On” shown in Step 1 of FIG. 44 corresponds to Step 71 of FIG. The robot cleaner 16 and smart home appliance-related devices (such as the air conditioner 42 and the television 44) can be set from a remote location using the home gateway 10 (a personal computer, a tablet / smartphone). In this way, the user can set the operation state of the robot cleaner 16 while the user is sleeping or working (for example, whether the robot cleaner 16 is set to the non-operation state in FIG. 40 or is cleaning / photographing being performed in the manner mode).

  The steps after the determination step of “Is the illumination On?” In the next Step 2 correspond to the processing after Step 74 in FIG. In FIG. 44, for ease of reading, the processing of Step 73 in FIG. 39 is intentionally omitted. Similarly, in order to make it easier to understand the processing in the smart home appliance that supports automatic control, in FIG. 44, a processing method that does not use the table information of FIG. 43 will be described. In this way, processing is simplified by using the flow shown in FIG. 44 (preliminary processing procedure) without using the table information of FIG. 43, and the price of smart home appliances with automatic control can be reduced. There is an effect that can be achieved.

  In Step 2 of FIG. 44, when the illumination with the network function is On, it is considered that there is a person in the room. In this case, the robot cleaner 16 is not operated (set to a non-operating state), or cleaning / photographing in the manner mode is performed. On the other hand, when the illumination is off, it is assumed that the person is absent (in an empty room state) or sleeping, and moves to Step 11 to determine which state it is.

  Next, in Step 11 of FIG. 44, it is determined whether or not the timer of the air conditioner 42 is valid. Here, as information relating to the operating state of the air conditioner 42, communication information having the data structure shown in FIG. 41 is sent to the air conditioner 42 (strictly speaking, the home automation HA adapter 1 (composite module) 14-1 attached to the air conditioner 42). Send. If the air conditioner timer is invalid (no timer is set) as the determination result of Step 11, cleaning is started assuming that there is no person in the room (vacant room state) (Step 13). Conversely, if the air conditioner timer is valid (the start timer reservation information 426 of FIG. 43 is ON or the end timer reservation information 428 is ON) as the determination result of Step 11, the user is assumed to be sleeping and the timer is set. The robot cleaner 16 is not operated in the room for several hours (Step 12). Further, instead of not cleaning (setting to a non-operation state) as another processing method of Step 12, cleaning in the manner mode may be performed. Here, in the present embodiment, regardless of the manner mode operation state / normal operation state, during the operation of the robot cleaner 16, the surrounding situation is simultaneously photographed by the imaging device (camera) built in the robot cleaner 16, and the user always keeps the cleaning condition. I can check it. The video taken at this time is displayed in real time on the user I / F unit 1234 (FIG. 38) in the home gateway 10 (system controller α_1126).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in Step 2 that “the illumination in the room is on”, it is automatically estimated / determined that there is a person in the room. Next, in Step 3, it is determined whether or not there is a sounding device (smart appliance related device such as the television 44) that is operating. If at least one device that produces sound (such as the television 44) is operating, the user considers that the user is in the room and does not operate the robot cleaner 16 (set it to the non-operating state) or perform cleaning in the manner mode.・ Let's shoot. Here, Step 4 and Step 5 in FIG. 44 correspond to the processing of Step 76 to Step 79 in FIG. Step 10 in FIG. 44 corresponds to Step 80 in FIG. That is, when the smart home appliance related device (robot cleaner 16) that emits sound such as the television 44 is operating as shown in Step 4 and Step 5 in FIG. Increase the volume of the related smart home appliance related device (TV 44). Then, after the room is cleaned and photographed, the volume of the smart home appliance-related device (TV 44) is restored (Step 10).

  In the system of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 38, the robot cleaner 16 and the home gateway 10 (system controller α_1126) can be connected to the Internet (external system network line 1788) via the broadband router 12. Yes. Therefore, TV program information can be acquired from the Internet. Therefore, both the robot cleaner 16 and the home gateway 10 (system controller α_1126) can independently acquire program information that the television 44 is operating / displaying. Then, according to the user's presetting, the operation / non-operation of the robot cleaner 16 is automatically switched according to the designated program. Here, the automatic operation / non-operation switching processing of the robot cleaner 16 and the control (volume change etc.) of the related smart home appliance-related devices such as the television 44 may be performed by the robot cleaner 16 alone or the home gateway. 10 (system controller α_1126) may be controlled in an integrated manner.

  If the user pre-sets “not to be cleaned when broadcasting a specific program” at the location, during the period when the specific program is being displayed (whether the program is being broadcast or the user selects the display channel) During the period until switching, the robot cleaner 16 is held in a non-operating state. Then, after this program display is finished, cleaning is started again.

Although not shown in FIG. 44, in the system according to the present embodiment, it can also be determined whether or not the air conditioner 42 is set to the sleep mode based on the individual exchange information EDT in the sleep mode setting information 424 described in FIG. . However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it can be seen that other smart home appliances related to the robot cleaner 16 are set to the sleep mode in a similar manner. If the user is sleeping as a result of the estimation / judgment, the robot cleaner 16 may be cleaned in a non-operating state or a manner mode.
Further, as shown in Step 6 to Step 8 of FIG. 44, in the system according to the present embodiment, an abnormality process during operation of the robot cleaner 16 (corresponding to Step 79 of FIG. 39) is possible. In other words, when the robot cleaner 16 stops for some reason (Step 6), a notification that “abnormal stop of the robot cleaner 16” is sent to the smart home appliance-related device (display screen or sound) that is closest to the stop position of the robot cleaner 16 To do. Specifically, when the robot cleaner 16 is stopped at Step 6, the arrangement position information of the smart home appliance-related equipment related to the robot cleaner 16 main body (located in the room (section 1142) where the stopped robot cleaner 16 is present). To collect. As a means for collecting the arrangement position information, a GPS function owned (incorporated) in the robot cleaner 16 main body and in each smart home appliance-related device may be used. The method described in section 4 may be used. Then, after identifying the smart home appliance-related device present at the position closest to the stop position of the robot cleaner 16 (Step 7), at Step 8, the status of “abnormal stop of the robot cleaner 16” is displayed on the display screen of the relevant smart home appliance-related device. And notify the user. At this point, the method of notifying the user of “abnormal stop of robot cleaner 16” is not limited to the above screen display, and voice notification by voice output may be performed. Further, the device to notify the user is not limited to the smart home appliance-related device present at the position closest to the stop position of the robot cleaner 16, for example, the robot cleaner 16 itself or the user I / F unit 1234 of the home gateway 10 (system controller α_1126). good. Furthermore, the present invention is not limited to this, and any smart home appliance may be responsible for notifying the user.

  As a method for estimating / determining the user's behavior and state in Step 75 of FIG. 39, section 6.4 described a method of using the table information of FIG. Another application for the method is shown in FIG. That is, when the user does not perform automatic cleaning setting in Step 21, the user's behavior and state estimation / judgment processing is stopped as in Step 22.

  On the other hand, when the user performs automatic cleaning setting in Step 21, first, in Step 23, it is determined whether or not the display operation of the television 44 is being executed. When the television 44 is performing a display operation, there are many cases where a user (person) is present in a room where the television 44 is installed. When the display operation of the television 44 is being executed, the presence or absence of an operating current in the outlet is checked in Step 27. In addition, the detection target is not limited to the operating current in the wall outlet, but may be the measurement of the current value flowing in the extension cord or table tap (in this case, the sensor module that measures the current value flowing in the extension cord or table tap and its Extension cords and table taps have a composite module structure composed of communication modules that communicate measurement results). Here, when a current exceeding a predetermined value flows through the wall outlet or the extension cord / table tap in the room (section 1142) in which the robot cleaner 16 is disposed, there is no device in the corresponding room (section 1142). Means operation. Therefore, in that case, it is automatically estimated / determined that “the user is working”. Then, in step 71 of FIG. 39, when the user sets “cleaning during operation (manner mode)” using the display screen shown in the example of FIG. 40 (Step 31), the manner mode is set as shown in Step 42. Perform cleaning. On the other hand, if “cleaning during operation (manner mode)” is not set in Step 31, it is set to a non-operational state (Step 41).

  On the other hand, when a current exceeding a predetermined value does not flow through the wall outlet or the extension cord / table tap in the room (section 1142) in which the robot cleaner 16 is disposed (Step 27), the user is likely to be sleeping. . Then, in Step 71 of FIG. 39, when the user sets “Cleaning while sleeping (Manner mode)” using the display screen shown in the example of FIG. 40 (Step 32), in the manner mode state as shown in Step 42. Perform cleaning. On the other hand, when “cleaning while sleeping (manner mode)” is not set in Step 32, the non-operating state (Step 41) is set.

  If the television 44 is not in operation (Step 23), it is determined at Step 24 whether the LED illumination 58 (FIG. 38) is on. If the LED lighting 58 in the room (section 1142) is turned on at night, the user (person) is expected to be in the room (section 1142). Then, the value of the current flowing through the wall outlet (or extension cord / table tap) at Step 27 is checked, and the process proceeds to the same process as described above.

  If the LED illumination 58 (FIG. 38) is not lit at Step 24, the wind sensor information 608 obtained from the wind sensor (the combined module 1295 in which the wind sensor is built) is checked at Step 25. Here, when the wind is blowing in the room (section 1142), the user is in the room (section 1142) because the air conditioner 42 is operating or the user opens the window and blows in the wind. In many cases.

  If it is found that the wind is blowing in the room (section 1142), it is checked in step 26 whether the air conditioner 42 is operating. When the air conditioner 42 is in operation, the user (person) is expected to be in the room (section 1142) as described above. Then, the value of the current flowing through the wall outlet (or extension cord / table tap) at Step 27 is checked, and the process proceeds to the same process as described above.

  If the air conditioner 42 is not operating as a result of Step 26, the optical sensor information 606 is collected from the optical sensor (composite module incorporating the optical sensor) according to Step 28. Here, when the room (section 1142) is dark, the possibility of night is high, so the process proceeds to Step 32 for determining whether or not cleaning is possible. On the other hand, if the room (section 1142) is bright, there is a possibility of daytime.

  On the other hand, when the inside of the room (section 1142) is in a windless state in Step 25, the room (section 1142) is obtained using the human sensor information 602 obtained from the human sensor (combined module 1295 in which Step 29 is installed) in Step 29. It is determined whether or not there is a user (person) (Step 29).

  Here, as a corresponding processing method of the robot cleaner 16 when it is determined from the human sensor information 602 that there is a user (person) in the room (section 1142), “non-operation state setting” or “cleaning operation in the manner mode state” ] Will be automatically determined. Therefore, the “cleaning possibility at bedtime” in Step 32 is checked.

  On the other hand, if no human detection is detected in Step 29, it is determined that there is no user (person) in the room (section 1142), and “Cleanability while going out” in Step 33 is checked.

  Note that the robot cleaner 16 of the present embodiment may cause dust to rise when the cleaning operation is performed when wind is detected in the wind detection at Step 25 or when the air conditioner operation is detected at Step 26. It is possible to change the cleaning route in the room or in a non-operating state. Examples of cleaning routes after the change include a route for cleaning other rooms by omitting cleaning of a room where wind is detected, and an area on the leeward side of the normal cleaning route in a room where wind is detected. Route to clean up. That is, in this case, in the wind power detection, not only the presence / absence of wind but also the wind direction may be detected.

1 Home network system (system α)
10 Home gateway (system controller α)
12 Broadband Router 14-1-4 HA (Home Automation) Adapter 1-4
(Composite module)
16 Robot cleaner 40 Compound module alone 42 Air conditioner 44 TV 46 Laundry 48 Outlet or table tap 56 Camera unit in refrigerator 58 LED lighting 202 Communication module 240 Device controller 242 Memory unit 260 Sensor module 270 Drive module 780 Line between routers 422 Air conditioner operation information 424 Sleep mode setting information 426 Start timer setting information 428 End timer setting information 442 Screen display / audio output information 444 Volume setting value 446 Recording availability information 448 Playing / displaying program information (playing / displaying program number information within the same day)
488 Operating current value flowing through outlet 602 Human sensor information 606 Optical sensor information 608 Wind sensor information 1102 Wholesaler A
1104-1-2 Wholesalers B1-B2
1112-1 to 3 Service providers A to C
1114 Information sharing or resource cooperation 1106-1 to -n Server 1 to n
1118-1 to -n database 1122-1 to -3 domains 1 to 3
1124 Smart Meter
1126 System controller α
1128 System controller β
1132 System α
1134 System β
1142-1 to -m section 1 to m
1152 Predetermined Product Generation Unit 1154 Predetermined Product Storage Unit 1202-1-10 Communication Module 1206 Discharge Amount Monitor Unit 1208 Inflow Amount Monitor Unit 1212 Discharge Amount Control Unit 1214 Inflow Amount Control Unit 1216 Discharge Amount Monitor Unit 1218 Inflow Amount Monitor Unit 1220 (Car ) Battery 1222 Sensor module 1226 Display module 1230 Processor 1232, 1242, 1244, 1246 Memory unit 1234 User I / F unit 1240-1-3 Device controller (processor)
1242 Memory Unit 1244 Memory Unit 1246 Memory Unit 1248 Memory Unit 1250-1 to -5 Device
1260-1 to -9 sensor module 1270-1 to -4 Actuator module 1290-1 to -7 unit 1295-1 to -7 combined module 1300 router (gateway) / built-in battery 1330 processor 1406, 1416 emission amount monitor / Communication module 1408, 1418 Inflow monitor / Communication module 1412 Emission control / Communication module 1414 Inflow control / communication module 1440 Other function modules (functions other than communication)
1444 Remote cooperation 1450-1 to -4 Device
1460-1 to -5 sensor / communication module 1465 processor / communication module 1470-1 to 2 Actuator / communication module 1475 memory / communication module 1478 display / communication module 1480 antenna 1490 bus line 1552 (solar light) power generation module 1554 Power storage module (battery)
1560 Near-field communication module 1602 Input terminal 1604 Output terminal 1606 Voltage output terminal 1608 Infrared light emitting element 1610 Variable resistance unit 1614 Conduction / disconnection switching unit 1618 Predetermined voltage generation unit 1620 Setting resistance value storage unit 1624 Setting state storage unit 1628 Setting voltage storage unit 1644 Format conversion unit 1648 Infrared light emission drive circuit 1660 Communication module 1660-1 Insulating substrate on which a communication module is formed 1666 Communication module with built-in antenna 1670 Actuator module 1680 Processor module 1690 Memory module 1700 Communication control unit 1710 Interface unit 1734 Processor 1736 Processor 1738 Processor 1740 Management information (table) related information recording area 174 2, 1744, 1746, 1748 Management information (table)
1752 Communication module within the same system 1758 Communication module compatible with outside system 1764 Communication module 1766-1 to n Other function module 1768 Communication module 1770 Wireless 1772 Antenna unit 1774 Antenna connection unit 1776 Power supply unit 1778 External module connection unit 1780 Signal processing unit 1784 Network line in the same system 1788 Network line outside the system 1790 Memory part 1791 Application change software 1792 Application storage part 1793 Self-attribute data 1794 Life management data 1795 Operation period management data 1796 Sensor module management data 1797 Drive module management data 1799 Security target data 1810 Exchange Information (table)
1830, (ESV) Communication access control information 1840, (EPC) Exchange identification type identification information 1852 Command (command issuance)
1854 Result report (status)
1872 Response request (request)
1874 Response
1894 Periodic / non-periodic reporting 1900 Area division status of main trunk roads or water and sewage pipes, distribution power lines, wired communication lines, etc. 1914 Physical layer frame generation unit 1918 Physical layer frame analysis unit 1924 Address information generation unit 1928 Address information Extraction unit 1934 Content setting unit 1938 Content extraction unit 1940 Address information I / F (interface) unit 1950 Content information I / F (interface) unit 1960 Processor 2002 Communication module 2030 Processor 2032 Memory unit 2082 Network line in the same domain 2100 Radio wave source Direction detection or intensity or phase detection 2310 elapsed time 2320 state item 2330 state probability 2340 user action item 2350 user action probability 2360 user required Desired Item 2370 User Request Probability 2600 Unit Management Pseudo Drive 2610 List Data Folder 2612 Device Corresponding Folder 2614 Complex Module Corresponding Folder 2616-1--m Unit Management Folder in Section 2622 Sensor / Communication Module Corresponding Folder 2624 Drive / Communication Module Corresponding Folder 2626 Processor / communication module correspondence folder 2628 Memory / communication module correspondence folder 2630 Other function / communication module correspondence folder 2634 Binary data correspondence folder 2638 Multivalue data correspondence folder 2710 Antenna 2720 Amplifier and signal processing circuit 2730 Stealth plate 2734 Surface is fine Metal plate layer with a rough structure 2738 Weakly conductive organic layer with a fine uneven structure on both front and back surfaces 2760 Polar La antenna 2800 incident radio wave 2920 resistors 2940-1, -2 voltage differentiator 2960 adder 3010 processor (hard portion)
3012 Bus line 3014 Recording medium (hardware part)
3015 In-system connection correspondence information communication execution unit 3016 Information communication execution unit 3017 Outside-system connection correspondence information communication execution unit 3018 Connection unit 3020 BIOS (Basic Input / Output System) control area 3022 Device driver area 3021 In-system connection correspondence communication control part 3024 Recording medium control unit 3025 Communication driver area corresponding to connection within system 3026 Communication driver area 3027 Communication driver area corresponding to connection outside system 3028 Communication control unit 3029 Communication control part corresponding to connection outside system 3030 OS (Operating System) layer 3034 Management / management of units within system Control area
(Virtual device driver area)
3040 API (Application Programming Interface) command passage boundary line 3045 API (Application Programming Interface) command 3050 Application software 3120 JVM (Java Virtual Machine)
3140 Unit management / control related method group 3144 In-file class instance method group 3148 Main method 3150 System unit management / control class 3154 File class 3158 Application class 3160 Class group 3170, 3174 Incorporation (import)
3188 Program steps 3190, 3194 Reference 3501 Supermarket store area 3502 Supermarket cash register area 3503 Supermarket exit area 3505 Shoes 3506 Milk 3507 Bags 3511a and 3511b Cash register 3512 Monitoring device 3521 Refrigerator 3522 System controller 3523 Combined module (unit)
3525 Display 3531 Compound Module (Unit)
3532 System controller 3533 Smartphone 3540 Wall to be inspected 3541a, 3541b, 3541c Steel frame 3542, 3543 Composite module (unit)
3542a, 3543b Antenna of composite module (unit) 3545 Inspection car 3546 System controller 3548 Pipes such as gas pipe, water pipe, fire hydrant pipe 3549 Composite module (unit)
3550 Greenhouse House 3551 System Controller 3552 Surveillance Cameras 3553a, 3553b, 3553c Bar-shaped Monitoring Device with Built-in Compound Module (Unit) 3554 Compound Module (Unit)
3560 Patient Bed 3561 Medical Instrument Box 3560a, 3561a, 3565a Combined Module (Unit)
3562 System controller 3565 Weapons such as blades 3567, 3568 Airports 3569 Airplanes 3570 Passengers 3570a, 3573a Combined modules (units)
3571, 3572 System controller 3573 Carry bag 3581 System controller 3581a Internet connection unit 3581b Protocol recognition unit 3581c Communication standard recognition unit 3581d Data processing unit 3581e Data detection unit 3581f Communication standard matching format setting unit 3581g Internet matching data output unit 3583 Compound module 3584a Access Point 3584b Base station 3585 Internet ADRSIEE IEEE802.15.4 compliant address for each chip
(8 bytes)
APL02, APL06 Communication middleware layer APLDT Communication middleware data CEDT Extended transmission data CM-1 Initial control / processing information CM-n nth control / processing information CMI control / processing related information (Control / Management Information)
CMTID Compound module type identification information (6 bits)
(Complex Module Type Identifier)
CMST composite module structure information (1 bit)
CRC error check CT2DT binary transmission data part CTMDT multi-value transmission data part DEXADRS IEEE extended address on the receiving side
(Destination IEEE Extension Address)
DEOJ Receiving device identification information (3 bytes)
DIDC Same type device identification code (1 byte)
(Device Identification Code among the same Device Type)
DIPADRS Receiver IP address (16 bytes)
(Destination Internet Protocol Address)
PAN-specific identification information on the DPANID receiving side
(Destination Personal Area Network Identifier)
DTC Device type code (1 byte)
DTGC Device type group code (1 byte)
(Device Type (Class) Group Code)
E-DT E-format data (exchange information 1810)
E-HD E-format header [1X81h]
EDT Individual exchange information (PDC specified size)
EPC, (1840) Exchange information type identification information (1 byte)
ESV, (1830) Communication access control information (1 byte)
EXADRS IEEE Extension Address
EXDT extended data EXEXADRS Extended IEEE extended address (1 byte)
(Expanded IEEE Extension Address)
EXL06 Extended application layer FC1 to FC5, FD1 to FD5 Composite module (unit)
HPLMT remaining node information (Hop Limit) (1 byte)
IPADRS IP address IPCLS Communication class information (1 byte)
IPLBL communication type label information (2.5 bytes)
IPPKT IP packet related information (8 bytes)
IPv6 Internet Protocol version 6 layer IPv6DU IPv6 data / payload IPv6HD IPv6 header IPvRS version information (4 bits)
LIPv6DU IPv6 data / payload length information (2 bytes)
(Length of Internet Protocol Version 6 Data / Payload)
LPSDU Physical layer data / payload length information (1 byte)
MAC02, MAC06 Media access layer MACHD MAC layer header MACNTL MAC layer frame control information (2 bytes)
MADRS address information MASQNM MAC layer sequence number (1 byte)
MPDU MAC layer frame MSDU MAC layer data / payload
(Medium Access Layer Data / Payload)
MST module structure information (1 bit)
NCM Control / Number of processes (1 byte) (Number of Control / Management)
Header type identification information (1 byte) immediately following the NXHD IPv6 header
(Next Header Information to identify the type of header
immediately following the IPv6 header)
PANID PAN-specific information (PAN-specific identification information)
Data size of PDC individual exchange information (1 byte)
PHY02, PHY06 Physical layer PHYHD Physical layer header PPDU Physical layer frame PRM Preamble (4 bytes) [00000000h]
PSDU Physical layer data / payload SEOJ Sender identification information (3 bytes)
SEXADRS IEEE extended address on the sending side
(Source IEEE Extension Address)
SFD Physical layer frame start information (1 byte) [A7h]
SIPADRS sender IP address (16 bytes)
(Source Internet Protocol Address)
SIPHD head information SPANID PAN-specific identification information on the transmitting side
(Source Personal Area Network Identifier)
SYNC synchronization header (5 bytes) (Synchronization Header)
TCPDU TCP data / payload
(Transmission Control Protocol Data / Payload)
TCPHD TCP header (Transmission Control Protocol)
Identification information for association between TID request transmission and response reception (2 bytes)

Claims (16)

First, second and third system controllers provided respectively in at least a first section, a second section and a third section;
A monitoring unit provided with information from the first system controller in the first section;
A network system provided in each of the first, second and third sections;
Server,
A network system provided between the server and the first, second and third system controllers;
The management method is:
By using the network system,
Performing communication between the first, second and third system controllers and corresponding electronic units;
Performing communication between the server and the first, second and third system controllers;
Detecting with the first system controller whether a special electronic unit has moved from the third section to the second section by the execution of the communication or not.
Presenting at least position information about the special electronic unit to the monitoring unit based on the detection,
Management method by security management system. The first section includes the first system controller and the monitoring unit, and the first section is a room,
The second section and the third section are areas different from the room and remote from the room and where the special electronic unit is to be checked.
The management method by the security management system of Claim 1. The second section and the third section are areas including government offices and / or schools,
The management method by the security management system of Claim 1. In the first section, there is a security room including the monitoring unit, a monitor or a security company,
The management method by the security management system of Claim 1. The location information about the special electronic unit is transmitted to the first system controller through the local network system in the first section and the local network system in the second section;
The management method by the security management system of Claim 1. About the special electronic unit to the first system controller through the network system local to the first section, the network system local to the second section and the network system connected to the server The location information is transmitted;
The management method by the security management system of Claim 1. The security management system manages a plurality of the special electronic units, and each of the plurality of special electronic units has unique identification data (ID),
The monitoring unit is provided in a room in the first section,
The second section and the third section are areas different from the room and remote from the room and where the special electronic unit is to be checked;
The monitoring unit and / or the first system controller check a safe combination of a plurality of the IDs.
The management method by the security management system of Claim 1. When a safe combination of the plurality of IDs cannot be obtained, the monitoring unit outputs a warning.
The management method by the security management system of Claim 7. First, second and third system controllers provided respectively in at least a first section, a second section and a third section;
A monitoring unit connected to the first system controller in the first section;
A network system provided in each of the first, second and third sections;
Server,
A network system provided between the server and the first, second and third system controllers,
The first system controller recognizes whether or not the special electronic unit has moved from the third section to the second section via the corresponding network system, and the monitoring unit has at least position information about the special electronic unit. Present,
Security data management system characterized by that. The first section includes the first system controller and the monitoring unit, and the first section is a room,
The second section and the third section are areas different from the room and remote from the room and where the special electronic unit is to be checked.
The security data management system according to claim 9. The second section and the third section are areas including government offices and / or schools,
The security data management system according to claim 9. In the first section, there is a security room including the monitoring unit, a monitor or a security company,
The security data management system according to claim 9. The location information about the special electronic unit is transmitted to the first system controller through the local network system in the first section and the local network system in the second section;
The security data management system according to claim 9. About the special electronic unit to the first system controller through the local network system in the first section, the local network system in the second section and the wide area network system to which the server is connected The location information is transmitted;
The security data management system according to claim 9. The security data management system manages a plurality of special electronic units, and each of the plurality of special electronic units has unique identification data (ID),
The monitoring unit is provided in a room in the first section,
The second section and the third section are areas different from the room and remote from the room and where the special electronic unit is to be checked;
The monitoring unit and / or the first system controller check a safe combination of a plurality of the IDs.
The security data management system according to claim 9. When a safe combination of the plurality of IDs cannot be obtained, the monitoring unit outputs a warning.
The security data management system according to claim 15.

Images